SY27 2584 3_3174_81R_82R_91R_92R_Maintenance_May89 3 3174 81R 82R 91R 92R Maintenance May89
SY27-2584-3_3174_81R_82R_91R_92R_Maintenance_May89 SY27-2584-3_3174_81R_82R_91R_92R_Maintenance_May89
User Manual: SY27-2584-3_3174_81R_82R_91R_92R_Maintenance_May89
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 340
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
----- ---- --- --------- -
3174 Establishment Controller
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R
Maintenance Information
3270 Information Display System
SY21-2584-C.3
----- --- ------ -----------,-
.3174 Establishment Controller
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R
Maintenance Information
SY27 -2584-03
Fourth Edition (May 1989)
This revision obsoletes and replaces SY27-2584-2. See "Summary of Changes" on page xxi for the
changes made to this manual. Changes or additions to text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line
to the left of the change. The drawings and specifications contained herein shall not be reproduced in
whole or in part without written permission.
IBM has prepared this maintenance manual for the use of IBM customer engineers in the maintenance or
repair of the specific machines indicated. IBM makes no representations that it is suitable for any other
purpose.
Information contained in this manual is subject to change from time to time. Any such change will be
reported in subsequent revisions.
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to
make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM licensed program in
this publication is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's licensed program may be used. Any
functionally equivalent program may be used instead.
Requests for IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office
serving your locality.
A form for readers' comments is provided at the back of this publication. Address additional comments to
IBM Corporation, Department E02, P.O. Box 12195, Research Triangle Park, N.C., U.S.A. 27709. IBM may
use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any
obligation to you.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1987, 1988
The following warning statements (required by country regulatory agencies) are applicable in the countries
indicated.
United States
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions manual may cause interference to radio communications. It has
been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of
Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when
operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference.
Additional IBM Statement
This warning is also applicable to all attaching units produced for use in the U.S.A. that have been
manufactured after December 31,1980. A notice of compliance has been affixed within the customer
access area of all affected units.
Instructions to User:
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to peripherals in order
to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables are available through IBM marketing channels, or from
dealers of computer accessories. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. It is the
responsibility of the user to correct such interference.
United Kingdom
Warning: This IBM product is made to high Safety standards. It complies inherently with
Telecommunications safety standard BS6301. It is not designed to provide protection from excessive
voltages appearing externally at its interfaces. Therefore, when this product is connected to a public
telecommunications network via any other equipment, and you connect to this product items not supplied
by IBM United Kingdom Ltd., you must comply with mandatory telecommunications safety requirements.
You may do this either by choosing products which also are approved as complying to BS6301 or British
Telecom Technical Guide No. 26, or by the use of approved safety barriers. Consult the local office of your
public telecommunications operator, for advice and permission to make the connections.
Canadian Department of Communications compliance statement
This equipment does not exceed Class B limits per radio noise emissions for digital apparatus, set out in
the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications. Operation in a
residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the owner or
operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference.
Avis de conformite aux normes du ministere des Communications du Canada
Cet equipement ne depasse pas les limites de Classe B d'emission de bruits radioelectriques pour les
appareils numeriques, telles que prescrites par Ie Reglement sur Ie brouillage radioelectrique etabli par Ie
ministere des Communications du Canada. L'exploitation faite en milieu residentiel peut entrainer Ie
brouillage des receptions radio et tele, ce qui obligerait Ie proprietaire ou I'operateur a prendre les
dispositions necessaires pour en eliminer les causes.
iii
Choosing the Right Book from the 3174 Library
The 3174 library contains information for installing, customizing, operating, maintaining, and programming
the data stream for the 3174 controller. The list below shows the manuals you need to perform these tasks.
To Organize library Materials:
Binders and Inserts, SBOF-0089
Binder, SX23-0331
Inserts, SX23-0332
To Become Familiar with the 3174:
Master Index, GC30-3515
3174 Introduction, GA27-3850
3270 Information Display System Introduction, GA27-2739
To Prepare Your Site for the 3174:
Site Planning, GA23-0213
Physical Planning Template, GX27-2999
To Set Up and Operate the 3174:
Models 1L, 1R, 2R, 3R, 11L, 11R, 12R, and 13R User's Guide, GA23-0337
Models 51 R, 52R, 53R, 61 R, 62R, and 63R User's Guide, GA23-0333
Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R User's Guide, GA23-0313
To Plan for and Customize the 3174:
Configuration Support A and S
Planning Guide, GA27-3844
Utilities Guide, GA27-3853
Central Site Customizing User's Guide, GA23-0342
Configuration Support B
Planning Guide, GA27-3862
Utilities Guide, GA27-3863
Central Site Customizing User's Guide, GA23-3868
To Install Features or Convert Models on the 3174:
Encrypt/Decrypt Adapter Installation and Removal Instructions, GA23-0262
Fixed Disk Installation and Removal Instructions, GA27-3864
Diskette Drive Installation and Removal Instructions, GA23-0263
Terminal Multiplexer Adapter Installation and Removal Instructions, GA23-0265
Model Conversion Instructions, GA23-0295
Token-Ring Network Feature Installation and Removal Instructions, GA23-0329
Storage Expansion Feature Installation and Removal Instructions, GA23-0330
Communications Adapter Installation and Removal Instructions, GA27-3830
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter Installation and Removal Instructions, GA23-0341
Concurrent Communication Adapter Installation and Removal Instructions, GA27-3851
iv
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
To Plan for and Use the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter Feature:
Planning Guide, GA27 -3844 or GA27 -3862
Utilities Guide, GA27-3853 or GA27-3863
Terminal User's Reference for Expanded Functions, GA23-0332
To Use the Multiple Logical Terminals Function:
Planning Guide, GA27 -3844 or GA27 -3862
Utilities Guide, GA27 -3853 or GA27 -3863
Terminal User's Reference for Expanded Functions, GA23-0332
To Perform Problem Determination:
Customer Problem Determination, GA23-0217
Status Codes, GA27-3832
To Obtain Data Stream Programming and Reference Information:
Functional Description, GA23-0218
Data Stream Programmer's Reference, GA23-0059
3174 Character Set Reference, GA27-3831
3270 Character Set Reference, GA27-2837
3270 X.25 Operation, GA23-0204
To Perform Maintenance (Service Personnel):
Models 1L, 1R, 2R, 3R, 11L, 11R, 12R, and 13R Maintenance Information, SY27-2572
Models 51 R, 52R, 53R, 61 R, 62R, and 63R Maintenance Information, SY27-2573
Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R Maintenance Information, SY27-2584
To Find Translations of Safety Notices:
Safety Notices, GA27-3824
v
vi
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Preface
Preface
This manual identifies the tasks involved in maintaining the IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Models 81R,
82R, 91 R, and 92R and provides the information needed to keep these controllers in, or to restore them to,
good working order.
Who This Book Is For
This book is for the product-trained and support-trained IBM service representatives who maintain the 3174
Establishment Controller Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R.
The maintenance procedures described in this manual represent a part of the overall support structure for
the 3174 Establishment Controller. This support structure, which begins at the 3174 operator level, is
described briefly below.
3174 Operator
The 3174 operator performs initial problem isolation and recording of the 3174 failure indications by
following the procedures in the 3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R User's Guide or the 3174 Customer
Extended Problem Determination manual. If the problem is other than a customer operating procedure or
customer-supplied power, the operator requests IBM service.
Product-Trained Service Representative
The product-trained service representative performs the maintenance procedures contained in this manual
to isolate a problem to a specific cause, such as a defective logic card, a communication failure, a data
stream problem, or an attached-device failure. If the maintenance package cannot isolate or correct the
fault, the product-trained service representative requests assistance from the next level of the support
structure.
Support-Trained Service Representative and Area-Designated Specialist
The support-trained service representative and the area-designated specialist use their in-depth knowledge
of telecommunication and of the product to continue problem determination beyond the scope of the
maintenance manual.
Preface
vii
Preface
How This Book Is Organized
This book has five chapters:
Chapter 1, General Information, describes the service representative's maintenance approach to 3174
problem analysis and repair. This chapter also contains examples of 3174 subsystem configurations, and a
description of models and features, operating procedures, environmental restrictions, and special tools.
Chapter 2, Diagnostic Information, contains symptom charts, maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs),
offli ne and online tests, general procedures, and 370 Online Tests (370/0LTs)
Chapter 3, Repair Information, contains locations and removal/replacement procedures.
Chapter 4, Safety Inspection Guide, contains information to determine whether a machine can be placed on
an IBM maintenance agreement.
Chapter 5, Parts Catalog, contains illustrations and part numbers for the 3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and
92R.
This book has three appendixes:
Appendix A contains information about the IBM Cabling System and 3299 Terminal Multiplexer reference
information.
Appendix B contains information about the X.25 feature.
Appendix C contains information about the X.21 feature.
viii
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Contents
Chapter 1. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Service Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
3174 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
3174 Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Base Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Host Communication Configurations ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
3174 Terminal Attachment Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3174 Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Descriptions and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Hardware Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Type Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Field Replaceable Unit Identification (FRU ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
3174 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
AC Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Normal Initial Microcode Load (IML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Alt 1 IML Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Alt 1 Normal IML Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Central Site Change Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
3174 IML Selections for CSCM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Environmental Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Environmental Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
3174 Temperature and Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 1-26
3174 Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
EIA/V.35 Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
X.21 Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
V.35 Cable Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Symptom Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
MAP 0100: Check Condition Ind Is On with Blank Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
MAP 0110: Operator Panel Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
MAP 0120: Status Code Not Indicated or Known . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
MAP 0200: Terminal(s) Problem Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
MAP 0210: Terminal Adapter Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
MAP 0220: Terminal Attachment Configuration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
MAP 0230: 3299 Models 2 and 3 Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
MAP 0240: 3299 Model 1 Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
MAP 0300: Host Communication Failure ! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
MAP 0400: Power Load Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
MAP 0500: Status Display 8888 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Diagnostic Aids: Offline Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Hardware Group Test Ails and Processor/Storage Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Hardware Group Basic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Contents
ix
Hardware Group Optional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Test Request Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Test Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Terminal Control Test Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
How to Run Hardware Group Test Ails HG 81 and 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-43
How to Run Hardware Group Basic Tests (HG 01 - 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
How to Read and Set the Timer (HG 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
How to Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests HG 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299 Optional Tests HG 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
How to Display the Test Log (HG 80)
How to Display the Test Monitor Functions (HG 80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Operator Panel Offline Test Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Alt 1 IML Menu List (40 prompt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Test Monitor Menu List (4001 Prompt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Hardware Group FN, TP, and FP Menu Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Operator Panel Test Selection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Selection of Offline Test Operator Panel Control (4001 Prompt)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
How to Run Hardware Group Test Ails or Processor/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
How to Run Hardware Group Basic Tests (HG 01 - 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
How to Run Diskette Drive Optional Tests (HG 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
How to Read the Day and Time of Day (HG 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
How to Run the Operator Panel Test (HG 09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
How to Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests (HG 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299 Optional Tests HG 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Terminal Adapter Function Numbers/Parameters Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Diagnostic Aids: Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
3174 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Online Test Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Test 0: Terminal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Test 1: Display Logs Menu ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-86
Test 2: Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Test 2, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Test 3: 3270 Device Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Test 3, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Test 3, Option 2 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-97
Test 3, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-98
Test 4: Reset Logs and Cable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Test 5: Display Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Test 5, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Test 5, Option 2 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-102
Test 6: Display Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Test 6, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-104
Test 6, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 2-111
Test 7: Color Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Test 8: Extended Functions and Programmed Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Test 10: Port Wrap Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Test 11: Trace Control
Trace Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
How to Use the Trace Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
How to Start a Foreground Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
How to Start a Background Trace
Test A: Operator-Originated Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
X
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introductioh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3174 Test Menu Configuration B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Test Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 0 Configuration B: Terminal Check .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 1 Configuration B: Display Logs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 2 Configuration B: Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 2, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 3 Configuration B: 3270 Device Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 3, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 3, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "
Test 3, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "
Test 3, Option 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 4 Configuration B: Reset Logs and Cable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 5 Configuration B: Display Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 5, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 5, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 6 Configuration B: Display Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 6, Option 2 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 6, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "
Test 7 Configuration B: Color Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 8 Configuration B: Extended Functions and Programmed Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 10 Configuration B: Port Wrap Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 11 Configuration B: Trace Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use the Trace Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Start a Foreground Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Start a Background Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test A Configuration B: Operator-Originated Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Perform an Operator Panel Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Display the Master Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Perform the Coaxial Cable Ground Loop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check for a Terminal-Ready Condition (S, 4, or 6 Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use the 3174 Patch Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Perform the 3174 Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R Establishment Controller OLTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applicable Executive Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-122
2-122
2-125
2-126
2-127
2-128
2-134
2-135
2-136
2-137
2-139
2-139
2-140
2-142
2-143
2-144
2-145
2-146
2-147
2-154
2-158
2-158
2-159
2-160
2-160
2-160
2-161
2-162
2-163
2-165
2-165
2-165
2-167
2-169
2-169
2-179
2-180
2-180
Chapter 3. Repair Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Removal/Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Cover Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Supply Removal/Replacement .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Operator Panel Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Storage Card Removal/Replacement Models 91 Rand 92R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Diskette Drive Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fan Removal/Replacement .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 3-10
Planar Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Chapter 4. Safety Inspection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Checklist Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
xi
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
.
.
.
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-4
A-6
Appendix B. X.25 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packet Level
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vi rtual Ci rcuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packet Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Request (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Call (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Accepted (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Connected (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Request (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Indication (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Confirmation (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Request (PVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Indication (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Confirmation (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Request (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Indication (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Confirmation (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Not Ready (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Ready (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switched Vi rtual Ci rcuit (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........................................................ .
Key Functions
X.25 States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Ready (SVC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnection (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cause and Diagnostic Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exceptional Case Handli ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
X.25 SVC States and Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing Call in Progress
8-1
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
Appendix A. IBM Cabling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18M/Cabling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Terminal Multiplexer Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Model 2
3299 Model 3
3299 Model Interchangeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Signal Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
.
.
.
.
Incoming Call in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Ready (In Use)
.....................................................
Disconnect in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local
...............................................................
X.25 Communication Reminder Indicator
Extension Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Key and X.25 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permanent Vi rtual Ci rcuit (PVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVC Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVC Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCAL Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMM Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of States and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Virtual Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switched Virtual Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 Cause and Diagnostic Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cause Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Code Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Codes from DCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Codes from DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-17
8-19
8-20
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-26
8-28
8-29
8-30
Appendix C. X.21 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
21 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
X.21 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
X.21 Switched Microcode Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Data Link Control Function : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Status and Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Call Progress Signal Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
X.21 Error Completion Modifier 8its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
List of Abbreviations
Glossary
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-17
Contents
xiii
xiv
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Figures
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
1-10.
1-11.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
2-22.
2-23.
2-24.
2-25.
2-26.
2-27.
2-28.
2-29.
2-30.
2-31.
2-32.
2-33.
2-34.
2-35.
2-36.
2-37.
2-38.
2-39.
2-40.
2-41.
3174ServiceStrategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Block Diagram of Terminal Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Examples of Terminal Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Hardware Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Sample Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Log Records Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
3174 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
EIA/V.35 Wrap Plug
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
X.21 Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
V.35 Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
TestMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Test Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Selectable Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
V.35 Three-Switch Test/Oper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
EIA Communication Line Flow (Cable and Wrap Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
X.21 Communication Line Flow, Switched and Nonswitched (Cable and Wrap Plug) ...... 2-50
V.35 Communication Line Flow (Cable and Wrap Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Block Diagram of Terminal Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Test Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Hardware Configuration Table (Offline Test Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Alt1lMLMenuList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Test Monitor Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Hardware Group 01 FN and TP Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Hardware Group 08 FN and TPMenu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Hardware Group 09 TP Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Hardware Group 11 FN and TP Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Hardware Group 26 FN, TP, and FP Menu Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Hardware Group 80 FN Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Hardware Group 81, 82, and 87 TP Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Operator Panel Test Selection Example (HG26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
V.35 Three-Switch Test/Oper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Block Diagram of Terminal Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
3174 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Test 0 Display Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Test 1 Menu
Event Log Summary (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Log Record Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
RTM Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Test 2 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Hardware Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
3270 Device Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-95
Error Counters Example: Disabled Adapter and Disabled Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Host Unconfigured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Live MLT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Test 4 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Vital Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Controller Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Port Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2-103
Test 6 Menu
2-104
Port Control Area Panel
Figures
XV
2-42.
2-43.
2-44.
2-45.
2-46.
2-47.
2-48.
2-49.
2-50.
2-51.
2-52.
2-53.
2-54.
2-55.
2-56.
2-57.
2-58.
2-59.
2-60.
2-61.
2-62.
2-63.
2-64.
2-65.
2-66.
2-67.
2-68.
2-69.
2-70.
2-71.
2-72.
2-73.
2-74.
2-75.
2-76.
2-77.
2-78.
2-79.
2-80.
2-81.
2-82.
2-83.
2-84.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
4-1.
A-1.
A-2.
A-3.
B-1.
xvi
LT Control Area Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-105
X.21 Short-Hold Mode Host Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
X.25 Host Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Port Wrap - Test 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
3174 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
Test 0 Display Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
Test 1 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
Event Log Summary (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
Log Record Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
RTM Log Configuration Support B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Test 2 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
Hardware Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
3270 Device Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.. 2-137
Error Counters Example: Disabled Adapter and Disabled Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Host Unconfigured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Live MLT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-140
Test 4 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
Vital Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
Controller Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
Port Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
Test 6 Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
Port Control Area Panel
LT Control Area Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
X.21 Short-Hold Mode Host Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
X.25 Host Control Data
2-156
Port Wrap - Test 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
Alert Message panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
The Master Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
Master Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
Patch Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Diskette Drive Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Diskette Drive Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
Patches Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Patch Header Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
Patch Data Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
Relocatable Information Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
Call to Patch Area Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
Patches Panel (Adding a Zap Patch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
Patch Header Panel (Adding a Zap Patch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Zap Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Patches Panel with One Patch Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
3174 Front Panel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3174 Back Panel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
DC Power Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Operator Panel Connector (J10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
DC Power Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Top and Front Cover Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Storage card removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
FRU Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3174 Safety Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
IBM Cabling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
3299 Cabl i ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
BNC and DPC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Controller/Terminal Responses in Dial-In State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
3174
Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
C-1.
C-2.
C-3.
Key Operations during X.25 States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Mode Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Key and X.25 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVC States and Indicators
SVC States and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Link Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Operation (during X.21 Switched States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Operation in Dial-In Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figures
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-12
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-24
8-25
C-3
C-8
C-9
xvii
xviii
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Tables
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
2-22.
2-23.
3-1.
3-2.
A-1.
B-1.
B-2.
B-3.
B-4.
B-5.
B-6.
B-7.
C-1.
C-2.
3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R Base Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Attachment Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Hardware Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Type Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Alt 1 IML Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Hardware Group and Test Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Test Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Hardware Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Test Parameters (Basic Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Function Numbers (Communication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
V.35 TestlOper Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Function Numbers and Function Parameters (Port Wrap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Test Log Function Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Test Monitor Function Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Hardware Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Test Parameters (Basic Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Function Numbers (Communication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
V.35 TestlOper Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Function Numbers and Function Parameters (Port Wrap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Hardware Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Port Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
LT Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
X.21 XID Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Hardware Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
Port Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
LT Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
X.21 XID Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R OLTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Power Supply Voltage Chart (No-Load Condition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power Supply Voltage Chart (Normal Operating Condition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3299 Attached Terminal Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
X.25 Timer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Cause Codes Received from a DCE (Clear Packet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Cause Codes Received from a DCE (Reset Packet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
Cause Codes Received from a DCE (Restart Packet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
Diagnostic Code Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
Diagnostic Code Fields Received from a DCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Diagnostic Code Fields Generated by IBM (SNA) DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
Call Progress Signal Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
X.21 Error Completion Modifier Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Tables
xix
XX
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Summary of Changes
Fourth Edition (May 1989)
This revision of the IBM Subsystem Control Unit Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Maintenance Information
manual contains the following new information:
•
•
•
•
The name of the 3174 was changed from Subsystem Control Unit to Establishment Controller.
All references to control unit were changed to controller.
The name of this manual was changed to include the new models.
This edition includes Release AS, 85, and B microcode changes.
• 2.4MB diskette.
Technical changes to the text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line (I) to the left of the change.
Summary of Changes
xxi
xxii
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Chapter 1. General Information
Introduction ........ ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Service Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
3174 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
3174 Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Base Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Host Communication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
3174 Terminal Attachment Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3174 Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Descriptions and Functions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Planar Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Diskette Drive HG 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
File Adapter HG 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Operator Panel HG 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Type 1 Communication Adapter (Models 81 Rand 91 R) HG 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Type 2 Communication Adapter (Models 82R and 92R) HG 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Terminal Adapter HG 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Processor HG 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Storage HG 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Hardware Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Type Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Field Replaceable Unit Identification (FRU 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Operational Status Code Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Offline Test Status-Code Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-12
Status Code Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
3174 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Utility Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Limited Function Utility Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-19
Control Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
RPQ Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
3174 Dump Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Function Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
AC Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Normal Initial Microcode Load (IML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Alt 1 IML Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Alt 1 NormallML Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Alt 1 Normal IML Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Alt 1 Normal IML Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Central Site Change Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
3174 IML Selections for CSCM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Environmental Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Environmental Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
3174 Temperature and Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
3174 Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
EIA/V.35 Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
X.21 Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
V.35 Cable Wrap Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Chapter 1. General Information
1-1
Introduction
This chapter provides the following general information about the IBM 3174 Establishment Controller
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R:
• Service strategy
• Configurations
• General description
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) descriptions and functions
Hardware group numbers
Type numbers
Status code description
3174 event log description
Diskettes
Operator panel
•
IML
NormallML
- Alt 1 IML
- Alt 2 IML
• Environmental restrictions
• Special tools and testing.
1-2
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
Service Strategy
Figure 1-1 shows the strategy that the IBM service representative uses to perform problem analysis and
repair for the 3174 Establishment Controller.
No
Yes
• Status Code Manual
• MAPs
• Diagnostics
• Check error logs
• Check host system
error messages
• Use online test
facility at a display
Yes
Yes
No
• Check error logs
• Check host system
error messages
• Use online test
facility at a display
Yes
Figure
No
1-1. 3174 Service Strategy
Chapter 1. General Information
1-3
General Description
3174 General Description
This section contains information about 3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R base hardware, host
communication configurations, and terminal attachment configurations.
3174 Hardware Configurations
The 3174 Establishment Controllers are available in a base hardware configuration. The controllers are
compatible with System Network Architecture (SNA) and with non-SNA and allow attachment of a maximum
of eight terminals, such as 3278s, for communication with a host processor. The 3174 model designation
depends on the type of communication adapter installed in the controller:
•
•
Models 81 Rand 91 R are telecommunication-attached using EIA/V.35 interface.
Models 82R and 92R are telecommunication-attached using X.21 interface.
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Base Hardware
Table
1-1. 3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Base
Hardware
Communication Adapter (BSC or SDLC)
Type 1 (V.35/EIA) (Models 81 Rand 91 R)
or
Type 2 (X.21) (Models 82R and 92R)
Terminal Adapter (TA)
Four directly attached terminals
or up to
Eight terminals via one 3299
Storage Size
1MB (MB equals 1 048576 bytes) Models 81 Rand 82R
2MB Models 91 Rand 92R
Diskette Drive
5.25-inch diskette
1.2MB capacity on Models 81 Rand 82R
2.4MB capacity on Models 91 Rand 92R
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Host Communication Configurations
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R communicate with the following host processors using Synchronous Oata
Link Control (SOLC) or Binary Synchronous Communication (BSC) over duplex or half-duplex
communication facilities. The line control method the controller uses is set up during configuration.
•
•
•
•
System 38 (SOLC only)
System 88
308x
3090
•
•
4361 and 4381
8100 (SOLC only)
•
•
9370
AS400
Host connections are made through the provided interface cable to the liD connector labeled HG11 (see
Figure 1-3 on page 1-6).
Note: The interface cable that is provided is the only cable that can be used. If this controller is replacing
an existing controller, the interface cable that was used on the existing controller cannot be attached
to the 3174.
1-4
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
3174 Terminal Attachment Configurations
Terminals attach to the 3174 Establishment Controller by two different methods:
• Directly connected to a port on the planar board.
• Connected to a 3299 Terminal Multiplexer.
The two different methods are illustrated in Figure 1-2 on page 1-5.
Terminal Ports
__------A~------~
o
(
1
2
3
000
"
'----v---l
Addresses
01-03
Terminal
Addresses 00-07
OR----------------------------~
3299
Model 1, 2, or 3
Address 00
Terminal
To Terminals
Note: Ports 1 through 3 are disabled when a 3299 multiplexer is attached to port O.
Figure
1-2. Block Diagram of Terminal Attachment
Table 1-2 shows two terminal attachment configurations with the maximum number of terminals attached
for each configuration. For a typical terminal attachment configuration, see Figure 1-3.
Table
1-2. Attachment Configurations
Terminals
Directly
Attached
Terminals
3299
Attached
3299s
Installed
Total
Terminals
Attached
4
0
0
4
0
8
1
8
Figure 1-3 on page 1-6 shows an example of the two ways terminals attach to the 3174. The two
configurations allow a maximum of four directly attached terminals or eight terminals attached through a
3299 Terminal Multiplexer.
Notes:
1. The 3299 multiplexer can only be attached to port O.
2. Ports 1 through 3 are disabled when a 3299 is attached to port O.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-5
General Description
HG 26
HG 11
[01
!o)
3299 Model 1, 2, or 3
Address 00
Address 07
HG 26
HG 11
(0\
Address 00
Figure
1-6
Address 01
10)
Address 02
1-3. Examples of Terminal Attachment
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Address 03
General Description
3174 Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Descriptions and Functions
The following paragraphs describe the functions of the planar board, the diskette drive, and the operator
panel.
Planar Board
The planar board contains the processor logic, storage logic, and the following adapter logic:
•
•
•
•
File adapter
Terminal adapter
Communications adapter (EIA/V.35 or X.21)
Operator panel adapter.
Diskette Drive HG 01
The diskette drive uses a high-capacity, double-sided, soft-sectored, 5.25-inch removable diskette. The
diskette drive motor is +12 Vdc, direct drive (nonbelt). The motor is hardware-controlled and is turned on
only when drive access is required. The diskette drive is packaged in a manner that allows it to be easily
removed from the controller. The drive interfaces with the file adapter through a common bus. The drive
also interfaces with the FRU 10 bus. Models 81 Rand 82R have a 1.2MB diskette drive; Models 91 Rand 92R
have a 2.4MB diskette drive.
File Adapter HG 01
The file adapter provides read/write control for the diskette drive. The file adapter interfaces with the PIO
bus and the diskette drive.
Operator Panel HG 09
The operator panel contains the push buttons and indicators shown in Figure 1-7 on page 1-20. The control
logic for reading the keypad switches and writing data to the status indicators is contained on the planar
board. The processor logic reads and writes to the operator panel via the PIO bus. The processor logic
also interfaces with the operator panel adapter logic via the FRU 10 bus.
Type 1 Communication Adapter (Models 81 Rand 91 R) HG 11
The Type 1 communication adapter provides CCITT V.24/V.28 (EIA 2320) and CCITT V.35 electrical
interfaces to connect the controller to a modem or other signal converter. A 25-pin O-shell connector is
provided on the planar board for connecting the communication interface cable. The adapter interfaces
with the PIO bus and the FRU 10 bus. The adapter logic works in PIO mode when BSC protocol is used and
in CHIO mode for other protocols. The desired interface, V.24/V.28 or V.35 and the operational speed are
selected under microcode control. External clocking is required. The adapter logic has a FRU 10 capability
to sense that the correct interface cable is attached.
Type 2 Communication Adapter (Models 82R and 92R) HG 11
The Type 2 communication adapter provides a CCITT V.11 (X.21) electrical interface to connect the
controller to an X.21 network or other signal converter that provides a compatible interface. A 25-pin
O-shell connector is provided on the planar board to connect the communication interface cable. The
adapter interfaces with the PIO bus and the FRU 10 bus. The adapter logic works in CHIO mode supporting
SNA/SOLC protocols. The operational speed is selected under microcode control. External clocking is
required. The adapter logic has a FRU 10 capability to sense that the correct interface cable is attached.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-7
General Description
Terminal Adapter HG 26
The terminal adapter provides buffering and control for attachment of a maximum of eight display stations,
printers, or workstations. The terminal adapter interfaces with the PIO bus. Each of the four Dual-Purpose
Connectors (DPCs) provides a path to a single terminal. Port 0 also provides a path to eight terminals via a
3299 Terminal Multiplexer. Signals from port 0 contain addressing for as many as eight terminals. Signals
from ports 1 through 3 contain an address for one terminal. If a 3299 is connected to port 0 on the terminal
adapter, ports 1 through 3 are disabled. The distance that terminals or 3299s are located from the
controller depends on the cable media being used and whether the particular terminal or 3299 requires a
balun. See Table A-1 on page A-3.
Note: Terminals with the Dual-Purpose Connector (DPC) have the driver/receiver circuitry that does not
require the use of baluns. A balun is an impedance-matching device that is required when cabling
media other than coaxial cable is used to attach terminals such as 3278s to the controller. The
balun matches the impedance of the cable being used to the impedance of the 3278 driver/receiver
circuitry. The DPC connector on these terminals accepts coaxial cable and IBM Cabling System
Type 1 and Type 2 cables; with the DPC-T3 Adapter, these terminals accept direct telephone wiring.
A diagnostic wrap capability, under microcode control, is provided at the driver/receiver output of the
terminal adapter. Logic for driver/receiver wrapping, timeout delay selection, and addressed cable
protocol are also included on the terminal adapter.
Processor HG 87
The processor logic contains the controller microprocessor, a timer, a read-only storage (ROS) module,
and other timing and control logic. It also contains logic for single-bit per halfword storage error correction
and double-bit storage error detection. The processor logic interfaces with the PIO, storage, and FRU 10
buses. A red Light-Emitting Diode (LED) on the planar blinks during processor testing. During the ROS
portion of the processor tests, the conditions of this LED are used to help isolate PIO bus and ROS
problems.
Storage HG 87
The storage logic consists of storage and switching logic that provide 1MB (Models 81 Rand 82R) or 2MB
(Models 91 Rand 92R) of usable storage, 6-bit error correction code, single-bit error correction, and
double-bit error detection. The storage logic interfaces with the storage bus. On the Models 91 Rand 92R
the storage card is a FRU.
Hardware Group Numbers
Hardware group (HG) numbers are used during offline tests as part of a test invocation entry and are
included with alerts when errors are reported to the host. Hardware group numbers are also included in
the controller event logs. Hardware group numbers (see Table 1-3 on page 1-9) are assigned as follows:
Hardware group numbers 01 through 50 are assigned to individual FRUs in the 3174 Establishment
Controller, such as logic and diskette drives.
• Hardware group number 80 is assigned to the test monitor program.
• Hardware group number 87 is assigned to the processor and storage logic on the planar board.
• Hardware group numbers 81 and 82 are assigned to Test All modes: 81 is GSU tests, which are run
after the controller is set up by the customer; 82 is Installed tests, which can be run by the customer as
part of problem determination.
•
1-8
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
Table
1-3. Hardware Group Numbers
HG
Unit
HG
Unit
00
Invalid or unknown
80
Test Monitor Functions
01
Diskette/File Adapter
81
Test All Setup Mode
08
Timer
82
Test All Installed Mode
09
Operator Panel
84
Reserved
11
Communication Adapter
87
Processor/Storage
26
Terminal Adapter
99
Unknown or unassigned
Type Numbers
Type numbers are assigned to each logic FRU as an identifier. The FRU type number is four digits, and 9 is
always the first digit. See Table 1-4.
Table
1-4. Type Numbers
Type
FRU
0000
Invalid or Unknown
9000
'Empty card location
9001
Invalid card/condition
9113
Diskette Drive 1.2MB Models 81 Rand 82R
9160
Planar Board 81 R (EIA/V.35) (1 MB)
9161
Planar Board 82R (X.21) (1 MB)
9401
Diskette Drive 2.4MB Models 91R and 92R
948x
Storage card 2MB Models 91 Rand 92R
9523
Operator Panel
9760
Planar Board 91 R (EIA/V.35) (OMB)
9761
Planar Board 92R (X.21) (OMB)
Field Replaceable Unit Identification (FRU 10)
A diskette drive identifier is contained in the diskette drive signal cable. Two FRU 10 modules are on the
planar board to identify individual adapter logic and the planar board logic. During an IML, these modules
send their FRU 10 numbers to the processor logic. The FRU 10 numbers are used to build the hardware
configuration table, which is written on the Control diskette. This occurs every time an IML is performed.
The hardware configuration table, shown in Figure 1-4 on page 1-10, can be displayed by using Online
Test 2. See "Test 2: Configuration Menu" on page 2-92 or the offline test monitor, see "How to Display the
Test Monitor Functions (HG 80)" on page 2-56.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-9
General Description
_ _ Hardware Configuration Table _ _
HG
00
01
01
08
09
TYPE
9001
9113
9160
9160
9160
LC
00
01
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Invalid Card/Cond
Diskette 1 - 1.2MB
File Adpt
Timer
Ops Panel Adpt
SC
32XX
HG
09
11
87
87
TYPE
9523
9160
9160
9160
LC
07
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Ops Panel Assembly
Type 1 Com Adpt-XXX
Processor
Storage 2MB
SC
Select Test; press Enter ====>
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Test Menu
1-4. Hardware Configuration Table
HG = Hardware group
TYPE = FRU type number
LC = Location
SC = Status code
Note: This panel shows the configuration for a 3174 Model 81R. The FRU type numbers may vary for
different models of the 3174. Only those FRUs that are physically installed are displayed in this
table. All the adapters that are listed with the same FRU type 9160 are contained on the planar
board.
For the communication adapter, the XXX equals one of the following:
WRP = EIA/V.35 wrap plug is connected.
V.35 = V.35 cable is connected.
EIA = EIA cable is connected.
NC = Nothi ng is connected.
WRP = X.21 wrap plug Is connected.
INV = An undefined cable or wrap plug is connected.
Status Codes
Status codes indicate the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controller failures
Attached-terminal failures
Communication link failures
Microcode failures
Program failures
Operational IML progress
Diagnostic IML progress
Diagnostic prompt messages
DiagnostiC progress
Prompt messages for procedures such as Configure, Patch, and Dump.
1-10
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
Status codes are displayed in four formats:
•
•
•
•
A
A
A
A
base
base
base
base
status
status
status
status
code
code
code
code
two to four digits long without extended data, such as U)01
three to four digits long with extended data, such as 3001 0XHG TYPE LOCA TYPE LOCA
three digits long with additional data, such as 391 01HG B1B2 B3B4
four digits long with additional data, such as 3221 TYPE LOCA.
Where a particular status code appears depends on the state of the controller and on the kind of condition
that causes a status code to be generated.
Operational Status Code Presentation
When the controller is operational, most status codes are displayed in the operator information area of the
attached terminals. Some status codes are also displayed on tneJ controller operator panel. In addition,
some status codes that occur when the controller is operational are temporary failures that are recoverable
by the controller. Temporary failures are not displayed anywhere, but they are written in the controller
event log. If enough temporary failures occur to degrade the performance of the controller, the event log
can be examined to determine what the failures are.
Operational status codes that are displayed on the operator panel are either a single status code or a
maximum of ten.
Single Operational Status Code: A single operational status code is displayed on the 3174 operator panel
constantly for one hour. After an hour, the panel goes blank. This status code is displayed again by
pressing the Enter key on the operator panel. The extended data for single status codes is displayed in the
same manner as multiple status codes by pressing the Adv pushbutton.
Multiple Operational Status Codes: Multiple operational status codes that are displayed on the 3174
operator panel are presented in the following manner.
If multiple status codes occur, they are displayed one at a time and automatically scroll. For example,
status code 381 is displayed, then 3020, then 331. At the panel, 381 is displayed, followed by 3020, then 331,
and then the panel goes blank. 381 is displayed again, followed by 3020, and so on. After one hour, the
panel goes blank. The codes are redisplayed by pressing the Enter key on the operator panel. To examine
anyone of these codes to see whether the code has extended data, perform the following at the operator
panel.
The following codes are examples for this procedure:
381 0101 (QAHG) 9113 (81B2) 0100 (83B4)
3020 0101 (QAHG) 9113 (8182) 0100 (B384)
331 0211 (QAHG) 9160 (81B2) 0300 (8384) 01 (85)
1. When 381 is displayed, press the Adv pushbutton to stop scrolling.
2. Press Adv; 0101 is displayed.
3. Press Adv; 9113 is displayed.
4. Press Adv; 0100 is displayed.
5. Press Adv; four blanks are displayed.
6. Press Adv; four blanks are displayed.
7. Press Adv; 381 is displayed again.
8. Press Enter to resume automatic scrolling.
These steps can be repeated for each status code.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-11
General Description
Offline Test Status-Code Presentation
Offline test status codes are displayed at the operator panel if the tests are being controlled at the operator
panel. If the offline tests are being controlled from the terminal connected to port 0, the status codes are
displayed at the terminal.
Offline Test Status-Code Presentation (Terminal): On the terminal, any status code that occurs is displayed
with all the additional fields, such as 3001 0XHG TYPE LOCA TYPE LOCA. If multiple status codes occur, they
are displayed on the terminal in the format shown in the test log. (See Figure 2-9 on page 2-56 for an
example of the test log.)
Offline Test Single-Status-Code Presentation (Operator Panel): On the operator panel, when a status code
occurs, the base status code is displayed~ Theadditional fields are displayed by pressing the Adv
pushbutton on the operator panel. For example, to display the additional fields for status code 3001,
perform the following at the operator panel.
The following status code is used as an example for this procedure:
3001 0126 (QAHG) 9160 (TYPE) 0300 (LOCA) 9160 (TYPE) 0300 (LOCA)
1. At 3001, press Adv.
2. 0126 is displayed; press Adv.
3. 9160 is displayed; press Adv.
4. 0300 is displayed; press Adv.
5. 9160 is displayed; press Adv.
6. 0300 is displayed; press Adv.
7. Four blanks are displayed; press Adv.
8. Four blanks are displayed; press Adv.
9. 3001 is displayed.
The steps can be repeated to redisplay the additional fields.
Note: The eight blanks are displayed to indicate the end of the additional fields for a single status code. If
more than one status code had occurred during the offline test, four blanks would have appeared at
the end of each status code and eight blanks at the end of all the status codes.
Offline Test Multiple-Status-Code Presentation (Operator Panel): Multiple status codes that occur during
offline tests are displayed and examined in the same manner as single status codes. About 100 status
codes can be saved in the test log and displayed at the operator panel. To display the multiple status
codes and their additional fields, perform the following at the operator panel.
The following codes are examples for this procedure:
3001 0111 (QAHG) 9160 (TYPE) 0300 (LOCA)
3001 0101 (QAHG) 9160 (TYPE) 0300 (LOCA)
1. 3001 is displayed on the operator panel.
2. Press Adv; 0111 is displayed.
3. Press Adv; 9160 is displayed.
4. Press Adv; 0300 is displayed.
1-12
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
5. Press Adv; four blanks are displayed.
6. Press Adv; 3881 is displayed.
7. Press Adv; 8181 is displayed.
8. Press Adv; 9168 is displayed.
9. Press Adv; 8388 is displayed.
10. Press Adv; four blanks are displayed.
11. Press Adv; four blanks are displayed.
12. Press Adv; the first 3881 status code is displayed.
Repeat these steps to redisplay each status code and their associated additional fields.
Note: The status codes are separated by four blanks. The end of the status codes that occurred is
followed by eight blanks and then the first status code is redisplayed by pressing Adv.
For multiple status codes that appear at the operator panel during offline tests, it is recommended that
these errors be displayed at the terminal connected to port O. See "How to Display the Test Log (HG 80)"
on page 2-55.
Status Code Assignments
The following paragraphs describe the various categories of status codes, how status codes are displayed,
and how they are logged. The status codes are assigned to the following categories.
0000 through 0150
This number range is used by ROS on the planar board to identify failures that occur during processor logic
instruction testing. These numbers appear only on the operator panel.
2xx
This number range is used to indicate permanent or temporary attached-terminal failures. These numbers
appear at the attached terminal(s) and are logged. Some temporary failures are only logged in the status
code event log and are not displayed.
3xx
This number range is used to indicate permanent or temporary controller failures. These numbers appear
on all attached terminals and the operator panel. Some temporary failures are only logged in the status
code event log and are not displayed.
4xx
This number range is used to indicate SNA protocol errors, data stream errors, and host software errors
detected when the controller is operational. These numbers appear on attached terminals and are logged.
5xx
This number range is used to indicate communication link conditions and communication hardware failures
that are detected when the controller is operational. These numbers appear on the attached terminals or
on the operator panel and are logged. Some temporary failures are only logged in the status code event
log and are not displayed.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-13
General Description
1000 through 1099
This number range is assigned to the microcode bootstrap load from the diskette and to the extended
processor card tests. These numbers appear only on the operator panel.
13xx
This number range is used by the prelinked operational microcode to indicate hardware failures while
loading the test control monitor microcode after completion of the extended processor card tests.
Additional fields may follow the base status code. These numbers appear only on the operator panel.
2xxx
This number range is used when an offline test has resolved a failure to a FRU or FRUs. The FRU type and
location are contained in the additional fields that follow the base status code. The 2xxx numbers also
indicate that tests are in progress or have been completed successfully. These numbers appear on the
operator panel. If the tests are being controlled from the terminal connected to port 0, the status codes are
displayed on that terminal.
3xxx
This number range is used when an offline test cannot resolve a failure to a specific FRU. This number
indicates what action should be taken to isolate the failure, such as go to a MAP or run another diagnostic.
Additional fields may be presented with the base status code. These numbers appear on the operator
panel. If the tests are being controlled from the terminal connected to port 0, the status codes are
displayed on that terminal.
4xxx
This number range is used for test prompt messages and exception conditions, such as:
Prompts for test selection or parameter input
Prompts for manual actions, such as disconnecting a cable
Exception conditions, such as invalid input.
Additional fields may be presented with the base status code. These numbers appear on the operator
panel. If the tests are being controlled from the terminal connected to port 0, the status codes are
displayed on that terminal.
5xxx
This number range is used to indicate failures and IML progression during the link-edit portion of an IML.
Progress numbers display in 5-second intervals. These numbers appear on the operator panel.
7xxx
This number range is used to indicate prompts, progress, and errors when customizing procedures are
being performed, such as Configure, Update, or Copy. Additional fields may be presented with the base
status code. These numbers appear on the terminal connected to port 0, and terminal hardware failure
status codes are presented at the terminal.
1-14
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
8888
This status code is displayed when the lamp test is being performed. If this code is displayed and a lamp
test is not being performed, a hardware failure has occurred that the microcode cannot isolate to a
particular FRU.
3174 Event Log
A nonvolatile event log is provided by the 3174. The event log is recorded on the Control diskette that
resides in the diskette drive used to IML the controller. All error or status conditions are logged while the
3174 is operational (online). Logging does not occur during offline procedures or tests. The log has a 15
OOO-byte capacity, which accommodates 300 to 1400 events. The log wraps when it is full. The oldest
errors are overlaid. This log is reset only by using online test 4, option 2. Writing of log records occurs
either when a diskette buffer sector of 512 bytes is full or immediately for critical faults. Figure 1-5 shows
an example of a typical event log. Review this example and read the paragraphs following the example to
see how the event log can be used to troubleshoot problems on the controller.
_ _ Log Records - All _ _
(Day/Time since last POR: 000/08:11)
Day Time SC QA PHG_PN CHG_PN
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0015
0015
0015
0015
0015
0015
08:11
00:05
00:03
00:02
00:02
21:48
21:22
21:20
21:19
21:07
20:01
0331
0390
0500
0532
3174
0402
0401
0209
0201
3174
0311
51
04
01
10
01
02
03
51
51
01
01
11
01
11
11
00
00_02
00_06
26_07
26_07
00
87
002
006
007
007
LT
Extended data (B1-B16)
B1 B3 B5 B7 B9
9160 0300 01
B11
B13
615
0000 0003 F350 0000
0001 0004 3C40 4000
9160 0300
SC=Status Code
QA=Qualifier
HG=Hardware Group
PHG_PN=PrimaryHG_PN
CHG_PN=ConnectionHG_PN
PN=Port Number
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press Enter ===> _
PF: 3=End
Figure
8=Fwd
12=Test Menu
1-5. Sample Event Log
In the example above, the Day/Time since the last Power On Reset (PaR) field indicates 08 hours and 11
minutes have elapsed since the last paR IML. In many cases it is useful to determine when the IML
occurred with respect to the errors that have occurred. Status code 3174 is written to the log at the
completion of every normal IML. In the example, a 3174 status code occurred at Day/Time 0000/00:02. This
particular IML was a power-on IML because the Day/Time has been reset to zeros (an IML takes about 2
minutes to complete). At Day/Time 0015/21:07, another IML occurred. Note that the timer was not reset.
This was not a power-on IML.
At time 00:02, a 532 10 (SC QA) occurred immediately after IML completion, indicating the communication
adapter (HG11) recognized that the communication link was idle. At time 00:03, the problem was cleared
by host operator intervention and status code 500 01 was logged, indicating that status code 532 10 was
deleted from the operator panel. Status code 500 is used to indicate that a condition for a particular
hardware group has been cleared.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-15
General Description
At time 00:05, status code 390 04 was logged, indicating a problem with the diskette media.
At time 08:11, status code 331 51 occurred on the communication adapter (HG= 11). This indicates that a
controller-recoverable communication adapter PIa parity error occurred.
Note: Status code qualifiers (QA) above 50 indicate temporary conditions. The planar board type number
is indicated by the 9160 in the extended data field, and 0300 indicates the planar board is in machine
location 03. The 01 indicates the communication adapter on the planar is running on interrupt level
01.
In many cases it is necessary to determine the cause of a re-IML. This is usually the log record just before
the 3174 IML status code. For example, if the 3174 at time 21 :07 is an unplanned IML, the log record at time
20:01 may be the source of the problem. In the example, at time 20:01, status code 311 01 was logged for
HG 87 (processor/storage). This indicates that an unrecoverable storage failure occurred. In the extended
data, 9160 is the FRU type number and 03 indicates the location of the planar board.
The event log is also useful to identify terminal failures. In the example, at time 21 :19, status code 201 51
was logged. This code indicates that the coax threshold of 16 errors in a 30-minute period was exceeded
for port 07. One minute later, at time 21 :20, status code 209 51 was logged for the same port, indicating that
a recoverable terminal adapter command queue failure occurred. Both failures point toward possible coax
noise problems.
The 3174 also attempts to pinpoint data stream errors by logging the condition and the details of the
condition for use by the system programmer. In the example, at time 21 :48, status code 402 02 occurred,
indicating that a data stream protocol problem was detected on the terminal connected to port 02. The
status code and the qualifier indicate that the data stream contained an invalid (out-of-range) buffer
address. The extended data gives further details about the error. The first 2 extended data bytes are 0000
and indicate that the command received by the 3174 for the data stream in error was not a Write Structured
Field (WSF). The second set of 2 bytes in the extended data indicates that the invalid address was found 3
bytes after the command in the data stream. The third set of 2 bytes shows the data found to be in error.
F350 addresses buffer position 3280 for the attached terminal. The terminal should have Model 4 or Model
5 characteristics to support this address. A host SYSGEN or application program problem or a terminal
setup problem should be suspected. A trace of the data stream is not necessary with the above
information; but, if one were taken, it would look similar to the following example.
Byte#
Data
00 01 02 03 04
7E 40 11 F3 50
11
= Command = Erase/Write Alternate
= Write Control Character = Reset
= Set Buffer Address (SBA) order
F350
=
7E
40
The invalid address
At time 21 :22, another data stream problem occurred. Status code 401 03 indicates that the terminal
connected to port 06 received a data stream from the host that contained an invalid command. The
extended data gives further details about the error. Since the first 2 bytes of the extended data are not
zero, the data stream was started with a Write Structured Field (WSF) command. The value 0001 indicates
that the error occurred in the first structured field in the data stream. The data in error was found to be at a
displacement of 4 bytes (0 origin) into the structured field containing the error, and the data was 3C40. The
structured field type was 40, indicating an outbound 3270 data stream structured field. Byte 4 of the
outbound 3270 data stream structured field must contain a valid 3270 Write or Copy command code. 3C is
not a valid command code. An application program problem should be suspected. Given this information,
a trace of the failing data stream should not be necessary; but, if one were taken, it would look similar to
the following example.
1-16
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
Data Stream Byte#
00
Structured Field Byte
Data
F3
Command
F3
0006
=
02
03
04
05
06
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
06
40
00
3C
40
Write Structured Field
Length of the first structured field
Outbound 3270 Data Stream Structured field
40
3C40
=
01
=
Data in error (not a command)
Operational status codes that are logged and also displayed on the operator panel have a slightly different
format at the operator panel. Example 1 shows how a status code appears on the operator panel. Example
2 shows how the same status code appears in the event log.
Example 1: Operator Panel
331 0211 9160 0300 0100
331 is displayed on the operator panel when the failure occurs.
Press Adv; 0211 is displayed.
Press Adv; 9160 is displayed.
Press Adv; 0300 is displayed.
Press Adv; 0100 is displayed.
331
0211
9160
03
00
01
00
= Status code
=
Status code qualifier (QA) and a hardware group number (HG)
= The FRU Type number (TYPE)
=
The location of the FRU (LOCA)
= Don't care
= The adapter interrupt level
= Don't care
Example 2: Event Log
The same status code shown in Example 1 is shown here as it would appear in the event log.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-17
General Description
_ _ Log Records - All _ _
(Day/Time since last POR: 115/13:07)
Day Time SC
QA PHG_PN CHG_PN LT Extended data (81-816)
81 83 85 87 89
113 06:32 0331 02 11
9160 0300 01
SC=Status Code
QA=Qua1ifier HG=Hardware group
PHG_PN=PrimaryHG_PN
CHG_PN=ConnectingHG_PN
811
813
815
PN=Port number
LT=Logica1 terminal
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press Enter ===>
PF: 3=End
8=Fwd
12=Test Menu
Where:
SC = Status Code = 0331
QA = Qualifier = 02
PHG_PN = Primary Hardware Group 11 (no PN associated with PHG 11) Extended Data:
9160 = TYPE
03 = LOCA
00 = Don't care
01 = Adapter interrupt level
00 = Don't care
Figure
1-6. Log Records Panel
Diskettes
The 3174 Establishment Controller uses 5.25-inch diskettes with the following characteristics:
• Double-sided
• Soft-sectored.
• 1.2MB capacity on Models 81 Rand 82R
• 2.4MB capacity on Models 91 Rand 92R
Blank diskettes must be PIN 6109660 (1.2MB) or PIN 72X6086 (2.4MB) or equivalent. These part numbers
are for a box of ten.
The following 3174 diskettes are available:
•
•
•
•
•
Utility diskette
Control diskette
RPQ diskette
3174 dump diskette.
Limited Function Utility.
1-18
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
Utility Diskette
One Utility diskette is shipped with each machine. This diskette contains the microcode that supports the
following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copy Files
Diagnostics
Microcode Upgrade
Identify Customizing Keyboard
Configure
Define Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM)
Merge RPQs
Modify Keyboards
Patch.
Limited Function Utility Diskette
This diskette contains the microcode that supports the following functions. (Unless it was ordered by the
customer, this diskette is not shipped with the machine.)
• Diagnostics
• Patch
• Copy Files
• Identify Customizing Keyboard.
Control Diskette
Two Control diskettes are shipped with each machine. These diskettes contain the operational microcode
and enough microcode to test the processor and storage logic.
RPQ Diskette
This is an optional diskette. It contains microcode to support special features as required by a particular
customer. A maximum of 30 RPQs can be contained on one RPQ diskette. Normally, customers will merge
the microcode for the RPQs they are using onto the Control diskette.
3174 Dump Diskette
This diskette is available from an IBM Parts Distribution Center. It contains the microcode that supports
dumping the controller storage.
Operator Panel
The operator panel contains indicators and function pushbuttons used by the IBM service representative for
problem determination. For the locations of these items, see Figure 1-7, then see the descriptions that
follow.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-19
General Description
o
Status
_.
~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@~~~~~~
Figure
erator Panel
1~'8 8811!!l ig]
•
~Ej b1 :8
IIIJ.I=:J::::l
11888811
Data
1ron.'"
CJ
EYEr 0
Check
Cond
0
~B
1-7. Operator Panel
Indicators
The 3174 has four Status indicators, a Data Transfer indicator, and a Check Cond indicator. These
indicators are described in the following paragraphs.
Status Indicators: The four Status indicators display 1 - 9, 0, e, h, I, p, dashes, and blanks. The displayed
output can be 3174 status codes, prompts, or input selections.
Data Transfer Indicator: When on, this LED indicates the 3174 is sending or receiving host data.
Check Cond Indicator: This LED is lit when the controller.has an unrecoverable hardware or microcode
failure.
Function Pushbuttons
The operator panel contains the following function pushbuttons:
•
•
Alt 1 Adv
Alt 2 Enter
•
IML.
These pushbuttons are described in the following paragraphs.
Alt 1 Adv Pushbutton: The Alt 1 Adv pushbutton is a dual-purpose pushbutton. Used alone, the function of
this pushbutton is to advance (step) the status indicators. Used in conjunction with the IML pushbutton, an
Alt 1 IML is executed. Alt 1 Adv used alone (without the IML pushbutton) has two functions:
1. To display the extended fields of status codes or to display multiple status codes
2. To display numerical menu lists during offline test selection at the operator panel.
Displaying Status Codes: If a status code is displayed, pressing the Adv pushbutton causes the extended
fields of the status code to be displayed (if any). Press Adv as many times as necessary to display the
enti re status code.
Displaying Numerical Menu Lists: During offline operations, such as running tests, the Adv pushbutton is
used to step through the sequential lists of test numbers, test parameters, function numbers, and function
parameters until the desired number is displayed in the status indicators.
1-20
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
IML
When Alt 1 is used in conjunction with the IML pushbutton, an Alt 1 IML is executed and the following
functions can be selected:
• Terminal Mode, Master Menu displayed on the terminal attached to port 0
• Test All Functions (Control or Utility diskette installed)
• Basic Tests (Utility diskette installed).
Alt 2 Enter Pushbutton: The Alt 2 Enter pushbutton is a dual-purpose pushbutton. Used alone, the function
of this pushbutton is to display pending status codes, select tests, and start test or function execution. Used
in conjunction with the IML pushbutton, an Alt 2 IML is executed.
Displaying Pending Status Codes: Once a status code is displayed at the operator panel, the code remains
displayed for one hour unless operator intervention occurs. After one hour passes, the status indicators
are erased. The status code is displayed again by pressing the Enter pushbutton.
Selecting Tests: When tests are being selected, the test number is first displayed in the status indicators
by use of Adv. The test selection is then selected by preSSing the Enter pushbutton. Once the entire test
number is selected, preSSing the Enter pushbutton causes that test request to execute.
When the Alt 2 pushbutton is used in conjunction with IML, diagnostic tests run on the FRUs present in the
controller if the Utility diskette is installed. Successful completion is indicated by status code 2082. If the
Control diskette is installed, diagnostics run on the processor and storage logic. Successful completion is
indicated by status code 2587.
IML Pushbutton: When pressed, this pushbutton performs an indicator test (8888 is displayed in the Status
indicators, Data Transfer and Check Cond indicators light). When it is released, all indicators go off, a
reset occurs, and an IML starts from the diskette drive.
AC Indicator
The AC indicator is located at the rear of the controller. This indicator comes on when the AC power cable
is plugged into a working power outlet. The AC indicator is located on the rear panel next to the AC power
cable connector. See Figure 1-8.
HG 26
HG 11
(oc=:JoJ
AC Indicator
Figure
1-8. 3174 Rear Panel
Normal Initial Microcode Load (IML)
A normal IML is required to bring the 3174 to an operational state, where the controller can communicate
with a host system. A normal IML is started by turning on the controller, or by pressing the IML pushbutton
after the controller is powered on (power on IML). IML is completed when 3174 appears in the Status
indicators. If a failure occurs during any portion of the IML sequence, a status code is displayed on the
3174 operator panel. During a normal IML, the following tests run:
1. Processor ROS tests
2. File adapter pretest
Chapter 1. General Information
1-21
IML
3. Storage tests
4. Extended processor tests.
A normal IML takes approximately 3 minutes to complete.
connection is active.
3174 appears in the status indicators if the host
Alt 1 IML Description
This section contains the operations that can be selected after an Alt 1 IML is performed. Alt 1 IML
provides the capability to run offline tests, customize, and perform a normal (operational) IML. A
configured Control diskette must be inserted in the diskette drive. During an Alt 1 normal IML, the
following tests run:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Processor ROS tests
Storage
File adapter pretest
Extended processor tests.
Chapter 2 contains step-by-step procedures for running offline tests. For information about customizing,
see the 3174 Planning Guide.
Before starting an Alt 1 IML, note the following:
•
•
If the function selection number being used is 41, a Control diskette is required.
If the function selection number being used is 40,80, 81,82, or 87, a Utility diskette is required.
Table 1-5 shows the function selection numbers that can be selected from an Alt 1 IML.
Table
FS
1-5. Alt 1 IML Selections
Function Selection
40
41
42
43
44
45
80
81
82
84
87
TP
Display Master Menu at Port 0
NormallML
Access Host Backup level changes
Access Host trial level changes
Reserved
Reserved
= Load Test Control Monitor
= Test All (CSU Mode) Note 3.
= Test All (Installed Mode) (same as Alt 2 IML) Note 4.
= Reserved
= Processor and Storage
Test Parameter (used only with 8x function selections)
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
1-22
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
No Options - Default
Loop
Stop on Error
Loop, Stop on Error
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop on Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop on Error, Terminal Control
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
IML
Notes:
1. Test function 80, 81, 82, or 87 can be selected in response to the 40 prompt message. Individual tests
are selected after obtaining the 4001 prompt message.
2. V.35 interface cables have special requirements for running the CSU tests. For details, see "V.35 Cable
Wrap Test (Three Test/Oper Switches)" on page 2-77 and "V.35 Cable Wrap Test (One TestlOper
Switch)" on page 2-77.
3. Test 81 (CSU) is normally performed at customer setup time. You must do the following before you run
this test:
Disconnect all external terminal signal cables from the terminal adapter ports except port O. Attach a
communication interface cable with the TestlOper switch set to the Test position. A wrap plug (branch
office tool) is available that can be used instead of the communication interface cable.
4. Test 82 should be run to test the controller if failures occur after the controller has been installed.
Alt 1 Normal IML Procedures
Two procedures can be used to perform an Alt 1 Normal IMl. Use Procedure 1 if the controller is powered
on. Use Procedure 2 if the controller is powered off.
Alt 1 Normal IML Procedure 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press and hold Alt 1.
Press and release IMl.
31 is displayed.
At 31, release Ait 1.
At 40, press Adv until 41 is displayed.
At 41, press Enter.
Alt 1 Normal IML Procedure 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press and hold Alt 1.
Switch power on, 31 is displayed.
At 31, release Alt 1.
At 40, press Adv until 41 is displayed.
At 41, press Enter.
Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Description
Test 82 is used for running extended tests. The following tests are executed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Processor ROS tests
Storage
File adapter pretest
Extended tests load from the diskette
Extended processor instruction tests (HG 87)
File adapter tests (HG 01)
Extended timer tests (HG 08)
Communication adapter tests (Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R) (no wrap tests) (HG 11)
Terminal adapter tests (no wrap tests) (HG 26).
Most errors that occur during an Alt 2 IML will not stop the test unless it is a critical failure, such as a
diskette drive problem. Errors are stored in a test error log and are displayed at the end of the test for
analysis. An Alt 2 takes from 1 to 3 minutes.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-23
IML
Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Procedure
To perform a Test 82, use the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insert a Utility diskette into the diskette drive.
Press and hold Alt 2.
Press and release IML.
31 is displayed.
Release Alt 2.
The test runs 1 to 3 minutes. The Status indicators display the following codes during the adapter
portion of the testing, where HG is the hardware group being tested:
21HG
22HG
2082
29HG
= Test in progress
= Test in progress
=
=
Test completed
Test failed.
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes.
6. To bypass an error, if one occurs, press Enter (Free function).
7. To return to normal operation insert the Control diskette into the diskette drive and press IML.
Central Site Change Management
Central Site Change Management (CSCM) is a two-part process provided by microcode release 4.0 and
above.
Part 1 allows the customer to create a central site library of microcode for each 3174 in his network. This is
accomplished by using the Central Site Customizing Utility. Once the library has been created, it is stored
on Li brary diskettes.
Part 2 allows the customer to distribute his microcode from the central site. This is accomplished either by
creating configured diskettes from the central site library or by using NetView Distribution Manager to
electronically distribute microcode to their network controllers.
The following types of microcode can be distributed:
• Configuration data
• Request for Price Quotation (RPQ) Merge
• Down Stream Load (DSL)
• Keyboard Definition Utility (KDU)
• Patch
• Asynchronous Emulation Adapter (AEA) Data
• Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM).
3174 IML Selections for CSCM
CSCM provides the ability to have more than one level of microcode or configuration data installed in a
3174 at the same time. The microcode or configuration data can exist in three states:
• Production-level
• On-Trial-Ievel
• Back-level.
Note: Only two states of microcode or configuration data can exist at the same time. For example, a
production-level and a back-level version of control microcode can exist at the same time. If a
1-24
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
IML
customer wanted an On-trial-Ievel of control microcode installed, they would have to remove the
back-level or delete the production-level first.
Four manual IML selections are available to IML the different levels of microcode that can be installed:
•
•
•
•
NormallML
Alt 1 using function selection 41
Alt 1 using function selection 42
Alt 1 using function selection 43.
NormallML
A normal IML loads the production-level data objects from the diskette drive.
All 1 selection 41
This IML loads the production-level data objects from the diskette drive.
All 1 selection 42
This IML loads the back-level data objects from the diskette drive.
If a back-level version does not exist, the production version will be loaded.
All 1 selection 43
This IML loads on-trial-Ievel data objects from the diskette drive.
If a on-trial-Ievel does not exist, the production-level will b'e loaded.
For further information about CSCM, see the 3174 Central Site Customizing User's Guide.
Chapter 1. General Information
1-25
General Description
Environmental Information
This section provides some of the environmental classifications and tolerances for the 3174 Establishment
Controller. If an environmental problem is suspected, contact your local branch office installation planning
representative. The tolerances shown are for an operational machine at a customer location.
Environmental Classifications
•
•
•
•
•
Pollutants classification = P1
Gaseous classification = G1
Vibration classification = 81
Shock classification = S1
Temperature and relative humidity classification = C1.
3174 Temperature and Humidity Limits
• Operational Temperature Range is from 10°C (50°F) to 40.6°C (105°F).
•
Operational relative humidity range is from 8% to 80%.
• Operational wet bulb is 26.rC (80°F).
3174 Acoustics
The maximum allowable 3174 Dba output is 46 Dba.
Special Tools
The following tools are available for wrap tests on the communication adapter in the 3174 Establishment
Controller. These tools are available from the branch office or through normal parts distribution.
• EIA/V.35 wrap plug
• X.21 wrap plug
• V.35 wrap plug (shipped with the controller).
Note: This wrap plug is shipped only with early-production machines.
See "How to Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests HG 11" on page 2-46 for details about using the
communication adapter wrap plugs.
EIA/V.35 Wrap Plug
The EIA/V.35 wrap plug (PIN 6423419) is used to test the type 1 communication adapter. See Figure 1-9.
This wrap plug can be connected on the end of the EIA cable, and the V.35 cables that have three TestlOper
switches.
1 .. 26
3174
Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Description
Figure
1-9. EIAIV.35 Wrap Plug
X.21 Wrap Plug
The X.21 wrap plug (PIN 6423420) is used to test the type 2 communication adapter. See Figure 1-10. This
wrap plug can be connected directly to the communication port on the planar board, or on the X.21
interface cable.
o
N
~
tI')
N
~
CD
Figure
1-10. X.21 Wrap Plug
V.35 Cable Wrap Plug
The V.35 cable wrap plug (PIN 61X4603) is used to test the V.35 cables that have one TestlOper switch on
the end of the cable. This cable is shipped with early-production machines. Later machines have three
TestlOper switches on the interface cable. See Figure 1-11. This wrap plug can be connected on the end
of the interface cables that have one Test/Oper switch.
Figure
1-11. V.35 Wrap Plug
Chapter 1. General Information
1-27
General Description
1-28
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Symptom Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
MAP 0100: Check Condition Ind Is On with Blank Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
MAP 0110: Operator Panel Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
MAP 0120: Status Code Not Indicated or Known . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
MAP 0200: Terminal(s) Problem Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
MAP 0210: Terminal Adapter Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
MAP 0220: Terminal Attachment Configuration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
MAP 0230: 3299 Models 2 and 3 Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
MAP 0240: 3299 Model 1 Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
MAP 0300: Host Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-27
MAP 0400: Power Load Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
MAP 0500: Status Display 8888 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Diagnostic Aids: Offline Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Hardware Group Test Ails and Processor/Storage Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Test All 81 (CSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Test All 82 (Alt 2 IML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Test All 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Hardware Group Basic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Hardware Group Optional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Test Request Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Test Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Terminal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Stop on Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Method 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Terminal Control Test Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
How to Run Hardware Group Test Ails HG 81 and 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-43
How to Run Hardware Group Basic Tests (HG 01 - 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Terminal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Stop on Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
How to Read and Set the Timer (HG 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Read the Timer (FN 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Set the Ti mer (FN 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
How to Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests HG 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Communication Adapter Function Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
V.35 Cable Wrap Test (Three Test/Oper Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299 Optional Tests HG 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Terminal Adapter Function Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
How to Display the Test Log (HG 80)
Test Log Function Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
How to Display the Test Monitor Functions (HG 80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Test Monitor Function Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Operator Panel Offline Test Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Operator Panel Usage General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-1
Ait 1 IML Menu List (40 prompt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Test Monitor Menu List (4001 Prompt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Hardware Group FN, TP, and FP Menu Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Operator Panel Test Selection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Selection of Offline Test Operator Panel Control (4001 Prompt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
How to Run Hardware Group Test Ails or Processor/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
How to Run Hardware Group Basic Tests (HG 01 - 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Terminal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Stop on Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
How to Run Diskette Drive Optional Tests (HG 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Diskette Drive Ready Test (FN 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Diskette Drive Media Surface Test (FN 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
How to_ Read the Day and Ti me of Day (HG 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Read the Time of Day (FN 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
How to Run the Operator Panel Test (HG 09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
How to Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests (HG 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Communication Adapter Function Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
V.35 Cable Wrap Test (Three Test/Oper Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
V.35 Cable Wrap Test (One Test/Oper Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299 Optional Tests HG 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Terminal Adapter Function Numbers/Parameters Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Diagnostic Aids: Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
3174 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Online Test Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Test 0: Terminal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Test 1: Display Logs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 2-86
Test 1, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Reset the Response Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Test 2: Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Test 2, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Test 3: 3270 Device Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Test 3, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Test 3, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 2-97
Test 3, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-98
Test 4: Reset Logs and Cable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Test 5: Display Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Test 5, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Test 5, Option 2 ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-102
Test 6: Display Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Test 6, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 2-104
Port Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
LT Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Test 6, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-111
Link Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Circuit Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Test 7: Color Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Test 8: Extended Functions and Programmed Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Test 10: Port Wrap Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
Test 11: Trace Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Trace Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-117
How to Use the Trace Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Trace Facility Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
How to Start a Foreground Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2-2
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
How to Start a Background Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test A: Operator-Originated Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Tests Configuration B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3174 Test Menu Configuration B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Test Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 0 Configuration B: Terminal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 1 Configuration B: Display Logs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log Records Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 1, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset the Response Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 2 Configuration B: Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 2, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 3 Configuration B: 3270 Device Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 3, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 3, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 3, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 3, Option 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 4 Configuration B: Reset Logs and Cable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 5 Configuration B: Display Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 5, Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 5, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Test 6 Configuration B: Display Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 6, Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Port Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Control Area Bit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 6, Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Link Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 7 Configuration B: Color Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 8 Configuration B: Extended Functions and Programmed Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 10 Configuration B: Port Wrap Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 11 Configuration B: Trace Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Control Mode " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
How to Use the Trace Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Facility Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Start a Foreground Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Start a Background Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test A Configuration B: Operator-Originated Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Perform an Operator Panel Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Display the Master Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Perform the Coaxial Cable Ground Loop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: AC Voltage Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Coaxial Resistance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Terminal Ground Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4: Coaxial Cable to Terminal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check for a Terminal-Ready Condition (S, 4, or 6 Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use the 3174 Patch Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Zap Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing a Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Patch Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Adding a Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addi ng a Zap Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing an Existing Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-119
2-120
2-122
2-122
2-125
2-126
2-127
2-128
2-130
2-132
2-133
2-134
2-135
2-136
2-137
2-139
2-139
2-140
2-142
2-143
2-144
2-145
2-146
2-147
2-149
2-151
2-154
2-157
2-157
2-158
2-158
2-159
2-160
2-160
2-160
2-161
2-161
2-162
2-163
2-165
2-165
2-165
2-167
2-167
2-167
2-168
2-168
2-169
2-169
2-169
2-169
2-170
2-170
2-173
2-176
2-178
2-3
How to Perform the 3174 Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Establishment Controller OlTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Applicable Executive Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
2-4
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Introduction
This chapter contains the charts used for 3174 problem determination, the maintenance analysis
procedures (MAPs) to which you are directed in the charts, offline and online tests, general procedures,
and 370/0LTs.
Start
Symptom Chart
Use the following chart and match your symptom to a symptom in the chart. Perform the recommended
action for that symptom.
No.
Symptom
1
Status code.
Action
See the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Note: If the status code is not found go to "MAP 0110: Operator
Panel Isolation" on page 2-8.
2
Check Cond indicator is on and the status
indicators are blank.
Go to "MAP 0100: Check Condition Ind Is On with Blank Status
Indicators" on page 2-6.
3
Status code not indicated or known.
Go to "MAP 0120: Status Code Not Indicated or Known" on
page 2-10.
4
Any operator panel failure such as key
function, prompt message, status code, and
indicators.
Go to "MAP 0110: Operator Panel Isolation" on page 2-8.
5
Terminal adapter device(s) failing.
Go to "MAP 0200: Terminal(s) Problem Entry" on page 2-11.
6
All problems between the host and the 3174.
Go to "MAP 0300: Host Communication Failure" on page 2-27.
7
An IML does not start.
Go to the "MAP 0400: Power Load Isolation" on page 2-31.
An IML fails only after power is switched on.
Replace the power supply.
8
The status indicators may contain one of the
following:
··
9
·
Blanks
8888
Any other status code.
Fan is not turning.
1. Disconnect and reseat the fan power connector.
2. Disconnect the fan power connector and measure for +12 Vdc.
If the voltage is correct, replace the fan.
If the voltage is missing, go to step 005 of "MAP 0400:
Power Load Isolation" on page 2-31.
10
Status Code 8888.
Go to MAP 0500.
11
Other problems.
Use your support structure for aid.
Warning:
Do not place any electrical or mechanical equipment on top of a 3174 Establishment Controller.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-5
MAP 01 00: Check Condition Ind Is On with Blank Status Indicators
Symptom Explanation
The Check Cond indicator is lit,
indicating a pending status code or
a failing 3174.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
The 3174 status code is pending .
The 3174 hardware or software is failing .
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
~
- Press the Enter key, and check the Status indicators for a status code.
Are the status indicators blank?
Yes No
110021
-
Use the status code. See the 3174 Status Codes manual.
- While pressing the IML switch, verify that the Status indicators light with an 8888 code.
Is 8888 displayed?
Yes No
110041
-
Exchange the operator panel assembly.
Exchange the planar board assembly.
- Perform an Alt 2 IML. See "Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Procedure" on page 1·24.
Is 2082 displayed?
Yes No
Ilooel
-
Use the status code. See the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Is the Check Cond Indicator stili on?
Yes No
Ilooel
-
Go to Step 010 on page 2-7.
- Exchange the planar board assembly.
(Step 009 continues)
2-6
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
009 (continued)
-
Exchange the operator panel assembly.
The 3174 hardware or microcode is in a hung state. Use your support structure for aid.
~
(From step 008)
- Insert the Control diskette.
- Switch power off and then on.
Did the power-on start the IML?
Yes No
8
Replace the power supply.
Note: Be sure to use the same type/part number for your replacement.
-
Resume normal operation.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-7
MAP 0110: Operator Panel Isolation
Symptom Explanation
The operator panel is failing in one
or more of its functions.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
Defective operator panel assembly .
Defective planar board assembly .
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
~
- While pressing the IML switch, verify that the Status indicators light with an 8888 code.
Is 8888 displayed?
Yes No
110021
-
Exchange the operator panel assembly.
Exchange the planar board assembly.
- Insert the Utility diskette (diagnostic).
- Perform an Alt 1 IML (momentarily pressing the IML switch while holding the Alt 1 switch).
Is 40 displayed?
Yes No
110041
-
Exchange the operator panel assembly.
Exchange the planar board assembly.
Perform the following at the operator panel. If the results are not as expected, return to step 1. If the same
operation fails again, take the No path at the end of this MAP step.
Press Adv until 80 is displayed.
Press Enter to select the 80 function; 80 - - is displayed.
Press Enter; 4001 is displayed.
Press Adv until 09 is displayed.
Press Enter to select Test 09; 09 - - is displayed.
Press Enter; 4506 is displayed.
(Step 005 continues)
2-8
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
005 (continued)
Is 4506 displayed?
Yes No
110061
-
Exchange the operator panel assembly.
Exchange the planar board assembly.
1. Press Adv to step through the following list of characters:
Note: Each time Adv is pressed, the following should occur on the operator panel:
a. The data transfer indicator comes on for about 1 second.
b. The correct 4 characters are displayed in the status indicators.
c. After about 5 seconds the Check Cond indicator comes on and stays on until Adv is pressed again.
o 000
1 1 1 1
2 222
3 333
444 4
5 555
6 666
7777
8 888
9 999
EEEE
HHHH
LLLL
PPPP
Blank status indicators
2. Press Enter.
Is 2009 displayed?
Yes No
II00ai
-
-
Exchange the operator panel assembly.
Exchange the planar board assembly.
Insert the Control diskette and press IML.
Note: If you entered this map because the code was not found in the 3174 Status Codes manual, use your
support structure for aid.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-9
MAP 0120: Status Code Not Indicated or Known
Symptom Explanation
Status code not indicated at the
3174 operator panel, or the status
code is not known.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
Status code is indicated at the failing display .
Status code is stored in the 3174; use test 1 event log .
~
Try to obtain a status code by the following:
Check for a status code in the operator information area on a terminal.
At a working 3278 (or equivalent) display, run Test 1 (option 2). See "Test 1: Display Logs Menu" on
page 2-86.
Did you find a status code?
Ves No
110021
-
-
Continue with the next symptom in the Initial Symptom Chart.
Use the 3174 Status Codes manual for the repair action.
2-10
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
MAP 0200: Terminal(s) Problem Entry
Warning: Before swapping any cables, see "Device Signal Cable Connectors" on page A-6 for a
description of potential cable connector mismatch problems.
Use the following chart and match your terminal(s) failure(s) with one of the symptoms in the chart. Take
the action specified for that symptom.
1
Symptom
Action
All attached terminals are failing.
One or more attached terminals failing.
Go to Step 002.
Go to "MAP 0210: Terminal Adapter
Isolation" on page 2-12.
Symptom not known.
Run the status summary test (/3) (see "Test 3:
3270 Device Status Information" on
page 2-94) or get more information from the
customer and use this symptom chart again.
002
1
(From step 001)
- Perform an Alt 2 IML. See "Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Procedure" on page 1-24.
Is 2082 displayed?
Yes No
,'
-
003
1
Use the status code. See the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Further isolation is required. Go to "MAP 0210: Terminal Adapter Isolation" on page 2-12.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-11
MAP 0210: Terminal Adapter Isolation
Symptom Explanation
Termina/(s) failing.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
Defective planar board .
Defective terminal adapter output cable at one of its ports
(0-3).
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
Warning: Before swapping any cables, see "Device Signal Cable Connectors" on page A-6 for a
description of potential cable connector mismatch problems.
~
Is the failing port number known?
Yes No
110021
To identify the failing port, use:
1. The Subsystem Cabling Worksheets.
2. Online Test 3. See "Test 3: 3270 Device Status Information" on page 2-94.
Then continue with Step 003.
(From step 002)
If the terminals that are directly attached to the 3174 ports 1 through 3 are the only terminals failing, find
out if a 3299 is attached to port O. See Figure 1-2 on page 1-5 and Figure 1-3 on page 1-6.
If a 3299 is attached to port 0, ports 1 through 3 are disabled.
Run a wrap test to the failing terminal adapter port.
Use online test 10, option 1,xx (xx=00-03). See "Test 10: Port Wrap Tests" on page 2-116.
If unable to run the wrap test online, use the offline method. See "How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299
Optional Tests HG 26" on page 2-78.
Use the status code on the terminal or the operator panel to verify the wrap test results. See the 3174
Status Codes manual.
Does the status code indicate a failure?
Yes No
110041
Go to "MAP 0220: Terminal Attachment Configuration Chart" on page 2-14 and continue problem
isolation.
Note: The failure may have been caused by signal reflections from the cable or a shorted cable.
- Disconnect the failing port's output cable at the terminal adapter port. See Figure 1-3 on page 1-6.
- Perform the wrap test on the failing port again.
(Step 005 continues)
2-12
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
005 (continued)
Does the failure stili occur?
Yes No
110061
Reconnect the port output cable.
Go to "MAP 0220: Terminal Attachment Configuration Chart" on page 2-14 and continue problem
isolation.
-
Replace the planar board.
Insert the Control diskette and press IML.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-13
MAP 0220: Terminal Attachment Configuration Chart
To use this symptom chart you must be able to determine your terminal configuration (how the terminals
are connected to the 3174).
Use the following chart and match your failing terminal symptom and its cable to one of the attachments in
the chart. Take the appropriate action.
Symptom
Action
Terminal(s) attached to a 3299 Model 2 or a 3299
Model 3 (wrappable).
Terminal(s) attached to a 3299 Model 1
(nonwrappable).
Terminal attached directly to a 3174 port.
Go to "MAP 0230: 3299 Models 2 and 3
Isolation" on page 2-15.
Go to "MAP 0240: 3299 Model 1 Isolation" on
page 2-20.
Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on
page 2-25.
2-14
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
MAP 0230: 3299 Models 2 and 3 Isolation
Symptom Explanation
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Terminal or terminals attached to a
3299 Model 2 or 3299 model 3 fail.
•
•
The 3299 is a repai r center product
and is not to be serviced by the
on-site CEo Problem determination
(PO) on the 3299 is a customer
responsibility. This MAP has been
included to help you do subsystem
PO when a 3299 is involved.
•
•
•
•
•
•
No AC power to the 3299.
3299 input and output cables incorrectly connected.
Defective signal cable to 3299 input.
Defective 3299.
The attached terminal is failing.
The attached terminal signal cable is failing.
Replacing a 3299-2 or 3299-3 with a 3299-1.
Multiple terminals and signal cables are failing.
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
Warning: Before swapping any cables, see "Device Signal Cable Connectors" on page A-6 for a
description of potential cable connector mismatch problems.
~
Do you know which terminal or terminals are failing?
Yes No
110021
Run test 3 to obtain the status of all attached terminals, or get more information from the
customer about the failure. See "Test 3: 3270 Device Status Information" on page 2-94.
Continue with Step 003.
(From step 002)
Is more than one terminal attached to the same 3299 failing?
Yes No
110041
A single terminal attached to the same 3299 is failing. Note the failing port number, and go to
Step 023 on page 2-17.
Are all terminals that are attached to the same 3299 failing?
Yes No
110061
-
Some terminals attached to the same 3299 are failing. Go to Step 023 on page 2-17.
(Step 007 continues)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-15
MAP 0230 (continued)
007 (continued)
Note: Either the 3299 or its attached input cable is causing the problem.
- Verify that the input and output cables are correctly attached to the 3299. See Figure 1-3 on page 1-6.
Is the 3299 red indicator on?
Yes No
Ilooal
-
Verify that the power cable is inserted into the 3299 and is also plugged into a working outlet.
Replace the 3299 with the same model.
Are eight terminals attached to the same 3299?
Yes No
§J
-
Go to Step 016.
Do you have a spare 3299 that is the same model as the suspect 3299?
Yes No
§J
-
Go to Step 035 on page 2-18.
- Swap the 3299 with the spare.
Does the failure still occur?
Yes No
§J
-
Notify the customer that the original 3299 is failing.
Insert the Control diskette and continue normal operations.
The 3299 input cable is defective.
~
(From step 010)
Note: Isolate the failure to the 3299 or Its input cable.
Disconnect all the output cables from the 3299 port(s).
Run a wrap test to all (eight) 3299 port locations and stop testing at the first good port. Run the online
test 10 option 2,xx (00-07). See IITest 10: Port Wrap Tests" on page 2-116.
If unable to run the wrap tests online, use the offline method. See IIHow to Run Terminal Adapter/3299
Optional Tests HG 26" on page 2-78.
Use the status code on the terminal or the operator panel to verify the wrap test results. See the 3174
Status Codes manual.
(Step 016 continues)
2-16
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
016 (continued)
Did all eight ports fail the wrap test?
Yes No
§J
-
Reconnect the 3299 output cables. Go to Step 040 on page 2-19.
Do you have a spare 3299 that is the same model as the suspect 3299?
Yes No
§J
Go to Step 035 on page 2-18.
- Swap the 3299 with the same model, but do not connect the output port cables.
- Run the wrap tests again.
Did all eight ports still fail the wrap test?
Yes No
~
Reconnect the 3299 output cables.
Insert the Control diskette and press IML.
Continue normal operations.
- Reconnect the 3299 output cables.
- Insert the Control diskette and press IML.
The 3299 input cable is defective.
1
023
1
(From steps 004 and 006)
Note: Isolate the failure to the 3299 or to the terminal and its input cable.
Run the wrap test to the failing 3299 port location (run the online test 10 option 2,xx (00-07).
If unable to run the wrap test online, use the offline method. See "How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299
Optional Tests HG 26" on page 2-78.
Use the status code on the terminal or the operator panel to verify the wrap test results. See the 3174
Status Codes manual.
Does the status code indicate a failure(s)?
Yes No
110241
Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on page 2-25.
(Step 025 continues)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-17
025 (continued)
Note: The failure may be caused by a signal reflection from the cable.
- Disconnect only the output cable from the 3299 port that failed the wrap test.
- Perform the wrap test on the failing port(s) again.
Does the wrap test still fail?
Yes No
1026
1
1
-
Reconnect the 3299 output cable(s). Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on page 2-25.
Is the failing terminal the only one attached and configured with this 3299-2?
Yes No
1028
1 1
-
Reconnect the 3299 output cable(s). Go to Step 040 on page 2-19.
- Verify that the input and output cables are correctly attached to the 3299. See Figure 1-3 on page 1-6.
Is the 3299 red indicator on?
Yes No
11030 1
-
Verify that the power cable is inserted into the 3299 and is also plugged into a working outlet.
Replace the 3299 with the same mode/.
Do you have a spare 3299 that is the same model as the suspect 3299?
Yes No
110321
-
Reconnect the 3299 output cable. Go to Step 035.
- Swap the 3299 with the spare, but do not connect the output cable(s).
- Run the wrap test again.
Does the failure still occur?
Yes No
110341
-
Insert the Control diskette.
Continue normal operation.
(From steps 012,019, and 032)
- Reconnect the 3299 output cable(s) if previously disconnected.
(Step 035 continues)
2-18
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
035 (continued)
Note: Isolate the failure to the 3299 or its input cable.
Attach the 3299 input cable to a working 3278 or equivalent terminal and check for a READY indication.
A READY indication will display either an S, 4, or 6 in the operator information area of the terminal.
If offline, insert the Control diskette and do a normal IML to load the operational code.
Is a ready indication displayed ( S, 4, or 6) in the operator information area?
Yes No
110361
The 3299 input cable is defective.
The 3299 is defective. It must be replaced with the same model (3299-2).
Does the failure still occur?
Yes No
110381
-
Insert the Control diskette.
Continue normal operations.
Further isolation is required. Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on page 2-25.
1
040
I
(From steps 017 and 028)
Note: Isolate the failure to the 3299 or to the terminal and its input cable.
At the 3299, move the failing port location's cable to a working port location and check for a READY
indication. A READY indication will display either an S, 4, or 6 in the operator information area of the
terminal.
If offline, insert the Control diskette and do a normal IML to load the operational code.
Warning: When you are swapping terminal cables and the terminals are different or the screen size or
features are not the same, addressing problems may occur that can affect system operation.
Is the READY indicator still off?
Yes No
~
The 3299 is defective. It must be replaced with the same model.
Further isolation is required. Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on page 2-25.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-19
MAP 0240: 3299 Model 1 Isolation
Symptom Explanation
Terminal or Terminals attached to
a 3299 Model 1 (nonwrappable) fail.
The 3299 is a repair center product
and is not to be serviced by the
on-site CEo Problem determination
(PO) on the 3299 is a customer
responsibility. This MAP has been
included to help you do subsystem
PO when a 3299 is involved.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
No AC power to the 3299.
3299 input and output cables incorrectly connected.
Defective signal cable to 3299 input.
Defective 3299.
The attached terminal is failing.
The attached terminal signal cable is failing.
Multiple terminals and signal cables.
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
Warning: Before swapping any cables, see "Device Signal Cable Connectors" on page A-6 for a
description of potential cable connector mismatch problems.
~
Do you know which terminal or terminals are failing?
Yes No
110021
Run test 3 to obtain the status of all attached terminals, or get more information from the
customer about the failure. See "Test 3: 3270 Device Status Information" on page 2-94.
Then continue with Step 003.
(From step 002)
Is more than one terminal attached to the same 3299 failing?
Yes No
110041
A single terminal attached to the same 3299 is failing. Note the failing port number, and go to Step
019 on page 2-22.
(Step 005 continues)
2-20
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
005 (continued)
Are all terminals that are connected to the same 3299 falling?
Yes No
110061
Some terminals attached to the same 3299 are failing. Go to Step 028 on page 2-23.
Note: Either the 3299 or Its attached Input cable Is causing the problem.
-
Verify that the Input and output cables are correctly attached to the 3299. See Figure 1·3 on page 1·6.
II the 3299 red Indicator on1
Ve. No
Ilooal
-
Verify that the power cable Is inserted Into the 3299 and Is also plugged Into a working outlet.
Replace the 3299 with the same model.
Do you have a spare 3299 that Is the same model as the suspect 32991
Yes No
~
-
Go to Step 014.
- Swap the 3299 with the spare 3299.
Does the failure still occur?
Yes No
~
-
Continue normal operations.
The 3299 input cable is defective.
Note: Also consider the possibility of multiple-terminal problems.
-
1
Further isolation is required. Go to Step 031 on page 2-23.
014
1
(From steps 010 and 024)
Note: Isolate the failure to the 3299 or its input cable.
Attach the 3299 input cable to a working display or similar terminal and check for a READY indication.
See "How to Check for a Terminal-Ready Condition (5,4, or 6 Indicator)" on page 2-169.
If offline, insert the Control diskette and perform a normal IML to load the operational code.
(Step 014 continues)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-21
MA .... U~4U
(Continued)
014 (continued)
Is a ready indication displayed (5, 4, 6) in the operator information area?
Yes No
§J
The 3299 input cable is defective.
- Replace the 3299.
Does the failure still occur?
Yes No
~
-
Continue normal operations.
Further isolation is required. Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on page 2-25.
~
(From step 004)
Is the failing terminal the only one attached and configured with this 3299 Model 1?
Yes No
1020
1 1
Go to Step 028 on page 2-23.
Note: Either the 3299 or its attached input cable is causing the problem.
- Verify that the input and output cables are correctly attached to the 3299. See Figure 1-3 on page 1-6.
Is the 3299 red indicator on?
Yes No
110221
-
Verify that the power cable is inserted into the 3299 and is also plugged into a working outlet.
Replace the 3299 with the same model (3299-2).
(Step 023 continues)
2-22
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
023 (continued)
Do you have a spare 3299 that is the same model as the suspect 3299?
Yes No
,1
-
024
,
Go to Step 014 on page 2-21.
- Swap the 3299 with the spare 3299.
Does the failure still occur?
Yes No
,1
-
026
,
Continue normal operations.
The 3299 input cable is defective.
Note: Also consider the possibility of a terminal problem.
Further isolation is required. Go to Step 031.
1
028
1
(From steps 006 and 020)
Isolate the failure to the 3299 or to the terminal and its input cable.
At the 3299, move the failing port location's cable to a working port location and check for a READY
indication. A READY indication will display either an S, 4, or 6 in the operator information area of the
terminal.
If offline, insert the Control diskette and perform a normal IML to load the operational code.
Warning: When you are swapping terminal cables and the terminals are different or the screen size or
features are not the same, addressing problems may occur that can affect system operation.
Does the READY Indicator go on?
Yes No
,1
0291
Further isolation is required. Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on page 2-25.
-
Replace the 3299.
~
(From steps 013 and 027)
Attach the 3299 input cable to a working display or similar terminal and check for a READY indication.
See "How to Check for a Terminal-Ready Condition (S, 4, or 6 Indicator)" on page 2-169.
If offline, insert the Control diskette and do a normal IML to load the operational code.
(Step 031 continues)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-23
IVIA .... U,,&tU \COnllnUeaJ
031 (continued)
Is a ready indication displayed (5, 4, or 6) in the operator information area?
Yes No
\1 032 \
The 3299 input cable is defective.
Further isolation is required. Go to "MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation" on page 2-25.
2-24
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
MAP 0250: Terminal Isolation
Symptom Explanation
A terminal symptom or status code
has indicated that a terminal is not
READY.
The terminal may be a repair
center product and is not to be
serviced by the on-site CE.
Problem determination (PO) on the
terminal is usually a customer
responsibility. This MAP has been
included to help you do subsystem
PO when a terminal or terminals
are involved.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
The attached terminal is failing.
The terminal signal cable is defective.
Defective planar board.
Defective 3299-1, 3299-2, or 3299-3.
A Personal Computer is attached to port O.
Note: This MAP isolates the terminal and its signal cable.
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
Warning: Before swapping any cables, see "Device Signal Cable Connectors" on page A-6 for a
description of potential cable connector mismatch problems.
~
If you cl3.nnot customize, and a Personal Computer (PC) is attached, verify that the PC is in the proper
mode that allows controller communication.
If the 3174 subsystem is wired via the IBM Cabling System with two or a multiple of two ports failing,
consider the possibility of a problem with the cableless twin-balun assembly (which allows connecting
two terminals to a single wall receptacle).
Has problem determination on the attached terminal been done?
Yes No
110021
-
Use the attached terminal documentation to do problem determination on the terminal.
If the problem is fixed by doing problem determination of the attached terminal, then End.
Has the failing terminal been exchanged with a working display or similar terminal?
Yes No
110,041
-
Go to Step 006 on page 2-26.
(From step 006)
Then the problem is isolated to the failing terminal signal cable.
Note: If the problem is not isolated, then replace the 3299 or the 3174 planar board.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-25
---- --
1
.. - ..... ,..., \ ..." •••••• u~uJ
006
1
(From step 004)
Exchange the failing terminal with a working display or similar terminal. See "How to Check for a
Terminal-Ready Condition (5,4, or 6 Indicator)" on page 2-169.
If offline, insert the Control diskette and perform a normal IML to load the operational code.
• Ifjhe READY condition is on, then the 3174 port location is not at fault and the disconnected terminal
is failing.
• If the READY condition is off, restore the terminal and cable and continue with Step 005 on
page 2-25.
Note: If the problem is not isolated, then replace the 3299 or the 3174 planar board.
2-26
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
MAP 0300: Host Communication Failure
Symptom Explanation
Host communication failure
(Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R).
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•
Customizing response.
No AC power to modem.
Defective I/O cable.
Improperly installed 1/0 cable.
Defective modem.
Communication link failure.
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
~
- Perform an Alt 2 IML. See "Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Procedure" on page 1-24.
Is 2082 displayed?
Yes No
[10021
-
Use the status code. See the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Did the problem occur after the 3174 had been working?
Yes No
[1004 [
Use Online Test 2 Customizing Menu to verify that the customizing response numbers are proper
for your 3174 options and host link attachment. See "Test 2: Configuration Menu" on page 2-92.
Continue with Step 005.
(From step 004)
Is the attachment a V.35 interface? Determine by checking cable part numbers. See Chapter 5.
Yes No
[1006 [
Set the communication cable TestlOper switch to Test. Go to (ENTRY POINT A) in Step 007 of this
Map.
Determine if you have the cable with the three-switch or one-switch TestlOper switch. Select one of the
following:
• Three switch positions. Set the switch to Test Mode 1 as shown in Table 2-6 on page 2-48.
• One or two switch position. See "V.35 Cable Wrap Test (One TestlOper Switch)" on page 2-77 and
do the three steps of the procedure.
(Step 007 continues)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-27
---- ,-_ ......... "
..,
007 (continued)
(ENTRY POINT A)
Perform an Alt 1 IML to display the 40 prompt message. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt
Message" on page 2-39.
Press Enter. Use the terminal connected to port O.
Key in 4 and press Enter. The diagnostic test menu is displayed.
Key in 1101 and press Enter.
If a terminal Is not available to perform offline tests, run the test from the operator panel. See "How to
Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests (HG 11)" on page 2·75.
18 2011 displayed?
Ves No
Ii00BI
-
Press Adv to see the extended Information from the status code. Match the code xx11 number to
one of the fo"owlng codes.
0211 (cable or wrap plug not connected)
- Check that the modem cable Is plugged Into the 3174 communication socket labeled HG 11.
- Check that the modem cable Is the correct part number. See Chapter 5.
- Replace the planar board assembly.
0311 (cable or wrap plug not providing proper X.21 attachment)
Check that the cable is not an EIA part number. See Chapter 5.
- Exchange the X.21 cable.
- Exchange the planar board assembly.
2x11 (cable wrap failure; the planar board assembly, modem cable, or wrap plug is defective, or the
modem cable or wrap plug part number being used is incorrect)
See code 3030 in the 3174 Status Codes manual. Verify if the 2x code is a cable or wrap plug part
number compatibility problem. See Chapter 5.
- If you want to isolate the problem to the planar board assembly or cable, run the wrap test with
the wrap plug. For the part number, see Figure 2-5 on page 2-49, Figure 2-6 on page 2-50, or
Figure 2-7 on page 2-51.
Install the wrap plug and run the wrap test as previously done in step 007.
Is the 3174 a Model81R or 91R (EIA/V.35 Interface)?
Yes No
§J
Go to Step 020 on page 2-29.
If you previously did the V.35 wrap test in test mode 1, repeat the wrap test again in test mode 2. See
Table 2-6 on page 2-48 and to Step 007 in this MAP. If you previously did the V.35 wrap test with the
one switch, reconnect the interface cable to the short modem cable and continue.
Set the communication cable TestlOper switch back to Oper.
To run the modem status test, key in 1104 and press Enter.
Is the status code 4513?
Yes No
§J
- Match the failing status code to one of the following and take the appropriate action.
(Step 012 continues)
2-28
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
012 (continued)
4510 (missing 'data set ready' and 'carrier detect')
The status code shows the modem or its connections are causing the problem.
- Verify the communication cable for proper continuity, when the switch(s) is in the operate
position. See Figure 2-5 on page 2-49, Figure 2-6 on page 2-50, and Figure 2-7 on page 2-51.
4511 (missing 'carrier detect' and 'data set ready' is active)
- Verify whether your link should be providing the 'carrier detect' signal.
- Go to (ENTRY POINT B) in Step 13 of this MAP.
4512 (missing 'data set ready' and active 'carrier detect')
The status test shows that the modem is causing the problem. Go to (ENTRY POINT B) in Step 13
of this MAP.
The planar board assembly is receiving 'data set ready' and your link is providing the 'carrier detect'
signal.
(ENTRY POINT B)
Is the connection to an IBM modem?
Yes No
~
The modem or the communication link is causing the problem.
Is the modem wrappable?
Yes No
~
The modem or the communication link is causing the problem.
- The Test/Oper switch is still set to Oper.
- Run the modem wrap test with the modem clock. Key in 1102 and press ENTER.
Is 2011 displayed?
Yes No
~
Check the modem for proper operating mode and that it is wrappable.
Note: Do not run the test with the modem set to External Speed Control.
The 3174 modem wrap test shows a defective modem.
The modem is functioning correctly.
Note: Some IBM modems allow you to run further checks. See the modem documentation.
-
1
Verify the operational status of the communication network.
020
I
(From step 010)
(Step 020 continues)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-29
MAP 0300 (continued)
020 (continued)
The Test/Oper switch is still set to Test.
Perform an Alt 1 IML to display the 40 prompt message. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor
(Terminal Control)" on page 2-40.
Press Enter. Use the terminal connected to port O.
Key in 4 and press ENTER. The diagnostic test menu is displayed.
To run the cable wrap test with the modem clock, key in 1105 and press ENTER.
If a terminal is not available to perform offline tests, run the test from the operator panel. See "How to
Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests (HG 11)" on page 2-75.
Is 2011 displayed?
Yes No
§J
The modem or its connections are causing the problem.
The wrap testing indicates that the 3174 is functioning correctly and was able to run using the modem
clock signal.
Verify the operational status of the communication network and the other modem signals.
Verify the communication cable for proper continuity when the switch is in the operate position.
Insert the Control diskette into the diskette drive.
2-30
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
MAP 0400: Power Load Isolation
Symptom Explanation
The Status, Data Transfer and
Machine Check Indicators are off.
Cannot perform an IML and the
3174 is inoperative.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC power incorrect or missing.
One or more power distribution plugs loose or unplugged.
Defective power supply.
Defective diskette drive.
Defective operator panel assembly.
Defective fan.
Defective planar board.
DANGER
Line voltages are present within the power supply when the machine is off and the power cord is
connected. (For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 8 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices,
GA27 -3824.)
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
~
Press and hold IML.
- Switch power on and release IML.
- Status Indicators display progress messages.
Are Status Indicators off?
Yes No
110021
-
Resume normal operations. (If Status Code is displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.)
-
Check that the green AC indicator on the rear panel, adjacent to the power cord, is lit. See the
"Locations" section in Chapter 3.
Is the AC Indicator on?
Yes No
110041
Switch power off.
Verify that the power cord is inserted into the 3174 power supply receptacle and is also plugged
into a working outlet.
Note: With some power cord configurations, it may be easier to measure input power at the 3174
power cord end.
Check the 3174 power cord for defects; replace as required.
Replace the power supply.
Note: Be sure to use the same type/part number for your replacement.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-31
MAP 0400 (continued)
Iloasl
Disconnect the following plugs (see Figure 3-S on page 3-6):
•
•
Diskette drive plugs P1 and P2
Fan plug P3.
Switch power on.
Are the Status Indicators still off?
Yes No
110061
Connect the plugs that were disconnected, one at a time, and switch power on after you connect
each plug.
Note: After powering off, wait at least 2 seconds before powering on. The Status Indicators
should go off again and remain off when you connect the failing component cable plug.
Replace the failing component.
Switch power off.
Disconnect Operator Panel plug P10.
Switch power on.
Measure the voltage at:
• J10-10A to J10-S8 (GND)
• J10- 9A to J10-:-S8 (GND)
• J10-108 to J10-S8 (GND)
+SV
+ 1.7V
+SV
See Figure 3-4 on page 3-S.
Is the voltage missing?
Yes No
lioosl
-
Replace the Operator Panel.
The power supply is designed to operate while disconnected from the planar board.
Switch power off.
Disconnect the power supply cable plug P1.
Switch power on.
Measure the voltage at:
P1-1
P1-3
P1-8
P1-9
to
to
to
to
P1-4
P1-4
P1-4
P1-4
(GND)
(GND)
(GND)
(GND)
+SV
-Sv
-12V
+12V
See Table 3-1 on page 3-3.
(Step 009 continues)
2-32
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
009 (continued)
Are the voltages present from the power supply?
Yes No
§J
Replace the power supply.
Note: 8e sure to use the same type/part number for your replacement.
-
Switch power off.
Reconnect the power supply cable plug P1 and Operator Panel Plug P10.
Reconnect removed plugs.
A planar board voltage short Is Indicated; Inspect for possible shorts before replacing.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-33
MAP 0500: Status Display 8888
Symptom Explanation
8888 in the Status Display
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
•
•
•
•
System reset is being held active.
Defective power supply.
Defective planar board.
Defective operator panel.
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
~
See if status code 8888 is displayed after a power-on and then while pressing the IML switch.
If the 8888 code occurs only after a power-on, exchange the power supply.
Note: The power supply is designed to operate while disconnected from the planar board.
Switch power off.
Remove the covers. See "Cover Removal/Replacement" on page 3-7.
Unplug the P1 Planar power connector. See Figure 3-5 on page 3-6.
At the P1 connector, connect the (+) meter lead to P1-6 and the (-) meter lead to P1-4. See Figure 3-3
on page 3-4.
Switch power on and check that the meter starts moving after a slight delay and goes to approximately
+5 volts DC.
Does the meter measure approximately + 5 volts DC?
Yes No
110021
-
Replace the power supply.
Turn power off.
Reconnect the P1 Planar power connector.
Disconnect the P10 Operator Panel cable connector. See Figure 3-5 on page 3-6.
At the P1 Planar power connector, wire side, connect the (+) meter lead to P1-6 and the (-) meter lead
to P1-4. See Figure 3-3 on page 3-4.
Turn power on.
Does the meter measure approximately 0 volts DC?
Yes No
110041
-
Replace the operator panel.
Turn power off.
- Reconnect the P10 Operator Panel cable connector.
- Disconnect the diskette drive P2 cable connector. See Figure 3-5 on page 3-6.
(Step 005 continues)
2-34
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
005 (continued)
At the P1 Planar power plug, wire side, connect the (+) meter lead to P1-6 and the (-) meter lead to
P1-4. See Figure 3-3 on page 3-4.
Turn power on.
Does the meter measure approximately 0 volts DC?
Yes No
110061
-
Replace the diskette drive.
Turn power off.
Reconnect the diskette drive P2 cable connector. See Figure 3-5 on page 3-6.
Replace the planar board. See "Planar Board Removal" on page 3-11.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-35
Offline Te$ts
Diagnostic A~ds: Offline Tests
Offline tests are started from the 3174 operator panel and are then controlled either from the operator panel
or from the terminal connected to port O. The terminal must be a 3278 or equivalent. The test monitor
program (HG 80) is on the Utility diskette, which should be inserted in the diskette drive. Offline tests are of
three major types:
'
•
•
•
Hardware Group Test Ails an~ Processor/Storage Test (81, 82, 8?)
Hardware Group Basic Tests (01 - 50)
Hardware Group Optional Tests (01, 08, 09, 11, 26, 80).
~ar~"'fare
Group Test Ails and Processor/Storage Tests
Hardware Group Test Ails are invoked by selecting hardware group numbers 81, 82, or 87 at the Alt 1 IML
40 prompt or the test monitor 40(H prompt message. An optional test parameter can also be selected with
the hardware group number that will cause the selected test to loop, stop on error, or both. If an error
occurs during these tests, it i~ s~ved in a test error log in machine storage unless it is a critical error such
as a machine check. If a critical error occurs, the test stops and a status code is displayed. If HG 81, 82, or
87 is looped, errors that occur are written to the Utility diskette at the end of each test run. These errors
are displayed by use of the test monitor program (HG 80). If an error QCcurs that stops the test run, the
error can be bypassed by use of the continue function (key in 1 and press Enter). The continue function is
available only when running tests in terminal mode. The test continues with the next hardware group in the
test runlist. The test runlist varies, depending on which Test All HFlrqware Group was selected, and on
which hardware groups are installed in the controller under test. The chart below is an example of the
order tests would run on a 3174 Models 81 Rand 91 R.
Test All
~1
2X87
2X01
2X08
2X11 (with wrap test)
2X26 (with wrap test)
Test All 82 or Alt 2 IML
Test All 87
2X87
2XQ1
2X08
2X11 (without wrap test)
2X26 (without wrap test)
2X87
Test All 81 (CSU)
Hardware Group 81 verifies that the hardware in the controller is working correctly at customer setup time.
It is recommended that this test be performed only at customer setup time because of special requirements
for completing the test successfully. The special requirements are as follows:
All terminal cables lTJust be discon'1ected from the terminal adapter ports, except for the cable
connected to 10Qicai port O.
• The communication interface cable must be attached to the communication adapter, and the Test/Oper
switch on the cable must be set to the Test position.
•
Test All 82 (Alt 2
,IVIL)
Test All 82 is normally used after the controller has been installed and a failure has occurred. The
following tests are perf9rmed by Test All 82:
•
•
•
Processor and storage
Diskette drive
All adapters.
2-36
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests
Test All 82 does not run any wrap tests, so there are no requirements for setting test switches. If Test All
82 runs successfully, 2082 is displayed in the status display.
Test All 87
Test All 87 is normally used after the controller has been installed and a failure occurs. The following tests
are performed by Test All 87.
• Processor
• Storage.
Test All 87 does not run any wrap tests, so there is no requirement for setting test switches. If Test All 87
runs successfully, 2087 appears in the status display.
Hardware Group Basic Tests
Hardware Group Basic Tests are invoked by selecting a hardware group number 01 - 50 at the test monitor
4001 prompt message. These tests can be looped by use of an optional test parameter. Hardware Group
Basic Tests (01- 50) are run on individual adapters, such as the file adapter or the terminal adapter. These
tests are the same tests that are run when an Alt 2 IML is performed, or when HG 82 is run. The only
difference is that one specific adapter is being tested. If an error occurs during a hardware group basic
test, the test stops and a status code is displayed. Tests can be terminated by use of the free function
(press Enter, 4001 is displayed, and another test request can be entered).
Hardware Group Optional Tests
Hardware Group Optional Tests are invoked by selecting a hardware group number (01, 08, 09, 11, 26, or
80) and a function number and/or a function parameter. These tests can be looped by selecting an optional
test parameter before the function number. Hardware Group Optional Tests provide special test
capabilities, such as communication cable wraps and port wraps. Hardware Group Optional Tests can be
selected for the following:
• Diskette drive
•
•
•
•
•
Timer
Operator panel
Communication adapter
Terminal Adapter/3299 Multiplexer
Test monitor (see the note below).
Note: The test monitor (HG 80) provides a special set of optional tests for displaying logs and the
controller hardware configuration.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-37
Offline Tests
Test Request Format
Table 2-1 lists all the test requests that can be selected. The microcode for these tests is on the Utility
diskette. Test requests that start with hardware group numbers 01 - 50 can be selected only at the test
monitor 40(H prompt message. Test requests that start with hardware group numbers 80, 81, 82, and 87 can
be selected at either the Alt 1 IML 40 prompt or the test monitor 4001 prompt. Hardware groups 81, 82, and
87 are normally selected at the 40 prompt, because these hardware groups load the test monitor program
and start a test runlist. The hardware group number is the only required field in a test request entry. The
test parameter, function number, and function parameter numbers are optional parameters.
The test request format is: HG TP FN FP Where:
HG = Hardware group number (see Table 2-1)
TP = Test parameter (optional) (see Table 2-2 on page 2-39)
FN = Function Number (optional) (see Table 2-1)
FP = Function Parameter (optional) (see Table 2-1).
Table
2-1. Hardware Group and Test Parameters
HG
TP
FN
Description
01
01
01
90-97
90-97
90-97
01
02
Diskette 1
Diskette 1 Ready Test
Diskette 1 Media Surface Test
08
08
08
90-97
90-97
90-97
01
02
Timer
Read Timer
Set Timer
09
90-97
Operator Panel
11
11
11
11
11
11
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
01
02
04
05
07
Communication Adapter
Interface Wrap Test
Modem Wrap (external clock)
Modem CD/DSR Status (EIAIV.35)
X.21 Wrap (external clock)
Type 1 Driver Static Test (NTT
Japan)
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
90-97
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Terminal Adapter
Terminal Adapter Port Wrap
Term Mpx/3299-2, 3 Port Wrap
Terminal Path Test
CUT Display Exerciser
Terminal Adapter Wrap All
Terminal Mpx/3299-2, 3 Wrap All
Printer Exerciser Test
FP Description
00, 08, 16, 24
00-31
00-31
00-31
Terminal Adapter Port Number
Logical Port Number
Logical Port Number
Logical Port Number
00, 08, 16, 24
00-31
Terminal Adapter Port Number
Logical Port Number
Display Test Log
Display Test Log - IML Drive
Reset Test Log - IML Drive
Display Hardware Configuration
Display FRU 10 Table
Display Test Log Count/Time
Display Test Log Count/Time IML
Drive
81
90-97
Test All (CSU Mode)
82
90-97
Test All (Installed Mode)
87
90-97
Processor/Storage
2-38
FP
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests
Test Parameters
Test parameters, defined in Table 2-2, are used to qualify a test request.
Table
2-2. Test Parameters
TP
Description
TP
Description
90
91
92
93
No Options - Default
Loop
Stop on Error
Loop, Stop on Error
94
95
96
97
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop on Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop on Error, Terminal
Control
Loop
Loop is used to loop any valid hardware group test request. This parameter is ignored for hardware group
80. This parameter is reset at the end of the test and must be reselected with each test request. To stop a
test that is looping, press Enter.
Terminal Control
This parameter requests the test control program to switch control of the tests from the operator panel to
the terminal connected to port O. The terminal must be a 3278 or equivalent. Once control is at the
terminal, it remains until another IML is performed. It is not necessary to specify terminal control with each
test request.
Stop on Error
Stop on error is applicable when HG 81, 82, or 87 has been selected, or when looping is specified on an
individual hardware group. This parameter is ignored for HG 80. When this parameter is specified, the test
control program will stop and display each error as it occurs. A continue function can be used to allow the
test request to proceed. The continue function can be used only when running the tests from the terminal
connected to port O. When running HG 81,82, or 87 with stop on error off, the test control program will
collect each error in a log without stopping and present all the errors at the end of the test.
Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message
1. Insert the Utility diskette.
2. Press and hold Alt 1; press and release IML.
3. Release Alt 1.
4. 40 is displayed in the Status indicators.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-39
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)
A 3278 or equivalent terminal must be connected to port O. There are three methods for selecting terminal
control.
Method 1
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
3. At 80, press Enter, 80 - - is displayed.
4. At 80 - -, press Adv until 94 is displayed.
5. At 94, press Enter, 8094 Is displayed.
6. Press Enter.
7. At 4080, go to the terminal connected to port O.
8. The Diagnostic Test Menu is displayed; see "Terminal Control Test Menus" on page 2-41.
9. 4001 is displayed on the terminal under the Select line.
Method 2
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Enter.
3. At 7000, go to the terminal connected to port O.
4. The Master menu is displayed.
5. Type in 4
6. Press ENTER.
7. The Diagnostic Test Menu is displayed; see "Terminal Control Test Menus" on page 2-41.
8. 4001 is displayed on the terminal under the Select line.
Method 3
This method is used only when the 4001 prompt message is displayed on the operator panel.
1. At 4001, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
2. At 80, press Enter; 80 - - is displayed.
3. At 80 - - press Adv until 94 is displayed.
4. Press Enter; 8094 is displayed.
5. At 8094, press Enter.
6. At 4080, go to the terminal connected to port O.
7. The Diagnostic Test Menu is displayed; see "Terminal Control Test Menus" on page 2-41.
8. 4001 is displayed on the terminal under the Select line.
2-40
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
Terminal Control Test Menus
Terminal control of offline tests is performed on a 3278 or similar terminal connected to port 0 of the
controller. Once terminal control is established, a test request can be entered on the Select line of each
menu. Depending on the hardware group being tested, two or three menus are displayed. To determine
what test input should be entered, see the run procedure for the desired test. There are two methods of
entering a test request on the test menus.
Method 2
1. Type in the HG number on the Select line of the Diagnostic Test Menu.
2. Press PF8. If no other parameters are required, press Enter.
3. Type in the TP number on the Select line of the Test Parameters Menu.
4. Press PF8. If no other parameters are requi red, press Enter.
5. Type in the FN number and/or the FP number on the Select line of the Selectable Functions Menu.
6. Press ENTER.
Method 3
1. Type in the entire Test Request on the Select line of the Diagnostic Test Menu.
2. Press ENTER.
If Method 3 is used, the three menus are displayed. These are the menus that appear if the controller
under test has the hardware groups installed as shown on the Diagnostic Test Menu and HG 26 is the
hardware group to be tested.
• Diagnostic Test Menu - Displays the hardware groups that are installed (see Figure 2-1).
• Test Parameter Menu - Displays optional test parameters (see Figure 2-2).
• Selectable Functions Menu - Displays function numbers and function parameters (see Figure 2-3).
Depending on the hardware group that was selected from the first menu, different function numbers and
function parameters are displayed on the third menu. Some hardware groups do not have the third menu,
because there are no assigned function numbers or function parameters.
_ _ Diagnostic Test Menu _ _
Type HG: Press PF8
HG
Description
HG
Description
Ell
Diskette 1 - 1.2 MB
Timer
09
Operator Panel
Terminal Adapter
Test Monitor Functions
Test All-Setup Mode
Test All-Installed Mode
08
26
80
81
82
SELECT ===>
4001
PF: 3=3174 Menu
Figure
8=Fwd
2-1. Test Menu
Chaoter 2. Diaanostic Information
2-41
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
_ _Test Parameters _ _
Type TP: Press PF8
TP
Description
90
91
92
93
No Options-Default
Loop Request
Stop on Error
Loop and Stop on Error
Select ===> HG
4001
PF: 7=Back
Figure
8=Fwd
2-2. Test Parameters Menu
_ _Selectable Functions
FN Description
FP Description
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
PT
PT
PT
PT
NR
PT
PT
Terminal Adapter Port Wrap
3299-2. 3 Port Wrap
Terminal Path Test
CUT Display Exerciser
Terminal Adapter Wrap All
3299-2. 3 Wrap All
Printer Exerciser
Terminal Adpt Port 00
Logical Port 00-07
Logical Port 00-07
Logical Port 00-07
Not Required
Base Port 00
Logical Port 00-07
Function requirements:
FN 01.02.05.06 - To insure a valid wrap. the cable(s) must be
disconnected from wrapped port(s).
Select ===> HG TP
PF: 7=Back
Figure
2-3. Selectable Functions Menu
2-42
3174 Models 81 R throuQh 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
How to Run Hardware Group Test Ails HG 81 and 82
1. Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)" on
page 2-40.
2. Type in 81 or 82 and press ENTER.
3. The following codes are displayed under the select line on the terminal, where HG = the hardware
group being tested:.
21HG
22HG
29HG
20HG.
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
4. To make another selection, at 29HG or 20HG press ENTER.
How to Run Hardware Group Basic Tests (HG 01 - 50)
1. Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)" on
page 2-40.
2. Type in the desired HG number. See Table 2-3 on page 2-44.
3. If required, key in a TP number. See Table 2-4 on page 2-44.
4. Press ENTER.
The following codes are displayed under the select line on the terminal, where HG
group being tested.
= the hardware
21HG
22HG
20HG
29HG.
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Note: To bypass error stops (29HG) for HG 81,82, and 87, key in 1 and press ENTER (continue function) to
continue the test.
To make another selection at 29HG or 20HG, press ENTER to display the 4001 prompt.
These exampJ~s assume that you have the 4001 prompt on the terminal connected to port 0 and the test is
being run from that terminal. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)" on page 2-40.
To run a Terminal Adapter Test:
1. Type in 26 and press ENTER.
To loop a Terminal Adapter Test:
1. Type in 4 and press ENTER. The diagnostic test menu is displayed.
2. Type in 2691 and press ENTER.
To run CSU tests:
1. Type in 4 and press ENTER. The diagnostic test menu is displayed.
2. Type in 81 and press ENTER.
Note: Only HGs 81, 82, and 87 can be selected at the Alt 1 IML 40 prompt. For all other hardware groups.
They must be run from the Diagnostic Test Menu as shown in the example.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-43
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
Table
2-3. Hardware Group Numbers
HG
Unit
HG
Unit
00
01
08
09
11
26
Invalid or unknown
DiskeUe/Fi Ie Adapter
Timer
Operator Panel
Communication Adapter
Terminal Adapter
80
81
82
84
87
99
Test Monitor Functions
Test All Setup Mode
Test All Installed Mode
Reserved
Processor/Storage
Unknown or unassigned
Table
2-4. Test Parameters (Basic Tests)
TP
Description
TP
Description
90
91
92
93
No Options - Default
Loop
Stop on Error
Loop, Stop on Error
94
95
96
97
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop on Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop on Error, Terminal
Control
Loop
Loop causes any valid hardware group test to repeat until it is terminated by user intervention or by an
error. This parameter is ignored for the 80 test request. This parameter is reset at the end of the test and
must be reentered with each test request. If errors occur while a test is running, they are stored in the test
monitor error log. When the log is full, the test will stop. To stop a test that is looping, press Enter.
Certain tests may require an IML or pressing Enter at the operator panel to stop the test from looping.
Terminal Control
This parameter requests the test monitor to switch control of the tests from the operator panel to the
terminal connected to port O. The terminal must be a 3278 or equivalent. Once control is at the terminal, it
remains until another IML is performed. It is not necessary to specify terminal control with each test
request.
Stop on Error
Stop on error is applicable when HG 81, 82, or 87 has been selected, or when looping is specified on an
individual hardware group. This parameter is ignored for HG 80. When this parameter is specified, the test
control program will stop and display each error as it occurs. When running HG 81, 82, or 87 with stop on
error off, the test control program will collect each error in a log without stopping and present all the errors
at the end of the test.
2-44
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
How to Read and Set the Timer (HG 08)
These tests provide the capability of setting and reading the timer counter and setting the day counter. The
timer runs from .00:00 hours and minutes to 23:59 hours and minutes. The day counter runs from 0000 days
to 0255 days. When the timer counter goes from 23:59 to 00:00, the day counter is increased by 1. When
the day counter reaches 0255, it returns to 0000 when the timer passes 23:59. When setting the timer, valid
values are 0000 to 2359; when setting the day counter, valid values are 0000 to 0255.
Note: The timer and day counters are reset to zeros when the controller is powered off and on. This
procedure has to be performed each time a POR occurs. If it is not performed, the timer defaults to
starting time 00:00, and the day counter starts at 0000.
Read the Timer (FN 01)
1. Load the Diagnostic Monitor. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)" on page 2-40.
2. Type in 0801
3. Press ENTER.
4. The day and time are displayed under the select line in the format DAYHRMN.
DAY
HR
MN
=
0000 to 0255
00 to 23 minutes
= 00 to 59 seconds
=
5. To make another selection, press ENTER. 4001 is displayed.
6. If any other status code is displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Set the Timer (FN 02)
1. Load the Diagnostic Monitor. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)" on page 2-40.
2. Type in 0802
3. Press ENTER. 4542 is displayed under the select line.
4. Type in the day-any value from 0000 to 0255- and type in the time-any value from 0000 to 2359.
5. Press ENTER. 2008 is displayed.
6. To make another selection, press ENTER; 4001 is displayed.
7. If any other status code is displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-45
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
How to Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests HG 11
1. Load the Diagnostic Monitor. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)" on page 2-40.
2. Type in 11 and press PF8. The test parameter menu is displayed.
3. Type in a Test Parameter and press PF8. The selectable functions menu is displayed.
4. Before selecting a function number, determine if the controller has a Type 1 or Type 2 communication
adapter.
Models 81 Rand 91 R use a Type 1 Communication Adapter.
Models 82R and 92R use a Type 2 Communication Adapter.
Note: Table 2-5 and the paragraphs following "Communication Adapter Function Number
Descriptions" describe the purpose of each function number and any conditions that have to be
met before a particular function number can be used.
5. Type in a function number.
6. Press ENTER. The test begins.
7. The following status codes are displayed under the select line on the terminal:
2111
= Test in progress
2211
=
2011
= Test completed
3030
= Test failed.
Test in progress
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
8. To make another selection or to terminate the test, press ENTER.
Table
2-5. Function Numbers (Communication)
FN
Description
01
Interface Wrap Test
02
04
05
07
Modem Wrap
Type 1 Interface Status Test
Type 2 Interface Clock Test
Type 1 Driver Static Test
Condition
•
For EIA/V.35: Set the cable TestiOper switch to Test or use
wrap plug (PIN 6423419).
• For X.21: Set the cable TestlOper switch to Test or use a wrap
plug (PIN 6423420).
Set the interface cable TestlOper switch to Oper.
Set the cable Test/Oper switch to Oper.
Set the cable Test/Oper switch to Test.
None.
In the test descriptions that follow, see Figures 2-5 through 2-7 for communication line flow.
2-46
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
Communication Adapter Function Number Descriptions
The following paragraphs describe the function numbers for Type 1 (EIA/V35) and Type 2 (X.21)
communication adapters.
Interface Wrap Test (FN 01): This test provides a data wrap of the driver receiver portion of the Type 1 and
Type 2 communication adapter. With the external interface cable connected, the data is wrapped through
the Test/Oper switch(es) on the interface cable. A wrap plug for each adapter is available as a branch
office tool that can be used in place of the interface cable. To ensure a valid wrap test, the following
condition must be met:
For Type 1 Communication Adapter (EIA/V.35): Disconnect the external interface cable from the modem.
Connect the external interface cable to the 3174 and set the TestlOper switch(es) to Test, or install a wrap
plug (PIN 6423419) on the communication adapter port.
For Type 2 Communication Adapter (X.21): Disconnect the external interface cable from the modem.
Connect the external interface cable to the 3174 and set the TestlOper switch to Test, or install a wrap plug
(PIN 6423420) on the communication adapter port.
Notes:
1. Function number 01 runs automatically when customer setup tests (HG 81) are performed.
2. For X.21 the wrap test does not fail if only one of the Signal A or Signal B lines is broken.
Modem Wrap (FN 02): This test provides a data wrap through the external modem. This test is valid for
both Type 1 and Type 2 communication adapters. To ensure a valid wrap test, the following conditions
must be met:
• The modem must be wrappable.
• The external interface cable must be connected to the communication adapter and to the modem.
• The TestlOper switch on the cable must be set to Oper.
Type 1 Interface Status Test (FN 04): This test checks 'data set ready' and 'receive line signal detect' (also
called carrier detect). A status code is written to the Status indicators in 2-second intervals to indicate the
status of these two interface leads. Status code 4513 means both lines are on. Status codes 4510-4512
indicate other conditions for these lines. If other status codes are displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes
manual. This test is only for the Type 1 communication adapter (EIA/V.35). To ensure a valid test, the
external interface cable must be connected to the communication adapter and to the modem. The
Test/Oper switch on the cable is set to Oper. Once this test is running it does not stop until the Enter key is
pressed.
Type 2 Interface Clock Test (FN 05): This test provides a data wrap through the attached modem using the
modem clock. This test is only for the Type 2 communication adapter (X.21). To ensure a valid test, the
external interface cable must be connected to the communication adapter and to the modem. The
TestlOper switch on the cable is set to Oper.
Type 1 Driver Static Test (FN 07) (NTT Japan): This test sets the following interface leads to their logical on
condition for measurement purposes: 'data terminal ready' (DTR), 'request to send' (RTS), 'data set ready'
(DSR), 'test,' and 'select standby' (Sel Stby). This test is valid only for the Type 1 communication adapter.
Status code 4514 indicates the interface leads are at their logical on condition. Once this test is running it
does not stop until the Enter key is pressed.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-47
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
V.3S Cable Wrap Test (Three Test/Oper Switches)
Thi~
procedure is used with the V.35 interface cable that has three TestlOper switches on the end. This
cable provides better detection of adapter/cable problems when either the A or B signal (receive, transmit,
or clock) is failing. The wrap provided with communication adapter test FN 01 is used in conjunction with
the Test/Oper switch. See Figures 2-6 and 2-4 for the switch settings of the Test/Oper switches before
starting the wrap test. If any other switch setting is used, the wrap test fails.
Table
2-6. V.35 Test/Oper Switch Settings
Description
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Test Mode 1 (Wrap A Lines)
Test Mode 2 (Wrap 8 Lines)
Test Mode 3 (Wrap A and 8 Lines)
Operate
Test
Test
Test
Oper
Oper
Test
Test
Oper
Test
Oper
Test
Oper
Figure
2-4. V.35 Three-Switch Test/Oper Switch
2-48
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
"
cO"
c
Type 1 Communication
Adapter (ErA)
~
CD
Card
.--,
~
I
-"
...
"7
...
~
m
);
"
o
3
3
...
c
n"
~
o
0"
+ Sel Standb}t
::
:
+ Test
:--
18
""...
....
8
1-: + Carrier Det
...
:::: 22
FRU Type 9160
Ring Irrd
_=
+ XmitClk
~
-::
...'"
:
3
~ Rcv Data (Note 1)
..
---'"
--
___________________________________ J:
!
::. 16
CDID 7
:
7
Signal Ground
:
14
i
Line
I
"':&~ T
'"
1
"
'----------------------------------j
DC Voltage
'I
DC Valtage
Range
())
Active
+8 V
+3 to +9 V
-.;;j-
Inactive
-8 V
-3 to -9 V
N
Use pin 7 for ground reference
n
22
::
CDID 6 (Note 4)
-
J2
~
:
:
..
"7
T
I
--'"
,.. Xmit Data (Note 1)
::J
c
J
i
-.;;j-
L____\
o
~
n"
:;
0'
3
e0"
Notes:
1.
Xmit/Rcv Data Active Voltage is Mark or Data Bit On.
Inactive voltage or data bit off.
3. The cable shields are"connected to pin 1 at the modem end and to the
sheff at the card end.
I\)
4. Pins 14 and 16 are wired together in the wrap plug.
I
CD
11
18
6
5
8
22
15
17
2
3
7
~
0 0
•
0
a ••••••••
o 0 • • 0 . ; , 0 . ".0 • 0
252423222120191817161514
25-Pin Connector
• Pins Used
:::I
CD
-I
CD
!.
U)
-I
CD
2. The same lines are wrapped in the wrap plug that are wrapped in the
interface cable with the. Test/Oper switch in the Test position.
The interface lines Test ,to Ring Ind are also wrapped.
::J
~
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
o
iii"
o
;
L--
CD
I\)
::J
I
.---------
~
(0
Modem
Conn
OP
'"
2
--...
:,----------------
~+
.... 15
20
4
:
.
C
(Note 3)
+ Data Set. Rdy
I~ + Clear to Send
I»
CD
~ 11
5
(1)
I»
'0
..
...
I»
0-
(")
::T
+ Data Rate Sel
:: 1 7 ' + Rcv Clk
::J
I»
'0
23
""...
...
...
CD
~
...
--
...
...
C
a.
~
:::
,6
7'
::J
"::E
o
..
+ Req to Send,
Plug Shields
::J
~
+ DataTermRdy
4
"
-"
(")
Wrap
Cable
Wrap
Switch
....
'"......
I\)
Wrap
Cable
I/O Conn
~
3
So
!.
n
o
-=
:::I
~
o
N
I
en
<:)
c.>
......
'(I)""
I\)
I
--.J
?>
3:
><
i\)
-Iloo
0
0(I)
'fii
(Xl
......
:D
:;:
0'""
c:
co
~
co
I\)
:D
3:
~.
:::l
(i)
:::l
I»
:::l
(")
(I)
,....
...~
3
3
Wrap
Cable
r-----
,~
Contral B
23
11
12
13
..
Receive A.
'-
....
....
o·
:::l
...
.......
c:
:::l
"
0"
~
:E
~
r ___________________
ff
z
,~
,
.......
....
...
....
en
0
~
,
(I)
0-
....
-4
CD
II
Control B
10
3
11
CD
Modem
Conn
i..L
Control'"
Receive B
..:.
...
_.....
:
>
1
3
5"
!.
4
o
3
11
,
Shields (Note 2)
I
I
...::
.-
T
14
3
16
7
Transmit A.
Transmit B
Signal B
Signal A.
Indicate A.
.-.
~
.-.
I
..
:
r
9
10
22
15
17
<...
-,,
Indicate B
COlD 7
Signal Ground
~
9
4
...
13
6
:.
~
COlD 6 (Note 3)
~
·1
DC Valtage
Line
DC Voltage
Range
Active I VA-VB>- .:5 I 0 .:5 V to 8V
Inactive VA.-V8>-.31-0.3 V to -SV
9
10
22
15
17
1
3
-
7
]
j
~
~
...
OP
B
Signal Gnd
~
ff
OP
~
~
0-
n
I»
0-
00I/~64~~
ua~
eD
~
I»
:::l
0-
:E
'""
I»
I
"0
!!
c:
:------------------
~
'''''''0 "
7 . 54 J 21
••••• 0 •
0 0 0 •
0 0
\
12 J "
•
•
•
•
•
• 18 }
•
00 • • 0 0 0 0 • • • •
252423222120191817161514
25-Pin Connector. Pins Used
Nottls:
(.
Thtl saffltl lintls are wrappllld in thtl wrap plug thot artl wrapptld in thtl
inttlrface cable, with the Test/Oper switch in thtl Test position.
2. Thtl cabltl shitllds are confllllCttld to pin ( at the modem tlnd and to thtl
shell ot the card end •
.J. Pin (4 (COlO 6) is not wired to pin 7 in thtl wrap plug.
...
".
......
...
• Pin Used
••
I
___________ J
-4
CD
o
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
13
6
2
5
12
>
B
,
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ______ 1
en
:E
(I)
......
L.::i
-
L-.J
-
:::l
..
_ ....
'----1
Use pin 7 for ground reference
2
5
12
...
Transmit B
Receive A.
Signal B
Signal A.
Transmit A.
Indicate A.
Indicate B
-...
10
_ ....
I~
!.
fI)
>
>
>
~
~
:::l
....
...~
)
:::l
n'
~
r--
23
11
12
13
Cable
Extender
~
Plug Shields (Note 2)
c:
0I»
..
Control A.
Receive B
305 mm (l-ftl
External
Cable Conn
(Switch End)
Wrap
Switch
r-----
-"
0
3'""
:::l
r-J
(")
(I)
eo·
Card
I/O Conn
Type 2 Communication
Adapter Card (X.21)
......
5"
0'
o
E!
5"
"c:
cO'
-...
~
o
.:;
:!!
co
C
""I
(1)
Wrap Switch
I\)
Type 1 Communication
Adapter V.35
~
25-Pin 1-ft
Conn
Cable
apt
<
I
01
.-1
c..,
----
oo
3
3
c
34-Pin
Conn
fRkl: 9iA
:::J
o·
~
------
o·
:::J
c::::J
--
(1)
"
0"
~
()
I»
C'"
CD
I»
Notes;
a.
~
""I
1. Xmit/Rcv data active voltage is
mark or data bit on. fnactive
voltage or data bit off.
"C
2. The same lines are wrapped in
the wrap plug that are wrapped
in the interface cable with the
Test/Oper switch in the Test
position.
:::J
C
S
~
~
I»
"C
;""I
!"
Cl
Pl'
co
:::J
o
~
O·
4. Pin 14 and pin 16 are wired
together in the wrap plug.
5. Pin a is AA for connector
for France and Switzerland.
i
~
I
....
4
5
8
' - -_ _ _ _ _ 1~
T OP
T OP
III~~
T
~
lll~)
;~ \..
1I~)---=-+oI
1I1L-4)
l~
I
~
)
SW3
C
foltage
EIA
Line
I
i
~
'-----13
12
'-------11
__ n _ n _____ n _ n n _____ n _ n ______ •
DC Voltage
Range
Active
+8~ V
+3 to +9 V
Inactive
-8~ V
-3 ta -9 V
Use Pin-7 for ground reference.
DC Voltage
DC Voltage
Range
Active
VA - VB> 0.4 +0.44 to +o.66l
Inactive
VA - VB> 0.4 -0.44 to -0.66l
'" Measure the voltage (with 100-ohm load)
at the 34-pin connector between pins:
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
• • e • • e • 0 0 0
0 0 • • • 0 0 00.
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 12 11 10
e • 0
• e
•
@o@
B.
F.
Pi ns Used
LO
Rand T (-Rev Dota A and +Rcv Dota B)
V.
Y and a (-Xmit Clk A and +Xmit Clk B)
ZO
p ood S (-XmH
~tO
__8) ___ 1
~"g
D.
JO
NO
A.
E.
KO
ce
o
H.
MO
ReT.p· S . ' .
V and X (-Rev Clk A ond +Rcv Clk B)
0'
c.n
6
16!'
__ n
:::J
3
eo·
:::J
'-+_~_+--_ 11
~~
' - -_ _ _--1.' n
CCITT V.35
shell at the card end.
"
SW2
J. The cable shields are connected to Line'"
pin 1 at the modem end and to the
o
::T
_. ___ •
7
i·-···-----r--.
I»
::g
~._.
l!m~3--T-~-~I'1
L-..l--+---1~
~~~~~~~--~I----+-~) ~~~+-+-+-_~-4_ _ 1g
UO
X.
Ye
a.
WO
Pins
Used
bO
dO
cO
Modem
gO
fO
Short Ada'pter Cable
i
0
hO
U.S. and WT 56X4823
kO
jO
France and Switzerland 56X4824
nO
mO
V.35 Wrap Cable (U.S. ond WT) 6423325 Assy (6 m)
(U.S. and WI) 6423327 Assy (12 m)
(France and Switzerland) 6423326 Assy (6 m)
(France and Switzerland) 6423328 Assy (12 m)
@O@
Adapter Cable Connector
=
S·
CD
-f
CD
-en
en
-f
...CD
2.
:2
!..
o
o
--=...
:2
o
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299 Optional Tests HG 26
1. Load the Diagnostic Monitor. See "Load the Diagnostic Test Monitor (Terminal Control)" on page 2-40.
2. Key in 26 and press PF8. The test parameter menu is displayed.
3. Key in a test parameter, press PF8. The selectable functions menu is displayed.
4. Select a function number and function parameter.
Note: Table 2-7 and the paragraphs following Table 2-7 describe the purpose of each function
number/function parameter and any prerequisite conditions that have to be met before a
particular function number/function parameter can be used.
5. Key in a function number and a function parameter.
6. Press Enter. The test begins.
7. The following status codes are displayed under the select line on the terminal:
2126 = Test in progress
2226 = Test in progress
2026 = Test completed
3040 = Test failed
3041 = Test failed
3042 = Test failed
4550 = Test completed.
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
8. To terminate the test or to make another selection, press Enter.
Note: When these tests are being looped in terminal control mode, it may be necessary to press the
Enter key on the controller operator panel to stop the test.
Table
2-7. Function Numbers and Function Parameters (Port Wrap)
FN
Description
FP
Description
Condition
01
Terminal Adapter
Port Wrap
3299-2, 3299-3 Port
Wrap
Terminal Path Test
CUT Display
Exerciser
Terminal Adapter
Wrap All
3299-2,3299-3 Wrap
All
Printer Exerciser
Test
00-03
Disconnect the port signal cable.
00-07
Terminal Adapter
Port 00-03
Logical Port 00 - 07
00-07
00-07
Logical Port 00 - 07
Logical Port 00 - 07
02
03
04
05
06
07
2-52
Disconnect the 3299 output port signal
cable.
Terminal attached and powered on.
Terminal attached and powered on.
Disconnect port 00 - 03 signal cables.
00
00-07
Terminal Adapter
Port Number
Logical Port 00 - 07
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Disconnect the output signal cables from
the 3299.
Printer attached, powered on and ready.
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
Terminal Adapter Function Number Descriptions
The following paragraphs describe the port wrap function numbers. Figure 2-8 on page 2-54 shows the
terminal attachment.
Terminal Adapter Port Wrap (FN 01): This function number provides an internal wrap test on the individual
ports on the terminal adapter. The function parameter is used to specify the port number to be wrapped.
Status code 2026 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040 indicates the test failed.
3299 Model 2,3 Port Wrap (FN 02): This function number provides an internal wrap of the individual output
ports on 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Models 2 and 3. The function parameter is used to specify the logical
port number to be wrapped. Status code 2026 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040
indicates the test failed.
Note: Wrap Test FN 02 and 06 cannot be performed on a 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Model 1.
Terminal Path Test (FN 03): This function number provides a path test on terminals that are directly
attached to the terminal adapter or attached through a 3299 Model 1, 2 or 3. The function parameter is
used to specify the logical port number of the terminal to be tested. The path is automatically determined
by the diagnostic. Status code 4550 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3041 indicates the
test failed.
Terminal Exerciser Test (FN 04): This function number provides a data test to terminals that are directly
attached or attached through a 3299 Model 1,2 or 3. The physical path to the terminal is automatically
determined by the test. The function parameter is used to specify the logical port number of the terminal to
be tested. A data pattern appears on the 3278 or similar terminal when this test is performed. Status code
4050 indicates successful test completion. Status codes 3041 and 3042 indicate the test failed.
Terminal Adapter Wrap All (FN 05): This function number provides an internal wrap test of the nine ports
on the terminal adapter. A function parameter is not required for this function number. Status code 2026
indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040 indicates the test failed.
3299 Model 2,3 Wrap All (FN 06): This function number provides an internal wrap of the eight output ports
on a 3299 Model 2 or 3. The function parameter is used to specify the port number on the terminal adapter
that the 3299 is attached to.
Note: Wrap tests FN 02 and 06 cannot be performed on 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Model 1.
Status code 2026 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040 indicates the test failed.
Note: Function numbers 05 and 06 run on the terminal adapter logic when the customer setup (HG81) test
is performed.
Printer Exerciser Test (FN 07): This function number provides a data test to printers that are directly
attached or attached through a 3299 Model 1, 2 or 3. The path to the printer is automatically determined by
the test. The function parameter is used to specify the logical port number of the printer to be tested. A
single line of data prints on the printer being tested. This test is restricted to 3262, 3268, 3287, 3289,4214,
4224,4234,4245,5210, or equivalent printers. Status code 4550 indicates successful test completion.
Status codes 3041 and 3042 indicate the test failed.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-53
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
3174
FN 01,05
Terminal Ports
(~--0----~A~-2---3--~\
000
"-----v-----J
Addresses
01-03
Terminal
FN 03,04,07
FN 02,06
Addresses 00-07
OR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i
3299
Model 1, 2, or 3
Address 00
Terminal
FN 03,04,07
To Terminals
Figure
2-8. Block Diagram of Terminal Attachment
2-54
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
How to Display the Test Log (HG 80)
This test is used to display the test log that is created when errors occur during hardware group tests. The
test log can be displayed only from the 4881 prompt. If prompt 4881 is not displayed, or a test failure status
code such as 29HG or 3838 is displayed, press Enter to obtain the 4081 prompt. Note, do not make any other
test request or IML the controller as the Test Log will be reset.
1. At 4881, press Adv until 88 is displayed.
2. Press Enter; 88 - - is displayed.
3. Press Adv until 94 is displayed.
4. Press Enter; 8894 is displayed.
5. Select a function number.
Note: Table 2-8 and the paragraphs following "Test Log Function Number Descriptions" describe the
purpose of each function number.
6. Press Adv until the selected function number is displayed.
7. Press Enter; FN - - is displayed.
8. Press Enter.
9. Go to the terminal connected to port O.
10. To make another selection at 28HG, press Enter.
Table
2-8. Test Log Function Numbers
FN
Description
01
06
Display Test Log
Display Test Log Count/Time
Test Log Function Number Descriptions
The following paragraphs describe the function numbers that are used to display the test log and the test
log count/time.
Display Test Log (FN 01): When function number 01 is selected in terminal control mode the test log
(shown in Figure 2-9 on page 2-56) that is contained in storage is displayed. This log is created when
errors occur during hardware group tests. This function number is always used to display the test error
log. If this function number is selected in operator panel control mode, the status codes are displayed. The
other information such as pass count and elapsed time does not display.
Note: If the test log does not contain any errors, status code 4588 peNT peNT 88HH MMSS is displayed
instead of the test log.
Display Test Log Count/Time (FN 06): Function number 06 is used to display the test log pass count (peNT)
and elapsed time (HHMMSS) when running tests from the operator panel (FN 01 displays only the status
codes in operator panel control).
Status code 4588 peNT peNT 80HH MMSS is displayed if no errors are recorded in the test log.
Status code 4581 peNT peNT 00HH MMSS is displayed if errors are recorded in the test log.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-55
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
PANEL 1 OF 1
Test Log
TOTAL PASS COUNT 5
PASS
1
START TIME 15:26:57
ELAPSED TIME STATUS CODES
00:00:02
3024 0102 9113 02
9160 03
2
00:02:35
3024 0102 9113 02
9160 03
3
00:05:03
3024 0102 9113 02
9160 03
4
01:20:06
2987 9160 05
5
01:22:36
2987 9160 05
ELAPSED TIME 01:40:03
PF: 3=Quit 8=Fwd
Figure
2-9. Test Log
Note: The start time and elapsed time are in hours, minutes, and seconds. The elapsed time is the
amount of time that passed while the test was running until a failure occurred.
How to Display the Test Monitor Functions (HG 80)
1. Insert a Utility diskette.
2. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
3. At 40, press Enter.
4. At 7000, go to the terminal connected to port O. The master menu is displayed.
5. Key in 4, then press Enter. The diagnostic test menu is displayed and 4001 is displayed under the
select line.
6. Select a function number.
Note: Table 2-9 and the paragraphs following "Test Monitor Function Number Descriptions" on
page 2-57 describe the purpose of each function number.
7. At 4001, key in 80FN
Where:
80 = Load Test Monitor
FN = Function number
8. Press Enter.
9. To make another selection at 2080, press Enter.
2-56
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
Table
2-9. Test Monitor Function Numbers
FN
Description
02
03
04
05
07
Display Test Log - IML Drive
Reset Test Log - IML Drivel
Display Hardware Configuration
Display FRU 10 Table
Display Test Log Count/Time IML Drive
IFunction number 03 erases the error log contained on the diskette.
Test Monitor Function Number Descriptions
The following paragraphs describe the purpose of the test monitor function numbers.
Display Test Log - IML Drive (FN 02): Function number 02 displays the Test Log (shown in Figure 2-9 on
page 2-56) from the IML drive. This function number is valid only when looping a test all diagnostic, such
as HG 81, 82, or 87, and is used only when the test log is not available. See "How to Display the Test Log
(HG 80)" on page 2-55.
Note: If the test log on the IML drive diskette does not contain any errors, status code 4580 peNT peNT OOHH
MMSS is displayed instead of the test log.
Reset Test Log - IML Drive (FN 03): Function number 03 resets the Test Log information contained on the
IML drive. The Test Log information that is contained in machine storage is reset each time a test is
selected.
Display Hardware Configuration (FN 04): Function number 04 displays the Hardware Configuration Table
shown in Figure 2-10 on page 2-58 and must be selected when the diagnostics are controlled from the
terminal. This table shows all the hardware installed in the controller that generated a valid FRU ID
number during an IML. The SC column in the table will contain a 32XX number only if a problem has
occurred with a FRU during the IML. See the 3174 Status Codes manual to determine what a particular
status code means.
Display FRU ID Table (FN 05): Function number 05 displays an unformatted version of the FRU ID table.
This function number must be selected when the diagnostics are controlled from the terminal.
Display Test Log Count/Time IML Drive (FN 07): Function number 07 is used to display the IML drive test
pass counts (PCNT) and elapsed times (HHMMSS).
Status code 4580 peNT peNT 00HH MMSS is displayed if no errors are recorded in the log.
Status code 4581 peNT peNT OOHH MMSS is displayed if errors are recorded in the log.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2·57
Offline Tests (Terminal Control)
_ _ Hardware Configuration Table _ _
HG
00
01
01
08
09
TYPE
9001
9113
9160
9160
9160
LC
00
01
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Invalid Card/Cond
Diskette 1 - 2.4MB
File Adpt
Timer
Ops Panel Adpt
SC
32XX
HG
09
11
87
87
TYPE
9523
9160
9160
9160
LC
07
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Ops Panel Assembly
Type 1 Com Adpt-XXX
Processor
Storage 1MB
SC
Select Test; press ENTER ====>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Test Menu
2-10. Hardware Configuration Table (Offline Test Monitor)
HG = Hardware group
TYPE = FRU Type number
LC = Location
SC = Status code
Note: This table shows the configuration for a 3174 Model 81 R. The FRU type numbers may vary for
different models of the 3174. Only those FRUs that are physically installed are displayed in this
table. All the adapters that are listed with the same FRU type 9160 are contained on the planar
board.
For the communication adapter, the XXX equals one of the following:
WRP
=
V.35
= V.35 cable is connected.
EIA
= EIA cable is connected.
NC
WRP
= Nothing is connected.
= X.21 wrap plug is connected.
INV
= An undefined cable or wrap plug is connected.
2-58
EIA/V.35 wrap plug is connected.
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Operator Panel Offline Test Selection Overview
Selection of offline tests from the operator panel is from menu lists. Menu lists are provided for the Alt 1
IML 40 prompt, test parameters, hardware groups, hardware group function numbers, and hardware group
function parameters.
Operator Panel Usage General Rules
The general rules for offline test selection from the operator panel at the Alt 1 IML 40 prompt or the test
monitor 4001 prompt are as follows:
1. Pressing Adv causes a menu list to be started or advanced.
2. Pressing Enter causes a displayed menu list item to be selected. Pressing the Enter key a second time
causes the test or function to execute.
3. At the end of each menu list, four blanks are displayed in the status indicators. Pressing Enter when
the blanks are displayed returns the display to the 40 or 4001 prompt.
Alt 1 IML Menu List (40 prompt)
The menu list shown in Figure 2-11 can be stepped through and selected after an Ait 1 IML is performed.
Note that number 41 in the menu requires the control diskette, and numbers 82 and 87 can be selected with
either the Control or the Utility diskette.
* *
41
40
* *
42 * *
43
44
45
88
* *
*
*
*
81 *
82 *
84 *
87 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * * *
Alt 1 IML 40 prompt
Normal IML (Control Diskette)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Test Monitor (Utility diskette)
Test All CSU Mode (Utility Diskette)
Test All Installed Mode (Utility or Control diskette) (See Note)
Reserved
Processor/Storage (Utility or Control diskette)
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
Notes:
1. An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the Status display.
2. If 82 is selected with the Control diskette installed, only the processor and storage logic are tested. For
a full diagnostic run, the Utility diskette is required.
Figure
2-11. Alt 1 IML Menu List
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-59
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Test Monitor Menu List (4001 Prompt)
Figure 2-12 shows the hardware group menu list that can be stepped through and selected at the test
monitor 4001 prompt.
4001
01 * *
08 * *
09 * *
11 * *
26 * *
80 * *
8i * *
82 * *
84 * *
87 * *
* * * *
Note:
Test Monitor Prompt
Diskette Drive
Timer
Operator Panel
Communication Adapter
Terminal Adapter
Test Monitor
Test All (CSU Mode)
Test All (Installed Mode)
Reserved
Processo r /Sto rage
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
Figure
2-12. Test Monitor Menu List
2-60
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Hardware Group FN, TP, and FP Menu Lists
Figure 2-13 through Figure 2-19 show the function numbers, test parameters, and function parameters that
can be stepped through and selected after a hardware group is selected. Only hardware group 26 has
function parameters.
Hardware Group 01
01 * *
02 * *
90 * *
* *
* *
* *
94 * *
95 * *
96 * *
97 * *
* * * *
91
92
93
Diskette Ready Test
Diskette Media Surface Test
No Options-Default
Loop
Stop On Error
Loop, Stop On Error
Terminal Control
Loop, Term i nal Control
Stop on Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop on Error, Terminal Control
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
Note: An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
Figure
2-13. Hardware Group 01 FN and TP Menu List
Hardware Group 08
01 * *
90 * *
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * * *
Read Ti me of Day
No Options-Default
Loop
Stop On Error
Loop, Stop On Error
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
Note: An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
Figure
2-14. Hardware Group 08 FN and TP Menu List
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-61
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Hardware Group 09
Hardware Group 09 has no assigned function numbers.
90 * *
91 * *
92 * *
93 * *
94 * *
95 * *
96 * *
97 * *
* * * *
No Options-Default
Loop
Stop On Error
Loop, Stop On Error
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
Note: An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
Figure
2-15. Hardware Group 09 TP Menu List
Hardware Group 11
01 * *
02 * *
03 * *
04 * *
05 * *
07 * *
90 * *
91 * *
92 * *
93 * *
94 * *
95 * *
96 * *
97 * *
* * * *
Interface Wrap Test
Modem Wrap (External Clock)
Reserved
Modem CD and DSR Status (EIA/V.35)
X.21 Wrap External Clock
Type 1 Driver Static Test (NTT Japan)
No Options-Default
Loop
Stop On Error
Loop, Stop On Error
Term i nal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
Note: An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
Figure
2-16. Hardware Group 11 FN and TP Menu List
2-62
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator panel)
Hardware Group 26
01 * *
02 * *
03 * *
04 * *
05 * *
06 * *
07 * *
20 * *
90 * *
91 * *
92 * *
93 * *
94 * *
95 * *
96 * *
97 * *
* * * *
Terminal Adapter Port Wrap
3299-2 or 3 Port Wrap
Terminal Path Test
CUT Display Exerciser
Terminal Adapter Wrap All
3299-2 or 3 Wrap All
Printer Exerciser Test
Reserved
No Options-Default
Loop
Stop On Error
Loop, Stop On Error
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
Note: An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
FN
FP Available
04
05
06
07
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
00
01
02
03
01
X
X
X
X
02
X
X
X
03
X
X
04
X
05
06
X
07
X
Note: For function number 01 port numbers 00 - 03 are the terminal
adapter port numbers.
For FNs 02,03,04, and 07 FP numbers 00 - 03 are the terminal adapter
or 3299 port numbers, and FP numbers 04 - 07 are 3299 port numbers.
For FN 05 test parameter 00 is the terminal adapter port number.
Figure
2-17. Hardware Group 26 FN, TP, and FP Menu Lists
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-63
unllne Tests (operator Panel)
Hardware Group 80
* *
* *
03 * *
06 * *
07 * *
* * * *
01
02
Display Test Log
Display Test Log - IML Drive
Reset Test Log - IML Drive
Display Test Log Count/Time
Display Test Log Count/Time IML Drive
Four Blanks (End of M~nu list)
Note: An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
Figure
2-18. Hardware Group 80 FN Menu List
Hardware Groups 81, 82, and 87
01
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * * *
Reserved (HG 87 only)
No Options-Default
Loop
Stop On Error
Loop, Stop On Error
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop On Error, Terminal Control
Four Blanks (End of Menu list)
Note: An asterisk (*) denotes a blank position in the
Status display.
Figure
2-19. Hardware Group 81, 82, and 87 TP Menu List
2·64
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Operator Panel Test Selection Example
The following example is provided to show how the menu lists are used to select and execute an offline
test. This example uses hardware group 26 (terminal adapter), test parameter 92, function number 01
(terminal adapter port wrap), and function parameter 02 (terminal adapter port number 02). This example
is presented in text and then it is repeated graphically in Figure 2-20 on page 2-66.
Terminal Adapter Port Wrap Example
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Insert the Utility diskette into the diskette drive.
Press and hold Alt 1, then press and release IML.
31 is displayed.
At 31, release Alt 1; 40 is displayed.
At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
At 80, press Enter; 80 - - is displayed.
At 80 - -, press Enter; 4001 is displayed.
At 4001, press Adv until 26 is displayed.
At 26, press Enter; 26 - - is displayed.
At 26 - -, press Adv until 92 is displayed.
At 92, press Enter; 2692 is displayed.
At 2692, press Adv until 01 is displayed.
At 01, press Enter; 01 - - is displayed.
At 01 - -, press Adv until 02 is displayed.
At 02, press Enter; 0102 is displayed.
At 0102, press Enter to start test execution.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-65
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
1. Perform an ALT 1 IML
40
Adv
41
Adv
42
Adv
43
Adv
44
Adv
45
Adv
"Selected"
_ ___ ,
___
Prompt
____ ,
180
- _
- oJ~ Enter
_ _ _ _ oJ~ Enter ~_80
__
2.
-----l
4001
__
_ _ oJI - -
Adv
"Selected"
----,
4.
--FN-,
HG
, . . -. . . . . . . .
1
03
08
Adv
Adv
04
09
Adv
Adv
Adv
9.
~_ 01_-_ _
- oJ~ Adv
02
01
Adv
01
___
8.
I - - Enter
11
---
I_26_ _ _ oJ~
"Selected"
3.
,---'
Enter ----.,_26
- -_ oJ1...__
06
Adv
..... Adv
07
Adv
20
Adv
TP
90
Adv
Adv
91
---
I 92
_ _ _ _ JI---
Adv
10.
o:PJ
01
Adv 1 - - -
L~ __ j - -
6.
Enter
"Selected"
,---'
"Selected"
11.
,---'
12.
Enter ----L~1~~.r____ Enter--' Execute
Figure
2-20. Operator Panel Test Selection Example (HG26)
2-66
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
HG TP FN
FP
26
02
92 01
7.
_ _ oJI - Adv
~_ _
2692
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Selection of Offline Test Operator Panel Control (4001 Prompt)
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
3. At 80, press Enter; 80 - - is displayed.
4. At 80 - -, press Enter.
5. 4001 is displayed on the operator panel.
How to Run Hardware Group Test Ails or Processor/Storage
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40; press Adv until 81, 82, or 87 is displayed where:
81 = Test All (CSU Mode)
82
=
Test All (Installed Mode)
87 = Processor/Storage.
3. Press Enter; 8x - - is displayed.
4. Press Enter; test execution begins.
The status indicators display one of the following codes,
Where: HG = 81, 82, or 87.
•
•
•
•
•
21HG
22HG
20HG
29HG
For all other status codes see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
5. To make another selection, at 20HG or 29HG press Enter. The 4001 prompt is displayed.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-67
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
How to Run Hardware Group Basic Tests (HG 01 - 50)
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
3. At 80, press Enter, 80 - - is displayed.
4. At 80 - -, press Enter.
5. At 4001, press Adv until the desired HG number is displayed. See Table 2-10 on page 2-69.
6. Press Enter, HG - - is displayed.
7. At HG - -, press Enter to run the test or press Advance to select a test parameter
8. At TP, press Enter; HGTP is displayed. See Table 2-10 on page 2-69.
9. At HGTP, press Enter.
The status indicators display one of the following codes, where
HG
= The hardware group being tested:
21HG
= Test in progress
22HG
= Test in progress
20HG
= Test complete
29HG
= Test failure.
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Note: To bypass error stops, (29XX) for HG 81, 82, and 87, press Enter (Free function) to display 400l.
To make another selection at 20XX, press Enter. The 4001 prompt is displayed.
2-68
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
These examples assume the Alt 1 IML function has been performed.
To run a Terminal Adapter Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
At
At
At
At
At
At
40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
80, press Enter.
80 - -, press Enter.
4001, press Adv until 26 is displayed.
26, press Enter.
26 - -, press Enter.
To loop a Terminal Adapter Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
At
At
At
At
At
At
At
At
40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
80, press Enter.
80 - -, press Enter.
4001, press Adv until 26 is displayed.
26, press Enter.
26 - -, press Adv until 91 is displayed.
91, press Enter.
2691, press Enter.
To run CSU tests:
1. At 40, press Adv until 81 is displayed.
2. At 81, press Enter.
3. At 81 - -, press Enter.
To run CSU Tests/Terminal Control:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
At 40, press Adv until 81 is displayed.
At 81, press Enter.
At 81 - -, press Adv until 94 is displayed.
At 94, press Enter.
At 8194, press Enter.
Go to the terminal connected to port O.
Note: Only HGs 81,82, and 87 can be selected at the 40 stop. For all others, an 80 must be entered first,
as shown in the examples.
Table
2-10. Hardware Group Numbers
HG
Unit
HG
Unit
00
01
08
09
11
26
Invalid or unknown
Diskette/Fi Ie Adapter
Timer
Operator Panel
Communication Adapter
Terminal Adapter
80
81
82
84
87
99
Test Monitor Functions
Test All Setup Mode
Test All Installed Mode
Reserved
Processor/Storage
Unknown or unassigned
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-69
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Table
2-11. Test Parameters (Basic Tests)
TP
Description
TP
Description
90
91
92
93
No Options - Default
Loop
Stop on Error
Loop, Stop on Error
94
95
96
97
Terminal Control
Loop, Terminal Control
Stop on Error, Terminal Control
Loop, Stop on Error, Terminal
Control
Loop
Loop causes any valid hardware group test to repeat until it is terminated by user intervention or by an
error. This parameter is ignored for the 80 test request. This parameter is reset at the end of the test and
must be reentered with each test request. If errors occur while a test is running, they are stored in the test
monitor error log. When the log is full, the test will stop. To stop a test that is looping, press Enter.
Certain tests may require an IML or pressing Enter at the operator panel to stop the test from looping.
Terminal Control
This parameter requests the test monitor to switch control of the tests from the operator panel to the
terminal connected to port O. The terminal must be a 3278 or equivalent. Once control is at the terminal, it
remains until another IML is performed. It is not necessary to specify terminal control with each test
request.
Stop on Error
Stop on error is applicable when HG81, 82, or 87 has been selected, or when looping is specified on an
individual hardware group. This parameter is ignored for HG 80. When this parameter is specified, the test
control program will stop and display each error as it occurs. When running HG 81, 82, or 87 with stop on
error off, the test control program will collect each error in a log without stopping, and present all the
errors at the end of the test.
2-70
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
How to Run Diskette Drive Optional Tests (HG 01)
Two diskette drive optional tests can be performed on the 3174:
•
Function number 01 is the diskette drive ready test. This test verifies that the diskette drive ready
circuitry and the diskette change function are working correctly.
•
Function number 02 is the diskette media surface test. This test is used to check for defective tracks
and sectors on a diskette.
Diskette Drive Ready Test (FN 01)
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
3. At 80, press Enter; 80 - - is displayed.
4. At 80 - -, press Enter.
5. At 4001, press Adv; 01 is displayed.
6. At 01, press Enter; 01 - - is displayed.
7. At 01 - -, press Adv; 01 is displayed.
8. At 01, press Enter; 0101 is displayed.
9. At 0101, press Enter.
10. 4561 or 4563 is displayed.
11. Open the diskette drive door; 4560 is displayed.
12. Close the diskette drive door; 4561 is displayed.
13. Open the diskette drive door and remove the diskette; 4562 is displayed.
14. Insert the diskette and close the diskette drive door; 4563 is displayed.
15. Repeat steps 12 through 14 as many times as required to verify that the diskette drive is working
correctly.
Note: If the status code does not change after performing an action with the diskette drive, the diskette
drive or the planar board is defective.
16. To make another selection press Enter. The 4001 prompt is displayed.
If any other status code is displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-71
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Diskette Drive Media Surface Test (FN 02)
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
3. At 80, press Enter; 80 - - is displayed.
4. At 80 - -, press Enter.
5. At 4001, press Adv; 01 is displayed.
6. At 01, press Enter; 01 - - is displayed.
7. At 01 - -, press Adv until 02 is displayed.
8. At 02, press Enter; 0102 is displayed.
9. At 0102, press Enter; 4565 is displayed.
10. Insert the diskette to be scanned. If the Utility diskette is being scanned, skip this step and continue
with step 12.
11. At 4565, press Adv; 01 is displayed.
12. Press Enter.
13. The Status indicators display one of the following codes:
2101 = Test in progress
2201 = Test in progress
4566 = Test completed (no defects found)
4567 = Test completed (defects found).
14. If 4567 is displayed, record the additional data. See status code 4567 in the 3174 Status Codes manual.
15. To make another selection at 4566 or 4567, press Enter. The 4001 prompt is displayed.
2-72
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
How to Read the Day and Time of Day (HG 08)
This test provides the capability of reading the time-of-day and day counter. The time of day runs from
00:00 hours and minutes to 23:59 hours and minutes. The day counter runs from 0000 days to 0255 days.
When the tim~-of-day counter goes from 23:59 to 00:00, the day counter is increased by 1. When the day
counter reaches 0255, it returns to 0000 when the time of day passes 23:59.
Note; The time-of-day and day counters are reset to zeros when the controller is powered off and on.
R~ad
the Time of Day (FN 01)
1. Insert a Utility diskette.
2. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
3. At 40, press Adv until S8 is displayed.
4. At S0, press Enter; S0 - - is displayed.
5. At S0 - -, press Enter.
6. At 4001, press Adv twice; 0S is displayed.
7. At 0S, press Enter; 0S - - is displayed.
S. At 8S - -, press
A~v;
0t is displayed.
9. At 01, press Enter; 0S0l is displayed.
10. At 0S01, press Enter.
11. The day counter is displayed.
12. Press Adv, the time-of-day is displayed.
13. To make another selection, press Enter. The 4001 prompt is displayed.
14. If any other status code is displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-73
UHllne 1 eSls
(uperator panel)
How to Run the Operator Panel Test (HG 09)
If the results of this test are not as expected, go to MAP 0110.
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 48, press Adv until 88 is displayed.
3. At 88, press Enter; 88 - - is displayed.
4. At 88 - -, press Enter ..
5. At 4881, press Adv until 89 is displayed.
6. At 89 press Enter; 89 - - is displayed.
7. At 89 - -, press Enter.
8. At 4586, press Adv to step through the following list of characters.
8 8 8 8
1 III
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
555 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
EEEE
HHHH
LLLL
PPPP
Blank Status Indicators
Note: Each time the Adv pushbutton is pressed the following should occur on the operator panel:
1. The data transfer indicator comes on for about 1 second.
2. The correct 4 characters display in the status indicators.
3. After about 10 seconds the Check Cond indicator comes on and stays on until Adv is pressed
again.
4. Press Enter.
5. If 2889 is displayed, press Enter. The 4881 prompt is displayed.
6. If any other status code is displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
2-74
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
How to Run Communication Adapter Optional Tests (HG 11)
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
3. At 80, press Enter, 80 - - is displayed.
4. At 80, press Enter.
5. At 4001, press Adv until 11 is displayed.
6. At 11, press Enter, 11 - - is displayed.
7. Before selecting a function number determine if the controller has a Type 1 or Type 2 communication
adapter.
Models 81 Rand 91 R use a Type 1 communication adapter (EIA/V.3S).
Models 82R and 92R use a Type 2 communication adapter (X.21).
Note: Table 2-12 and the paragraphs following "Communication Adapter Function Number
Descriptions" on page 2-76 describe the purpose of each function number and any prerequisite
conditions that have to be met before a particular function number can be used.
8. At 11 - -, press Adv until the desired FN number is displayed.
9. At FN, press Enter; 11 FN is displayed.
10. At 11 FN, press Enter; the test begins.
11. The following status codes display in the status indicators:
2111 = Test in progress
2211 = Test in progress
2011 = Test completed
3030. = Test failed.
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
12. To make another selection or to terminate the test, press Enter.
Table
2-12. Function Numbers (Communication)
FN
Description
01
Interface Wrap Test
02
03
04
Modem Wrap
Reserved
Type 1 I nterface Status
Test
Type 2 Interface Clock
Test
Type 1 Driver Static Test
OS
07
Condition
•
For EIA/V.3S: Set the cable Test/Oper switch
to Test or use wrap plug part 6423419.
• For X.21: Set the cable Test/Oper switch to
Test or use wrap plug part 6423420.
Set the interface cable Test/Oper switch to Oper.
Set the cable TestlOper switch to Oper.
Set the cable Test/Oper switch to Test.
None.
In the test descriptions that follow, see Figures 2-5 through 2-7 for communication line flow.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-75
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Communication Adapter Function Number Descriptions
The following paragraphs describe the function numbers for Type 1 (EIA/V35) and Type 2 (X.21)
communication adapters.
Interface Wrap Test (FN 01): This test provides a data wrap of the driver receiver portion of the Type 1 and
Type 2 communication adapter. With the external interface cable connected, the data is wrapped through
the TestlOper switch on the interface cable. A wrap plug for each adapter is available as a branch office
tool that can be used in place of the interface cable. To ensure a valid wrap test, the following condition
must be met:
For Type 1 Communication Adapter (EIA/V.35): Connect the external interface cable and set the TestlOper
switch to Test, or install a wrap plug (PIN 6423419) on the communication adapter port.
For Type 2 Communication Adapter (X.21): Connect the external interface cable and set the TestlOper
switch to Test, or install a wrap plug (PIN 6423420) on the communication adapter port.
Notes:
1. Function number 01 runs automatically when customer setup tests (HG 81) are performed.
2. For X.21 this wrap test does not fail if only one of the Signal A or Signal B lines is broken.
Modem Wrap (FN 02): This test provides a data wrap through the external modem. This test is valid for
both Type 1 and Type 2 communication adapters. To ensure a valid wrap test, the following conditions
must,be met:
• The modem must be wrappable.
• The external interface cable must be connected to the communication adapter and to the modem.
• The Test/Oper switch on the cable must be set toOper.
Type 1 Interface Status Test (FN 04): This test checks 'data set ready' and 'receive line signal detect' (also
called carrier detect). A status code is written to the Status indicators in 2-second intervals to indicate the
status of these two interface leads. Status code 4513 means both lines are on. Status codes 4510 - 4513
indicate other conditions for these lines. If other status codes are displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes
manual. This test is only for the Type 1 communication adapter (EIA/V.35). To ensure a valid test, the
external interface cable must be connected to the communication adapter and to the modem. The
Test/Oper switch on the cable is set to Oper. Once this test is running it does not stop until Enter is
pressed.
Type 2 Interface Clock Test (FN 05): This test provides a data wrap through the attached modem using the
modem clock. This test is only for the type 2 communication adapter (X.21). To ensure a valid test, the
external interface cable must be connected to the communication adapter and to the modem. The
TestlOper switch on the cable is set to Oper.
Type 1 Driver Static Test (FN 07) (NTT Japan): This test sets the following interface leads to their logical on
condition for measurement purposes: 'data terminal ready' (DTR), 'request to send' (RTS), 'data set ready'
(DSR), 'test', and 'select standby' (Sel Stby). This test is valid only for the Type 1 communication adapter.
Status Code 4514 indicates the interface leads are at their logical on condition. Once this test is running it
does not stop until Enter is pressed.
2-76
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
V.3S Cable Wrap Test (Three Test/Oper Switches)
This procedure is used with the V.35 interface cable that has three Test/Oper switches on the end. This
cable provides better detection of adapter/cable problems when either the A or B signal (receive, transmit,
or clock) is failing. The wrap provided with communication adapter test FN 01 is used in conjunction with
the TestlOper switch. See Figures 2-13 and 2-21 for the switch settings of the TestlOper switches before
starting the wrap test. If any other switch setting is used, the wrap test fails.
Table
2-13. V.3S TestlOper Switch Settings
Description
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Test Mode 1 (Wrap A Lines)
Test Mode 2 (Wrap B Lines)
Test Mode 3 (Wrap A and B Lines)
Operate
Test
Test
Test
Oper
Oper
Test
Test
Oper
Test
Oper
Test
Oper
Figure
2-21. V.3S Three-Switch TestlOper Switch
V.3S Cable Wrap Test (One Test/Oper Switch)
On early-production 3174 Establishment Controllers, the V.35 communication interface cable has a
one-switch TestlOper switch. A special wrap plug (P/N 61X4603) is shipped with the controller. The wrap
plug is tied to the end of the cable near the TestlOper switch. This wrap plug is used in conjunction with
communication adapter test FN 01 to test the early-production V.3S interface cables.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the interface cable from the short modem adapter cable.
Set the TestlOper Switch to Oper.
Install the wrap plug (P/N 61X4603) at the end of the cable that has the TestlOper switch.
Perform the communication adapter wrap test FN 01.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-77
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
How to Run Terminal Adapter/3299 Optional Tests HG 26
1. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
2. At 40, press Adv until 80 is displayed.
3. At 80, press Enter; 80 - - is displayed.
4. At 80 - -, press Enter.
5. At 4001, press Adv until 26 is displayed.
6. At 26, press Enter; 26 - - is displayed.
7. Select a function number/function parameter.
Note: Table 2-14 on page 2-79 and the paragraphs following Table 2-14 describethe purpose of each
function number/function parameter and any prerequisite conditions that have to be met before
a particular function number/function parameter can be used.
8. At 26 - -, press Adv until the desired FN number is displayed.
9. At FN, press Enter; 26FN is displayed.
10. At 26FN, press Adv until the desired FP number is displayed.
Note: If a function parameter is not required, go to step 13.
11. At FP press Enter, FP - - is displayed.
12. Press Enter.
13. The following status codes display on the operator panel.
2126 = Test in progress
2226 = Test in progress
2026 = Test completed
3040 = Test failed
3041 = Test failed
3045 = Test failed
4550 = Test completed.
For all other status codes, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
14. To terminate the test or to make another selection, press Enter.
2-78
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
Table
2-14. Function Numbers and Function Parameters (Port Wrap)
FN
Description
FP
Description
Condition
01
Terminal Adapter
Port Wrap
3299-2, 3299-3
Port Wrap
Terminal Path
Test
CUT Display
Exerciser
Terminal Adapter
Wrap All
3299-2, 3299-3
Wrap All
Printer Exerciser
Test
Reserved
00-03
Terminal Adapter
Port 00- 03
Logical Port
00-07
Logical Port
00-07
Logical Port
00-07
Disconnect the port signal cable.
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
00-07
00-07
00-07
Disconnect the 3299 output port signal cable.
Terminal attached and powered on.
Terminal attached and powered on.
Disconnect port 00 - 03 signal cables.
00
00-31
Terminal Adapter
Port Number
Logical Port
00-31
Disconnect the output signal cables from the
3299.
Printer attached, powered on and ready.
Terminal Adapter Function Numbers/Parameters Description
The following paragraphs describe the port wrap function numbers. Figure 2-22 on page 2-80 shows the
terminal attachment.
Terminal Adapter Port Wrap (FN 01): This function number provides an internal wrap test on the individual
ports on the terminal adapter. The function parameter is used to specify the port number to be wrapped.
Status code 2026 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040 indicates the test failed.
3299 Model 2,3 Port Wrap (FN 02): This function number provides an internal wrap of the individual output
ports on a 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Models 2 and 3. The function parameter is used to specify the logical
port number to be wrapped. Status code 2026 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040
indicates the test failed.
Note: Wrap Test FN 02 and 06 cannot be performed on a 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Model 1.
Terminal Path Test (FN 03): This function number provides a path test on terminals that are directly
attached to the terminal adapter or attached through a 3299 Model 1, 2, or 3. The function parameter is
used to specify the logical port number of the terminal to be tested. The path is automatically determined
by the diagnostic. Status code 4550 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3041 indicates the
test failed.
Terminal Exerciser Test (FN 04): This function number provides a data test to terminals that are directly
attached or attached through a 3299 Model 1, 2 or 3. The physical path to the terminal is automatically
determined by the test. The function parameter is used to specify the logical port number of the terminal to
be tested. A data pattern appears on the 3278 or similar terminal when this test is performed. Status code
4050 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3041 and 3042 indicate the test failed.
Terminal Adapter Wrap All (FN 05): This function number provides an internal wrap test of the nine ports
on the terminal adapter. A function parameter is not required for this function number. Status code 2026
indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040 indicates the test failed.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-79
Offline Tests (Operator Panel)
3299 Model 2,3 Wrap All (FN 06): This function number provides an internal wrap of the eight output ports
on a 3299 Model 2 or 3. The function parameter is used to specify the port number on the terminal adapter
that the 3299 is attached to.
Note: Wrap tests FN 02 and 06 cannot be performed on 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Model 1.
Status code 2026 indicates successful test completion. Status code 3040 indicates the test failed.
Note: Function numbers 05 and 06 run on the terminal adapter logic when customer setup (HG81) test is
performed.
Printer Exerciser Test (FN 07): This function number provides a data test to printers that are directly
attached or attached through a 3299 Model 1,2 or 3. The path to the printer is automatically determined by
the test. The function parameter is used to specify the logical port number of the printer to be tested. A
single line of data prints on the printer being tested. This test is restricted to 3262, 3268, 3287, 3289, 4214,
4224, 4234, 4245, 5210, or equivalent printers. Status code 4550 indicates successful test completion.
Status code 3041 and 3042 indicate the test failed.
FN 01,05
Terminal Ports
(.---0-----./'---2--3--..'"
000
'---v-----J
Addresses
01-03
Terminal
FN 03,04,07
FN 02,06
Addresses 00-07
3299
OR--------------------------~ Model 1, 2, or 3
Address 00
Terminal
To Terminals
FN 03,04,07
Figure
2-22. Block Diagram of Terminal Attachment
2-80
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Diagnostic Aids: Tests
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Introduction
The online tests are in two sections. One set of Online Tests is for microcode that is Configuration Support
A and S. The other set is for microcode that is Configuration Support B (see page 2-122). If you are not
sure of your 3174 microcode release level, select online test 5, option 1 (15,1). The release level will be
displayed on the screen.
Online tests are selectable from any 3278, 3279, or similar display attached to the controller. These tests
are not selectable from distributed function terminals, such as a 3290. This test facility can be used during
normal subsystem operation and is available after entering test mode. Test mode is entered by pressing
the ALT and TEST keys simultaneously on an attached display Istation keyboard. The following tests can
be selected by entering one of the test formats shown below or from the 3174 Test Menu shown in
Figure 2-23 on page 2-83.
Test 0 (Terminal Check): Provides a facility to test a terminal's base and feature hardware. Test 0 also
identifies the hardware group and port number of the terminal requesting the test. For detailed information
about Test 0 see page 2-85.
10
Test 0 runs on the terminal being used to run tests.
Test 1 (Display Event Logs and Response Time Log): Event records for displays, printers, adapters, and
processor logic are displayed. Also provides a response time monitor log. For detailed information about
Test 1, see page 2-86. The following types of error logs can be displayed:
11,1
11,2
11,3,n
/1,4, n
11,4,n,m
11,5,xxxx
11,6,n
11,7
11,8
Response time monitor log: RTM statistics
All event log: Error statistics for the 3174
Hardware group: Error statistics for a specific hardware group
Port: Error statistics for a specific terminal port
Port, hardware group: Error statistics for a specific terminal port of a specific hardware
group
Status code: Error statistics for a specific status code
Logical terminal: Error statistics for a specific logical terminal
Change log mode (Normal/Intensive).
Event log summary.
Test 2 (Display Configuration Panels): Provides both hardware and microcode configurations on the
controller.
For detailed information about Test 2, see page 2-92.
12,1
12,2
12,3,n
12,4
Hardware configuration: The hardware configuration is displayed.
Configuration questions: The panels presented during configure (except panel 118) are
displayed.
Device Definition: If the 3174 is configured for both PAM and LTA, the PAM panel will be
displayed first and then the LTA panel.
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter configuration: The Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
configuration is displayed.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-81
Test 3 (3270 Device Status Information): The status of all terminal adapter (HG 26) attached devices is
displayed. For detailed information about Test 3, see page 2-94.
Status Summary is displayed.
Error counters for port n (n = 0-31) are displayed.
Connectivity for port n (n = 0-31) is displayed
13,1
13,2,n
13,3,n
Test 4 (Reset Logs and Cable Errors): Resets the event log, traces, cable errors, and the response time
monitor log. For detailed information about Test 4, see page 2-99.
Resets the response time monitor log.
Resets the event log, traces, and cable errors
Resets the cable errors.
14,1
14,2
14,3
Test 5 (Display Vital Data): Provides the following 3174 information:
Model Number
Microcode functional release level
Installed microcode patches
DSL information.
Controller 10 (serial number)
Microcode maintenance release
Installed RPQs
For detailed information about Test 5, see page 2-100.
15,1
IS,2,n,m
Display Controller Vital Data
Display Port Vital Data
Test 6 (Display Control Blocks): The port control areas and host control data are displayed. Can also
display all' logical terminal extensions (if any). For detailed information about Test 6, see page 2-103.
16,1,n
16,2
16,2,n,m
16,3
Register page
The port control area information for the requestor's port is displayed.
The port control area information for a specific port and hardware group is displayed.
X.25/X.21 SHM Host Control Data
Test 7 (Color Convergence): For more information, see page 2-11S.
Test 8 (Extended Functions and Programmed Symbols): For more information see page 2-115.
Test 10 (Port Wrap Tests): Provides a port wrap test for terminal adapter ports (00, 08, 16, 24), TMA ports
00-31, and 3299 Model 2 and 3 ports 00-31. For detailed information about Test 10, see 2-116.
110,1,n
110,2,n
Direct wrap for a specific terminal adapter port
3299/TMA port wrap
Test 11 (Trace Control): Provides an internal trace capability. This function is available only to service
personnel. For detailed information on Test 11 see "Test 11: Trace Control" on page 2-117.
Test A (Alerts): Provides a facility for operator-generated alerts on SNA controller. For detailed
information about Test A, see page 2-120.
2-82
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
3174 Test Menu
To display the 3174 Test Menu, shown in Figure 2-23, perform the following steps at any 3278 or similar
display.
1. Press and hold ALT. Press TEST.
2. Press PF12, or CLEAR, or PA2.
_ _ _ _ 3174 Test Menu _ _ _ __
Test
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A
D,n
Select test;
Description
Terminal check
Display event logs and response time log
Display configuration panels
3270 device status information
Reset logs and cable errors
Display vital data
Display Control Areas
Color convergence
Extended functions and program symbols
Token-ring tests
Port wrap tests
Trace control
Asynchronous emulation adapter tests
Alerts
Dump device on port n (n=0-31)
press ENTER ===>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
2-23. 3174 Test Menu
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-83
Online Tests Configurat;on
A5/S,5
.
f
Online Test Format
.
..
!
r ,.
~
The general format for all online tests is It,s,n,m, where:
!
~
= te~t numb~r
= option ~Hm~~r for tests that have rTl~fluS, such as test 1
n,m
~ value(s)'r~Au.,red by some test menus.
,
t.
;.:~~,' ,
•
'
•
For example:
At~st entry of 11,2 will display all log records.
IA test entry of 11,3,1 ~iI! display the log record~ for HGO~.
These tests
. can also be selected by
. entering the following:
'
Example 1
1.
From any select lin~, enter 11
The Logs Menu
is di~played.
, 'i \
2.
Frgm the select lin~ of the Event Log Menu, enter 2
~!I ;!PQ records are displayed.
~
Example 2
1.
From any select line, enter 11
The Logs
Menu is displ'ayed.
f
' .
2.
Frorp the select line Of tne Event Log Menu, enter 3,1
The log records for H~01 are displayed.
.
~
2-84
3174 Models 81 FJ throu~tt 92~ Ma!nt~nance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 0: Terminal Check
Provides a facility to test the requesting terminal's basic functions (such as highlighting, nondisplay, and
insertion), as well as feature functions (such as light pens, magnetic card readers, and scanners).
To request Test 0, perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in the following:
a. 10 or I
b. Press ENTER.
The test pattern shown in Figure 2-24 is displayed.
__Terminal Check__
3174 Controller
Hardware Group
Port Number
nn
mm
?SEL PEN
&SEL PEN
NON DISPLAY
SEL PEN
>SEL PEN
INSERT CK
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select test; press ENTER ====>
PF:
3=Quit
/Test,Option
12=Test menu
WHERE:
nn
= The adapter HG number of the terminal that requested the test.
mm = The port number of the terminal that requested the test.
NON = The nondisplay field that should not appear on the screen.
Figure
2-24. Test 0 Display Pattern
The following terminal functions are tested:
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-intensity function
Nondisplay function
Selector pen (if one is attached)
Various key functions and modes
Four-color function and base-color switch capability on a 3279 or similar color display station
Audible alarm (if one is attached).
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-85
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 1: Display Logs Menu
Test 1 provides a response time log and event statistics for terminals, hardware groups, and ports. To
select a specific'event log from the Logs Menu, shown in Figure 2-25, perform the following procedure at
any 3278 or similar display station:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press and hold AL T; press TEST.
Type in 11
Press ENTER; the Logs Menu is displayed.
To display a specific event log, type in the option number of the desired log and press ENTER.
_ _ Logs Menu _ _
Option
Description
1
2
3,n
4,n
4,n,m
5,xxxx
6,n
7
8
(Current log mode:
Normal)
Response time log
All events logged
Hardware group (n=O-99)
Port n (n=O-31)
Port n, hardware group m (n=O-31,m=O-99)
Status code (replace XiS with search digits)
Logi ca 1 termi na 1 (n=O- 254)
Change log mode (normal/intensive)
Event log summary (by category and hardware group)
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select option; press ENTER ===>
PF:
3=Quit
12=Test menu
For Models 1L through 13R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 to 31.
For Models 51 R through 63R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 to 15.
For Models 81 R through 92R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 to 7.
Figure
2-25. Test 1 Menu
Option 1. Type 1 to select option 1 from the Logs Menu. The resulting panel shows the response time
monitor (RTM) log if the controller is configured for RTM.
Option 2 -6. Similar panels are displayed when options 2,3,4,5, or 6 are selected from the Logs Menu.
The difference in the format of the log record panels is the title line. Each panel contains the menu
selection and the specified parameter value. If no event record exists for the requested event log, a No
entri es were found message is displayed. To select a log record from the Logs Menu, enter one of the
following test requests:
2 All the errors in the event log are displayed.
3,n (n = a specific hardware group number from 0 to 99) All errors in the event log for the hardware
group selected are displayed.
4,n (n = a specific terminal port number from 0 to 31) all errors in the event log for the port number
selected are displayed.
4,n,m (n = a specific terminal port number from 0 to 31; m = a specific hardware group number from 0
to 99) all errors in the event log for the port number on the specific hardware group selected are
displayed.
2-86
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
5,xxxx (the x's are replaced with a status code). Four characters must be entered. An x can be used as
a "don't care" character. For example: On the select line on the Logs Menu panel, enter 5,x501. The
event log will be searched, and all the 501 status codes that occurred since the last time the logs were
reset will be displayed.
6,n (n = a specific logical terminal number from 0 to 254) all errors in the event log for the logical
terminal number that was selected are displayed.
Option 7. Type 7 to change the log mode from Normal to Intensive and from Intensive back to Normal. The
current log mode is noted on the Test 1 Menu screen. Normal is the mode regularly used for logging
errors. Intensive was created to record those high-frequency loggable errors that are not recorded in
Normal mode. Because of the high frequency of the errors, Intensive mode should only be used when
needed. To guard against continued use, the controller will change the log mode back to Normal when a
76-hour timer expires.
Option 8. Type an 8 the Event Log Summary is displayed. It provides a single panel of error log summary
information available through the /1 test in 3174 online TEST MODE. All current log records, both internal
and on diskette or fixed disk, are divided into the following event categories. A breakdown by Hardware
Group (HG) is under each category. See Figure 2-26.
Event Log Summary ______
Category
Total
Subtotal
by
Machine
Check
Program
Check
2
1
HG
26 1
88 1
HG
88 1
Comm Media
Check Check
2
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
6
HG
HG
16 2 02
99
01
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select test: press ENTER ===>_
Port Other
Check
HG
2 26
3
12
4
4
HG
82 2
26 18
1
/Test,Option
12=Test menu
2-26. Event Log Summary (Example)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-87
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Log Records Example:
Figure 2-27 illustrates the panel displayed if you select option 4 with a specific port number and hardware
group.
_ _ Log Records - All _ _
(Day/Time since last POR: 000/08:11)
Day Time SC
QA PHG.:..PN CHG_PN LT
000
000
000
000
000
015
015
015
015
015
015
08: 11
00:05
00:03
00:02
00:02
21:48
21:22
21:20
21:19
21:07
20:01
0315
0384
0500
0503
3174
0402
0401
0209
0201
3174
0311
58
05
01
01
01
02
03
51
51
01
01
16
99
16
16
00
16
16
26_08
26_08
00
87
26_02
26_02
16
16
002
006
008
008
Extended data bytes (B1-B16)
B1 B3 B5 B7 B9 B11 B13 B15
9210 1100 01
0387 0385
0000 0003 F350 0000
0001 0004 3c40 4000
9052 1900
SC=Status Code
QA=Qualifier HG=Hardware group
PHG_PN=PrimaryHG_PN
CHG_PN=ConnectingHG_PN
ID=Host ID
PN=Port number
LT=Logical terminal
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER====>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
8=Fwd
12=Test Menu
2-27. Log Record Display Panel
Day/Time
The Day/Time value indicates the setting of the 3174 interval timer when the request to display the log is
entered. Since the interval timer is reset to zeros when the controller is powered off and on, it also
indicates the elapsed time since the power-on occurred. This timer can be set to the actual time of day
using an offline test. The day value range is 000 to 255 and is increased by 1 every 24 hours. The time field
is specified as 00 hours through 23 and 00 minutes through 59.
The Day/Time represents the day and time with respect to power-on when the log event occurred.
SC Field
SC = The base status code that was logged. See the 3174 Status Codes, GA27-3832, for the recovery
action.
QA Field
QA
= The qualifier associated with the base status code.
PHG and CHG Fields
PHG (Primary Hardware Group) and CHG (Connection Hardware Group) = The hardware group associated
with the error that occurred. The PHG field contains 00 or 99 if the error is not associated with a particular
hardware group, or if the hardware group cannot be identified. The values 00 and 99 are not displayed in
the CHG field. An example of this would be a 3278 terminal attached to a TMA in a 3174 Model 1Lor 11 L.
2-88
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/55
The PHG would be HG26 and the CHG would be HG16. The hardware groups for all models of the 3174 are
shown in Table 2-15.
Table
2-15. Hardware Group Numbers
HG
Unit
HG
Unit
00
01
02
03
04
08
09
11
16
16
21
Invalid or unknown
Diskette Drive 1/File Adapter
Diskette Drive 2/File Adapter
Fixed Disk 1/File Adapter
Fixed Disk 2/File Adapter
Timer
Operator Panel
Communication Adapter
Channel Adapter
Channel Driver/Receiver
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
22
23
26
26
31
46
80
81
82
87
99
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
Terminal Adapters
Terminal Multiplexer Adapters
Token-Ring Adapter
Encrypt/Decrypt Adapter
Test Monitor
Test All CSU Mode
Test All Installed Mode
Processor /Storage
Unassigned Hardware Group
PN Field
PN = The port number (PN) is used in conjunction with the PHG and CHG fields in the Log Records menu.
This field is not displayed at the operator panel.
The Hardware Group 26 port numbers for the 3174 Models 1L through 13R range from 0 to 31. The
Hardware Group 26 port numbers for 3174 Models 51 R through 63R range from 0 to 15. The Hardware
Group 26 port numbers for 3174 Models 81R through 92R range from 0 to 7.
LT Field
LT = The logical terminal number, if the error is related to attached terminals. The LT field is not displayed
at the operator panel. Certain terminals may use multiple logical terminals, such as a 3290.
Extended Data Fields (81-816)
The extended data fields contain supplementary information that may be useful to resolve a problem, such
as TYPE and LOCA of the failing FRU, or the failing bytes in a data stream error. To determine the
definition of the extended data (81- 816), see the 3174 Status Codes, GA27-3832. The extended data field
in the 3174 Status Codes correlates to this field. See the following example on how to correlate a log entry
to the 3174 Status Codes: Log Entry = 05040511 00 9253 22
0504 = Status code
0511 = Qualifier and hardware group
00 = PN (none associated with this log entry)
9253 = FRU Type number
22 = Location of the FRU
To find this status code in the 3174 Status Codes, look for status code 0504 with a QA field of 05.
Status Code Entry
= 0504 05HG 8182 8384
0504 = Status code
05HG = Qualifier and hardware group
8182 = FRU Type Number
8384 = Location of the FRU
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-89
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 1, Option 1
If the 3174 has been configured for local display of the RTM log or the host has enabled this function, the
11,1 Test allows an operator to display the RTM log on authorized displays (except terminals such as the
3290). An example of the Response Time Monitor log is shown in Figure 2-28 on page 2-90.
@
= nnn
/1,1
OEF CTRH1 BOyn CTRH2 BOyn CTR#3 BOY#3 CTRH4 BOY#4
OV
0.5 11,415
316
21 1:00.0
00 1
10
1.0
5.0
6
01p 1
5.0
0 1:00.0
0
0
0.5
0
1.0
0
02 ? 1
651
0.5
0
1.0
0
5.0
0 1:00.0 14,458
512
5.0
1
0 1:00.0
03 *2
251
0.5
1.0
56
04; 1 *
4
31
11
2.0 4,371
5.0
.1.0
2
1.0
0
0.5
0
1.0
0
5.0
0 1:00.0
0
05 - 1
1
61
2.0
4
3.0
4.0
45
0
06 *3
1.0
07p 1 1,415
0.5
890
1.0
323
5.0
0 1:00.0 1,381
@
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
8=Fwd
12=Test menu
2-28. RTM Log
The example shows representative information for the first eight logical terminals. If the 3174 is not
customized for RTM, the display station keyboard is inhibited. Each time the PF8 key is pressed, the next
group of eight terminals is displayed.
@
p
-
*
?
DEF
CTR#1
CTR#2
CTR#3
CTR#4
BDY 1
BDY2
BDY3
BDY4
OV
=
Device or logical unit (LU)
Printer (no RTM statistics)
Distributed function terminal
Never powered up (no RTM statistics)
Parameter set by host
RTM disabled by host for this device
Response Time Definition
1 = the time to the first character written on the terminal.
2 = the time to keyboard is usable by the operator.
3 = the time to CD/EB.
= First-counter response time = 0 up to BOY 1 value
= Second-counter response time greater than BDY 1 up to BDY 2 value
= Third-counter response time greater than BDY 2 up to BDY 3 value
= Fourth-counter response time greater than BDY 3 up to BDY 4 value
= First boundary in minutes and seconds
= Second boundary in minutes and seconds
= Third boundary in minutes and seconds
= Fourth boundary in minutes and seconds
= Overflow (response time exceeding last boundary).
=
=
=
=
=
=
Note: The displayed boundaries are rounded to the nearest tenth of a second.
2-90
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Reset the Response Time Monitor
The operator at an authorized display can reset the RTM logs of all configured devices. All log information
is reset except the customized boundaries, the customized RTM definitions, and pending transaction status.
See "Test 4: Reset Logs and Cable Errors" on page 2-99. When the reset is completed, a completion
message appears on line 23.
If the 3174 is not customized for RTM, when 14,1 is entered, a message appears stating the function is not
supported for this configuration.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-91
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Test 2: Configuration Menu
Test 2 provides information about hardware configuration, configuration questions, the printer authorization
matrix, and the Asynchronous Emulation adapter configuration. When Test 2 is selected, the menu shown
in Figure 2-29 is displayed. Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
Type in 12
Press ENTER; the Configuration Menu is displayed.
Type in the option number.
Press ENTER.
_ _ Configuration Menu _ _
Option
1
2
3,n
4
Description
Hardware configuration
Configuration questions
Printer authorization matrix for entry n (n=1-47)
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter configuration
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select Option, press ENTER ====>
/Test,Option
PF:
12=Test menu
Figure
3=Quit
2-29. Test 2 Menu
Option 1. The Hardware Configuration Table is displayed.
Option 2. The configuration panels displayed during configuration (except panel 118) are displayed.
Option 3,n. The printer authorization matrix for all printers attached to the controller, starting with the one
you specified with the "n" parameter are displayed.
Option 4. The asynchronous emulation adapter configuration panels are displayed.
For more information about Options 2,3, and 4, see the 3174 Utilities Guide, GA23-0214.
2-92
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Test 2, Option 1
The following panel is displayed.
_ _ Hardware Configuration Table _ _
HG
00
01
01
08
09
TYPE
9001
9113
9160
9160
9160
LC
00
01
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Invalid Card/Cond
Diskette 1 - 1.2MB
File Adpt
Timer
Ops Panel Adpt
SC
HG
09
11
87
87
32XX
TYPE
9523
9160
9160
9160
LC
07
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Ops Panel Assembly
Type 1 Com Adpt-XXX
Processor
Storage 2MB
SC
Select Test; press Enter ====>_
PF: 3=Quit
12=Test Menu
Where:
HG
TYPE
LC
SC
Hardware group
FRU Type number
FRU location
Status code This field contains a 32XX number only if a problem has occurred with a FRU
during an IML.
Note: This table shows the configuration for Model 81 R. Only those FRUs that are physically installed are
displayed in this table.
For the communication adapters, the XXX
WRP
V.35
EIA
NC
X.21
WRP
INV
Figure
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
one of the following:
EIA/V.35 wrap plug is connected
V.35 cable is connected
EtA cable is connected
Nothi ng is connected
X.21 cable is connected
X.21 wrap plug is connected
An undefined cable or wrap plug is connected.
2-30. Hardware Configuration Table
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2·93
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 3: 3270 Device Status Information
Test 3 provides the status of all configured devices. The 3270 Device Status Menu panel shown in
Figure 2-31 is displayed. The Control diskette must be installed and a normal IML has to be completed
before this test can be selected. Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type 13
3. Press ENTER.
3270 Device Status Menu
Option
1
2,n
3,n
Description
Display status summary
Display error counters for port n (n=0-31)
Display connectivity for port n (n=0-31)
To go directly to other tests, enter: jTest,Option
Select option; press ENTER ===>_
PF:
3=Quit
12=Test menu
Figure
2-31. 3270 Device Status Menu
2-94
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 3, Option 1
The following panel is displayed.
_ _ Status Summary - HG 26_ _
Port
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Address
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
Attach m m m m m m m m d
x MMMMMMMm m m m m m m m
Status 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - 1 0 s 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
ppvvvvvvvv
vvv
Terminal v v v v ? v v v p
Cable
........ .
. I .
. *
Cabl e Max . . . . * .
*
Host
333A
3 A3
3 3 x x 3
3
LU
+
+ + +
d = direct
= off (error)
m = multiplexor x = unconfigured
1 = on
p = printer
o = off
v = video display
s = switched
Connection number:
+
+
i = DFT devi ce
? = unknown
+ = in session
3=3270 A=ASCII
+
+
= 0 errors
= 1-5 err
= 6-15 err
* = > 15 err
Outgoing call 999-555-1234
To go directly to other tests, enter: fTest,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF:
12=Test menu
3=Quit
Figure
2-32. Status Summary
Port Address: indicates the terminal port number.
For Models 1L through 13R, ports 00 - 31 are displayed.
For Models 51 R through 62R, ports 00 -15 are displayed.
For Models 81 R through 92R, ports 00 - 07 are displayed.
Attach:
d
m
M
x
?
The terminal is attached directly to the terminal adapter.
The terminal is attached through a 3299 Terminal Multiplexer.
A terminal that is attached to this controller through a dual control unit multiplexer.
A terminal that is configured only for another controller through a dual control unit
multiplexer. That terminal will not communicate with this 3174.
When displayed on this line under port 00, a question mark (?) means one of the
following:
• The controller has not communicated with a directly attached terminal.
• The controller has not communicated with any of the terminals connected to a 3299.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-95
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Status: Indicates one of the following conditions on the configured terminals at the time the test request
was entered:
The attached terminal is communicating with the 3174.
The attached terminal is powered off or disconnected.
The terminal had been communicating with the 3174, but the terminal is now disabled
from the controller because of errors. Run Test 1, Option 4 (Event Log) and check for any
2XX status codes logged against the port number that was disabled.
The terminal is presently communicating with another controller through a dual control
unit multiplexer, in other words, it is in the switched state.
1
(1
s
Terminal: Indicates the type of device connected.
?
V,
p, or
The device attached to this port has not been communicating with the 3174. The
terminal on this port may not have been powered on.
To reset this condition at the terminal: Set the Normal/Test switch to Test and back
again, or perform a power-on reset.
The display or video (v), printer (p), or OFT device (i) for this port has a known history
of communicating with the 3174.
Note: If a terminal or multiplexer cable is disconnected and then reconnected, a terminal power-on reset
is required to allow the 3174 to recognize the change. The terminal counter is reset by an IML, by a
power-on reset on the attached terminal, or by online test 4.
Cable: Terminal errors that are caused by cable media-related problems are counted by the cable counter
for each port address. The cable counters accumulate the number of cable transmission errors occurring
in the most recent 30-minute time period. Every 30 minutes the cable counters are reset to 0 and error
counting starts again. When any cable counter passes the threshold of 16 errors, status code 201 51 is
recorded in the event log. The event log can be viewed to determine the number of cable errors that have
occurred over an extended period of time. This log is displayed by using online test /1. The cable counters
are also reset by an IML and online test /4 options 2 and 3. Individual cable counters are reset when the
attached terminal is powered on.
Cable Max: The Cable Max counters retain the peak value attained by the Cable Threshold counters over
an extended period. They are not reset every 30 minutes, but only are reset by IML and online test /4
options 2 and 3.
Host: This line represents the type of host to which a terminal is currently connected, or if no host is
configured. For ports configured for Multiple Logical Terminals (MLT), a blank, 3, or A represents the
primary logical terminal session only.
Blank
x
3
A
No current host
No host sessions configured
3270 host connection established
ASCII host connection established.
LU: This line is present only for 3174s running SNA. It indicates whether the SNA session is bound and
active. For MLT ports, the + is displayed if any SNA session is active.
2-96
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
, .
Connection Number: This number
it4 for ><.21 or X.25 lines. One of the folidWing messages can follow the
connection number:
Outgoing Call, followed by the number being called. For X.25, the outgoing call number (or host OTE
address) can be
to 15 digits long. For X.21, the outgoing call number can be up to 32 characters
long, as entered on the dial terminal.
up
Direct Call (X.21 only).
\
.:
It"
I
(
t
Incoming Call followed by an optional number.. For X.25, the Incoming Call or Host OTE Address can be
up to 15 digits long. For X.21, the Incoming Call will be displayed.
Test 3, Option 2
The following panel is an example of the error counters for the port specified by the parameters.
__ Error Counters for PN 92, HG 26__
Adapter (HG) status:
Port (PN) status:
Error couritersPoll time out:
Read time out:
Poll pa~ity:
~ead parity:
Coax threshold:
Max threshold:
Disabled
Powered off due to error
19
19
19
19
40
75
To go directly to other tests, enter: jTest,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>_
PF:
Figure
3=Qui t
12=Test menu
2-33. Error Counters Example: Disabled Adapter and Disabled Port
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-97
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Test 3, Option 3
The following panels are examples of connectivity. The status of the device determines which panel is
displayed.
_ _Connectivity for PN 11, HG 26_ _
Adapter (HG) status:
Port (PN) status:
Device Type
Enabled
Powered on
Video display (MLT)
Current connectivityLT
LT Addr
HG_PN
Host/Station Name
(No host connectivity configured)
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>_
PF:
Figure
3=Qui t
12=Test menu
2-34. Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Host Unconfigured
_ _Connecti vi ty for PN 11, HG 26_ _
Adapter (HG) status:
Port (PN) status:
Device Type
Enabled
Powered on
Video display (MLT)
Current connectivityLT
1
2
Active 3
4
5
LT Addr
111
n/a
n/a
100
HG_PN
11
21_02
22_07
11
Host/Station Name
3270 host
Dow Jones
The Source
not connected
3270 host
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>_
PF:
3=Quit
12=Test menu
Figure
2-35. Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Live MLT Display
2-98
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Test 4: Reset Logs and Cable Errors
Test 4 resets the response time logs, the event logs, traces, and cable errors. The menu shown in
Figure 2-36 is displayed.
Warning: Do not select the options on this menu unless you want to reset all of your counters back to zero.
Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in 14
3. Press ENTER.
__ Reset Log Menu__
Option
Description
Reset response time logs
Reset event log, traces, and cable errors
Reset cable errors
1
2
3
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select option; press ENTER ====>
/Test,Option
PF:
12=Test menu
Figure
3=Quit
2-36. Test 4 Menu
Option 1. Select option 1 on the Reset Log Menu to reset the response time log.
Option 2. Select option 2 on the Reset Log Menu to reset the event logs, traces, and cable errors.
Option 3. Select option 3 on the Reset Log Menu to reset only the cable errors.
Notes:
1. Cable errors can be reset on an individual port by performing a power-on reset on the terminal
connected to that port.
2. To reset line errors on ASCII terminals, use Test 12, Option 3 or 4.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-99
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 5: Display Vital Data
Test 5: Controller information such as model number, serial number, and EC level is displayed. The menu
shown in Figure 2-37 is displayed. Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in 15
3. Press ENTER.
Vital Data Menu
Option
Description
1
Controller Vital Data
Port n vital data on HG m (n=0-31. m=21-23. 26)
2.n.m
To go directly to other tests. enter: jTest.Option
Select option; press ENTER ===> _
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Test menu
2-37. Vital Data Menu
Option 1. Select option 1 on the Vital Data Menu to display the Controller Vital Data panel. See
Figure 2-38 on page 2-101.
Option 2. Select Option 2 to display the Port Vital Data panel. See Figure 2-39 on page 2-102.
2·100
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 5, Option 1
The following panel is displayed.
__Controller Vital Data__
Help ## 914 555 5555 or 914 555 1212 after 5; IBM ## 914 555 1234
Model Number:
Controll er ID:
Microcode Release:
Maintenance Release:
IML Drive/Type:
01R
1234567
A5.0
89186
01/41
DSL Information:
3290 01.02 0000000000
3179 01.00 0000000000
9999 01.00 0000000000
9998 01.00 0000000000
Active
Patches
Active
RPQs
123456 112361 112371
112344 112362 012372
8K125
7L123
112345
002222
112355
112356
012357
8K123
8K123
8K123
8K123
8K124
112373
012364
112365
002366
112367
112373
112374
112375
002376
112377
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Test menu
2-38. Controller Vital Data
Note: If more than 30 patches are installed on the Control disk, PF8 = FWD will be displayed on this panel.
Help
## - This number is assigned by the customer in response to question 99 during customizing.
Model Number - The model number of the controller.
Controller 10 - This 10 is assigned by the customer in response to question 108 during customization.
Microcode Release - This is the configuration support release and suffix level of the Control disk. A is the
configuration support, 5 is the release level, and 0 is the suffix.
Maintenance Release - This is the year and Julian date that the microcode was released. 89 is the year,
and 186 is the day in the year.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-101
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
IML Drive/Type -
This is the drive and the type of IML that was performed.
Drive Type
01
02
03
04
=
=
=
=
Diskette drive 1
Diskette drive 2
Fixed disk drive 1
Fixed disk drive 2.
IML Type
41 = Load production (default) operational microcode
42 = Load back level operational microcode
43 = Load trial operational microcode.
Active Patches - These are the patch ids that can be in effect for the current system configuration. Even
though listed, a patch is only active if the configuration of the system allows the patch to function. A listed
patch is not necessari Iy functional.
Active RPQs - These are the active RPQ ids that are in effect for the current system. Blank entries
indicate no active RPQs.
DSL Information - This information describes one OFT device on each line. The terminal model type
comes first, followed by the release level and suffix for the OFT microcode. The OFT RPQ is the last field.
The syntax (the parentheses do not appear) is:
(Configuration level)(Release level)(Suffix level)(DFT RPQ)
Test 5, Option 2
Type 2,n,m (n = port number, m = HG 21,22, 23, or 26). The following panel is displayed.
_ _ Port Vital Data-PN 02, HG 26 _ _
Device Type:
Model number:
Plant of manufacture:
Serial number:
Release level:
Engineering change date:
3179
G
*
*
*
*
Device characteristics (hexadecimal):
Bl B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
03 IF 80
* = data not supplied by device
To go directly to other tests, enter: jTest,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
2-102
12=Test menu
2-39. Port Vital Data
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests contlguratlon
AO/;)O
Test 6: Display Control Blocks
Test 6 provides the following information. Option 2 Port Control Area contains common subsystem
information pertaining to all terminals and devices, and the Host Control Data (Option 3) contains
information on the host adapter. In addition, limited device feature information is provided. Options 2 and
3 represent the most current information about a specific device, and should be checked when it is
necessary to determine specific device parameters, such as:
•
•
•
•
Type and feature information for attached terminals.
Is the display screen size correctly specified?
Is a modified data tag (MDT) bit set?
The type of keyboard for a specific terminal.
Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in /6
3. Press ENTER.
_ _ Display Control Blocks Menu_ _
Description
Option
l,n
2
2,n,m
3
Register page n (n=0-3F)
Port control area (Requestor's Port)
Port n control area on HG m (n=0-31 m=21-23,26)
X.21 SHM / X.25 Host Control Data
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select option; press ENTER ===> _
PF:
Figure
3=Quit
12=Test menu
2-40. Test 6 Menu
Option 1,n Register page n (n = Q-3F).
Option 2 Port control area for the requesting terminal is displayed.
Option 2,n,m. Select option 2,n,m to display the port control area for the terminal on port n of hardware
group m.
An example of the Port Control Area panel is shown in Figure 2·41 on page 2-104. Multiple panels,
labeled LT Control Area, are then displayed for each session. Multiple Logical Terminals (MLTs) are
distinguished by an LT number at the top of those panels. See Figure 2-42 on page 2-105 for an example
of an LT Control Area panel.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-103
unllne I ests (.;ontlguratlon AS/55
Option 3. Select option 3 on the Display Control Blocks Menu to display the host control data on controller
that are configured for X.21 or X.2S. Figure 2-43 on page 2-111 shows the host control data for X.21
short-hold mode. Figure 2-44 on page 2-113 shows the host control data for X.2S.
Note: This option only shows the correct XIDs sent and received during an X.21 short-hold mode session.
XIDs exchanged before an SHM session is established are not included in the host control data.
Test 6, Option 2
The following panel will display information about your terminal.
Port Control Area - PN 17, HG 26-
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
AO
80
CO
DO
EO
FO
0
1111
0000
1234
1234
1234
1111
0000
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1111
2
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
2222
4
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
3333
6
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
4444
8
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1111
A
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
2222
C
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
3333
E
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
4444
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===> _
PF:
Figure
3=Quit
8=Fwd
12=Test menu
2-41. Port Control Area Panel
Note: To analyze the information contained on this panel, see "Port Control Area Bit Definitions" on
page 2-106.
2-104
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5155
Type 2,n,m
The following panel will display information for the logical terminal specified by the parameter values.
-
LT n Control Area - PN 17, HG 26-
Segment mm
a
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
1111
0000
1234
1234
1234
1111
0000
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
0000
1234
1234
1234
2
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
4
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
6
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
8
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
A
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
C
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
E
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>
PF:
3=Quit
Figure
7=Back
8=Fwd
12=Test menu
2-42. LT Control Area Panel
Where:
n
blank, non-MLT device
n
1-5, logical terminal number of the MLT device for which the data on the panel applies
mm
segment number of the current panel.
Note: To analyze the information contained on this panel, see liLT Control Area Bit Definitions" on
page 2-108.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2·105
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Port Control Area Bit Definitions
Bits defined as "Reserved" may contain zeros or ones. They should be disregarded unless otherwise
directed by the next level of the support structure. Bits are assumed to be set to B'1' unless otherwise
noted.
Table
2-16 (Page 1 of 2). Port Control Area Bit
Definitions
Location
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Byte 04
0- 1
2
3
4
5- 6
7
Reserved
Op Complete pending from device
Selector Pen retry processing
Stacked status/keystroke/error
Reserved
Print ID entry mode
Byte 05
o
Attached to a 7232 dual control unit
terminal multiplexer
Attached to a 7232 dual control unit
terminal multiplexer - switched to
other CU
Reserved
Reserved
Port timer enabled
1
2- 5
6
7
Byte 06
0-2
3
4
5- 6
7
Byte 07 1
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 08
o
1
2
3-7
Byte 09 1
(Display)
0-3
Reserved
Reserved
APL ROS installed
Number of PS Sets
00 = 0
01 = 2
10 = 4
11 = 6
Color device
Printer
CUT display
DFT device
MLT device
Reserved
Reserved
Display HAP
Reserved
1 = 3278 mode
Native mode
1 = Numeric lock
o = No numeric lock
1 = Keyboard functions have
been redefined
o = No modifiable keyboardKeyboard functions have not
been redefined
Modifications keyboard ID
If Bit 2 = 0
If Bit 2 = 1
00000 Reserved
Reserved
00001 Typewriter
A
00010 Data Entry 1 B
00011 APL
C
0100
Reserved
D
through
11111
2-16 (Page 1 of 2). Port Control Area Bit
Definitions
Location
0000 - Reserved
0001 - APL keyboard/numeric lock
0010 - Text keyboard/numeric lock
0011 - RPQ typewriter
keyboard/numeric lock
Bit
4-6
7
Byte 09 1
(Printer
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
0100 - Typewriter Attribute Select
keyboard/numeric lock
0101 - APL keyboard
0110 - Text keyboard
0111 - APL Attribute Select keyboard
1000 - Data Entry 2
keyboard/numeric lock
1001 - Data Entry keyboard/numeric
lock
1010 - Typewriter/numeric lock
1011 - Reserved
1100 - Data Entry 2 keyboard
1101 - Data Entry 1 keyboard
1110 - Typewriter
1111 - No keyboard
001 - Modell
010 - Model 2
011 - Model 3
100 - Escape
101 - Reserved
110 - Model 5
111 - Model 4
0- indicates display byte
7
ECS feature present
APL feature present
Reserved
Reserved
001 - Modell
010 - Model 2
011 - Model 3
100 - Reserved
101 - Reserved
110 - Model 5
111 - Model 4
1 - Indicates printer byte
Byte OA
(Display)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved
Secu rity key
Selector light pen
Reserved
Magnetic slot reader
Reserved
Extended function buffer
ECS adapter
Byte OB 1
0-2
3
4
5-7
Reserved
Color
Display HAP present
Reserved
o=
lActual features identified to the 3174 by the terminal.
2·106
Table
1
0
1
2
3
4-6
Byte OF
Port Number
00-lF = TA ports 0-31
20-27 = AEA 1 ports 0-7
28- 2F = AEA 2 ports 0-7
30-37 = AEA 3 ports 0-7
Bytes
18-1B
Device Type in EBCDIC (FOFOFOFO if
not known)
lActual features identified to the 3174 by the terminal.
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Table
Location
2-16 (Page 2 of 2). Port Control Area Bit
Definitions
Bit
Byte1C
0-3
4-7
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Additional Information
(00 If not known)
= E = Programmable device
= 1 = Hardware or Microcode
product
= 1 = IBM Product
= 9 = Non-IBM Product
Bytes
1D-1F
Model in EBCDIC
(OOOOOOif not known)
Bytes
20-21
Plant of Manufacture in EBCDIC
(0000 if not known)
Bytes
22-28
Serial number in EBCDIC
(00000000000000 if not known)
Bytes
29-2B
Release level in EBCDIC
(0000000 if not known)
Bytes
2C-3B
Addition level information
(00 ...... 00 if not known)
Byte3C
2NN
Byte 3D
3NN
Byte 85
0-3
4
5
6
7
Byte 86
Reserved
Monocase switch active in device
Clicker enabled
CECP Enabled
Device CECP capable
Number of sessions configured
for a port
Byte 8C
1
Multiple display sessions on display
Byte8D
0
1
2-6
7
Reserved
VPD Support
Reserved
o = Converged keyboard
present
1 = Enhanced keyboard
present
Byte 93
5
6
7
Shared mode printer
Local mode printer
System mode printer
Byte EC
0
ASCII connection for ASCII terminal
or ASCII printer available
ASCII host connection valid on this
port
AEA port configured as switched
Reserved
AEA line trace running
1
2
3-4
5
lActual features identified to the 3174 by the terminal.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-107
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
L T Control Area Bit Definitions
Bits defined as "Reserved" may contain zeros or ones. They should be disregarded unless otherwise
directed by the next level of the support structure. Bytes 04 and 06 indicate functions supported by the
controller and reported as available by the device.
Table
2-17 (Page 1 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Table
2-17 (Page 1 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Location
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Location
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Byte 04
0-2
Value Model Buffer Size
000
Reserved
001
1
960 (480)
010
2
1920(1920)
011
3
2560 (1920)
Reserved
100
101
Reserved
110
5
3564 (1920)
111
4
3440 (1920)
0= Display 1 = Non-Display
11 Printer
01 Data Entry Display
10 None of the others
00 Typewriter Display
0= Escape 1 = Printer
SOEMI printer present
BREG printer present
ByteOA
o
Reserved
Test mode
Alpha shift (not Katakana shift)
Reserved for engineering use
Text indicator
Upshift indicator
Katakana shift
APL indicator
3
3-4
4
5
5-7
Byte 05
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 06
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0-2
3
4
5-7
Byte 08
o
1
2-5
6
7
Byte 09
o
1-4
5
6
7
Katakana keyboard attached
SCS feature installed on printer
Text keyboard
3289 text feature
APL keyboard
Extended keyboard function
Printer supports extended LU1
data stream with SNA FM headers
DFT session
Not used
Security keylock present
Selector pen attached
Reserved
MSR/MHS attached
Reserved
3180 in model 6,7,8, or 9 mode
ECS (APLlText)
Reserved
Color
Display HAP Supported
Reserved
4
5
6
7
Byte OB
Protected field or attribute character
Reserved for engineering use
Keyboard inhibited
Reserved for engineering use
Insert mode
o
1
2
3
4-7
o
Online indicator
System wait condition
Hard lock condition
Keyboard in use by operator
Reserved for engineering use
5
6
7
Reserved for engineering use
Color. override
Reserved for engineering use
Host-initiated local copy request
Alternate screen size
Attributes not valid
Reserved for engineering use
X.21/X.25 Primary dial terminal
Byte OE
0-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved for engineering use
Print failure indicator
Go elsewhere
Minus function
Wrong card
Message pending
Message reminder
Byte OF
o
Printer printing - local copy
If display has printer assigned for
local copy
Printer matrix changed (associated
with this display)
Reserved
ByteOD
1
2
3
4
1
2
3-7
Byte 10
o
1
2
3
Reserved for engineering use
Device to CU connection active
Reserved
Numeric lock field
Reserved for engineering use
lFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
2-108
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 11
o
1
2
3
4
5
Invalid dead key
2NN machine check
Communication check
Program check
Security key off
3NN machine check
Too much data entered
Operator not authorized
Not enough data entered
Wrong number
Numeric shift
Operator retry
Device not functional
Device busy doing local copy
lFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Table
Location
Byte 12
2-17 (Page 2 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
6
7
X.21/X.25 operator communication
System lock (X-System)
o
7
Communication check reminder
My job indicator
System operator indicator
Unowned indicator
Not enabled (not online)
Reserved for engineering u.se
Reserved for engineering use
Minus symbol indicator (WT)
4
PU not active
1
2
3
4
5
6
Byte 13
Bytes
16-17
Cursor position (CUT display only)2
Bytes
1A-1B
First character on display2
Bytes
1C-1D
Last character on display 2
Byte 24
7
Model 5 wide screen
Model 5 wide screen
Reserved
Reserved for engineering use
Inhibit display video
Blank cursor
Cursor reverse
Cursor blink
3
4
APL mode
APL attached
4
5
6
Byte 26
Row length
Byte 27
Indicator row length
(if printer then PCIA length)
Byte 29
AID Code
Byte 33
Printer buffer size
08 = 2K
10 = 4K
20 = 8K
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 37
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
2
Local copy (printer available for
next message) SNA
Byte3C
Reserved
Byte 3D
Reserved
Byte3E
4NN (Program check number)
Byte 3F
5NN (Communication check
number)
Byte4A
o
1
2
4
5
6
7
Byte 4B
o
1
Byte 36
Location
2-17 (Page 2 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
3
2
3
Byte 25
Table
o
1
Printer allocated to local copy
SNA - local copy printer allocated
to host
SNA - host request for local copy
allocated printer
Alternate row length
Default row length indicator
Reserved for engineering use
~NA - LU in ERP state
SNA - Host communication
disabled (LU active)
Local copy printing (host-initiated)
Local copy printer available (display
only)
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved
Selector pen for immediate defect
field
Request for select pen field
Reserved for engineering use
Reserved for engineering use
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved for engineering use
Disable cursor display
Reserved for engineering use
Second local copy requested
Local copy busy
Reserved for engineering use
Dead key sequence in progress
Local copy received IR
Reserved for engineering use
Byte 4C
o
Device attached to CU VIA AEA
adapter
Byte 52
0-7
Attribute affecting field cursor 3
Byte 53
0-7
Current extended field attribute
Bytes
54-55
Present attribute address 2
Bytes
56-57
Next attribute address 2
Byte 68
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 6A
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Printer equipment check/display
disabled error
Intervention required
Printer busy processor abort
Reserved for engineering use
Print in process
Start printing pending
Printer disabled
Reserved for engineering use
Shift/numeric lock key still
depressed
Alpha key depressed
Alternate shift key depressed
Shift/numeric lock key in effect
Left shift key
Right shift key
Katakana shift key was pressed
APL key select APL mode
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-109
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Table
2-17 (Page 3 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Location
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Byte6B
0
1
Reserved for engineering use
Local copy being printed
2
3
4
5
6-7
Reserved for engineering use
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved for engineering use
Byte 70
Local copy printer ID
Byte 71
Local copy printer address
Bytes
72-73
Printer DCB devices 0 - 15, ones in
this field are authorized to use this
printer
Bytes
74-75
Printer DCB devices 16 - 31 (same
as Bytes 72, 73 description)
Bytes
76-77
Printer class assignments (printer
only) 1 in one or more bits (0-15)
represents printer class
assignments 70-85
Table
Location
Byte BO
Byte AE
WCC save area
0
1
2
3
4-6
7
Byte AF
0-3
4
LU active
Device is bound
Start data traffic (DFT - pending
bind response)
Outbound pacing ind (DFT pending unbind response)
Half-duplex FSM
000 = Send state
001 = Pending send
010 = Pending receive
101 = Contention
111 = Receive
Error pending (response sent)
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
5- 6
Chain receive
7
00 = Receive between chain
01 = Receive in chain
11 = Receive purging chain
Crypto inbound padding indicate
5
6
o=
4
o
End chain receive
Outbound segmenting between
BIU
1 = Outbound segmenting in BIU
5
Byte B5
0-7
LU type bound (01,02,03)
Byte B6
0-7
Printer outbound pacing count
Bytes
DC-DD
Default screen size
Bytes
DE-DF
Alternate screen size
Byte F3
o
LT trace enabled
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This wi" give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
Bracket state mach
0000 = Between brackets
1111 = In brackets
0001 = Pending in brackets
0010 = Pending begin bracket
0011 = Pending between
bracket-EC received
0100 = Pending between
bracket-EC sent
0101 = Pending between
bracket-response received
0110 = Pending between
bracket-response sent
0111 = Pending between
bracket-purge received
1000 = Pending between
bracket-receive
1001 = Pending between
bracket-purge sent
0 = Send between chain
1 = Send in chain
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This wi" give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
2-110
Bit
= Not last buffer in this RU
1 = Last buffer in this RU
First buffer in RU
Byte B1
Byte AO
2-17 (Page 3 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Test 6, Option 3
Figure 2-43 shows the information for X.21 short-hold mode.
__X.21 /X.25 SHM Host Control Data-0
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
2
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
4
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
6
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
8
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
A
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
C
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
E
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
E0
F0
To go directly to other tests t enter: /TesttOption
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF: 3=Quit
12=Test menu
Where:
uuuu
xxxx
=
XID sent by the 3174 (comes from configured data)
= XID received by the 3174 on a reconnection
Figure
2-43. X.21 Short-Hold Mode Host Control Data
The configured XID (the one sent to the host at start time) and the last reconnect XID (the last one sent to
the host during an SHM session) are displayed. If, for example, a normal X.21 host connection should be
established following an SHM connection, the XID displayed by 16,3 would be for the last SHM connection.
Bit 6 (SHSI) in the XID sent indicates short hold mode is active: it is not sent on with the initial XID; it is sent
during a reconnection. This bit is turned on after an SNRM (Set Normal Response Mode) has been
received. Table 2-18 on page 2-112 explains the information contained on the X.21 SHM Host Control Data
panel shown in Figure 2-43.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-111
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Table
Location
2-18. X.21 XID Summary
Bit
Byte 00 1
0-3
4-7
Meaning
Format of XID I-field and PU type of
the sender
Format of XID I-field.
o = fixed format; bytes 00 - 05 used
1 = variable format; bytes 0 - Pare
used
PU type of the sender
1 = PU-T1
2 = PU-T2
3 = Reserved
4 = PU-T4
5 = PU-T5
Length in hexadecimal of the
variable format XID I-field. This
byte is reserved in a fixed format
XID.
Byte 01
Bytes
02-07 2
Table
Location
Meaning
4-5
63
Reserved
Short hold status indicator (SHSI)
7
1=
Byte 10
Byte 12
Byte 08
Link-station and connection protocol
flags
Reserved
Link station role of XID sender
0
1-15
0-3
4-7
Reserved
SCLC command/response profile
0-1
2
Bytes
14-15
Byte 16
o=
3
4-7
Sender is a secondary link
station
1 = Sender is a primary link station
Reserved
Link station transmit/receive
capability
Byte 09
0
Node characteristic of the XID
sender
PU capability to receive FMD
requests
o=
1
2-3
PU cannot receive FMD
requests from the SSCP
1 = PU can receive FMD requests
from SSCP
Reserved
01 =
10
=
11 =
SIM and RIM not supported
1 = SIM and RIM supported
Reserved
Reserved
0
1-7
Reserved
Maximum number of I frames that
can be received by the XID sender
before an ACK is sent
Reserved
Byte18
Length in bytes of the SDLC address
to be assigned. Byte 18 is not used
by the 3174. (Byte 18 = 00).
Byte 19
The length of the dial digits in
hexadecimal of the XID sender.
Byte 20
The starting byte of the XID sender
dial digits.
1Byte 00 = 12 for 3174 variable format XIDs
2Bytes 2-7 = 017nnnnxxxx where: 017 = 3174 block
number nnnnn = Answer to configuration question 215
(PUID), xxxx = Reserved
381t 6 of byte 9 has no meaning if bit 7 of byte 9 is off.
Segment assembly capability of the
nodes PC element
00 =
Reserved
SDLC initialization mode options
Byte 17
o=
two way alternating
1 = two way at the same time
SNA link profile (only value)
o=
3-7
0-1
2
Short-hold mode not
supported
Short-hold mode supported
Maximum I field length the XID
sender receives
Format flag (always 0)
Maximum I (field length)
o=
0-11 The product block number
12-31 The SDLC 10
Reserved
Not already engaged in a
SHM session
1=
Engaged in a SHM session
Short hold indicator (SHI)
0=
Node identification
Bytes
06,07
The mapping field Is ignored
and PUis are forwarded
unchanged
Segments are assembled on
a link station basis
Segments are assembled on
a session basis
Only whole 81Us are allowed
18yte 00 = 12 for 3174 variable format XIDs
28ytes 2-7 = 017nnnnxxxx where: 017 = 3174 block
number nnnnn = Answer to configuration question 215
(PUID), xxxx = Reserved
381t 6 of byte 9 has no meaning If bit 7 of byte 9 is off.
2-112
Bit
0=
Byte 13
Bytes
02-05
2-18. X.21 XID Summary
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/55
Type 3 to select option 3 from the Display Control Blocks Menu. The following panel shows the information
for X.25.
_ _X.21/X.25 Host Control Data_ _
2
4
6
8
A
CE
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; iii i
;;;i ;i;; i;;; ;; ;; i;ii i;ii ;;ii i;ii
; ; i ; i i ; i xaxb xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx x xxxx
xxxx xxx x xxxx rrrr xxxx xxxx rrrr rrrr
zzzz zzzz zzzz zzzz rrrr zzzz zzzz zzzz
rrrr
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
gO
AO
BO
CO
DO
EO
FO
To go directly to other tests. enter: /Test.Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF: 3=Quit
12=Test menu
Where:
iiii
xxxx
xaxb
zzzz
rrrr
Figure
= Reserved for engineering use
= 2-byte link counter
= 2-byte link counter used in the example below
= 2-byte ci rcuit counter
= Reserved
2-44. X.25 Host Control Data
Use the following example to determine how to locate a particular byte and the information following the
example for descriptions of the link and circuit counters. The bytes are described in Table 2-18 on
page 2-112, "Link Counters" on page 2-114, and "Circuit Counters" on page 2-114.
Example
To locate bytes 24 and 25:
1. Use the high-order digit 2. Scan down the column of numbers in the
left margin of the panel. Find address 20.
2. Use the low-order digit 4. Scan left to right in the row of data
next to address 20. Find the data under column number 4.
Byte 24 contai ns xa; byte 25 contai ns xb.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-113
unllne I ests configuration AS/55
Link Counters
Bytes 24, 25 =
The number of Information (I) frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 26,27 =
The number of Information (I) frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 28,29
=
The number of Receiver Ready (RR) frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 2A, 2B =
The number of Receiver Ready (RR) frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 2C, 2D =
The number of Receiver Not Ready (RNR) frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 2E, 2F =
The number of Receiver Not Ready (RNR) frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 30, 31
=
The number of Reject frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 32,33 =
The number of Reject frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 34,35 =
The number of I-frames that were retransmitted by the 3174.
Bytes 36, 37
=
The number of I-frames that were received by the 3174 with Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) errors.
Bytes 38,39
=
The number of receive errors detected by the 3174.
Bytes 3A, 3B
=
The number of cycle steal underruns detected by the3174. This is an internal-exception
condition and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 3C, 3D
=
The number of receive buffer overruns detected by the3174. This is an
internal-exception condition and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 3E, 3F
=
The number of receive control block overruns detected by the 3174. This is an
internal-exception condition and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 40,41
=
=
The number of aborts detected by the 3174.
Bytes 42,43
The number of CS overruns detected by the 3174. This is an internal-exception condition
and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 44, 45 =
A valid frame has not been received within the time limit specified during configuration.
Bytes 48,49 =
The number of call attempts counted by the 3174.
Circuit Counters
Bytes 50,51
Bytes 52, 53
=
=
Bytes 54,55 =
The number of Data packets sent by the 3174.
The number of Data packets received by the 3174.
The number of Receiver Ready packets sent by the 3174.
=
The number of Receiver Ready packets received by the 3174.
Bytes 5A, 5B =
The number of Receiver Not Ready packets sent by the 3174.
Bytes 56,57
Bytes 5C, 50
=
Bytes 5E, 5F =
2-114
The number of Interrupt packets sent by the 3174.
The number of Interrupt packets received by the 3174.
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Test 7: Color Convergence
Test 7 performs color convergence on 3279 color display stations. For a description of this procedure, see
the appropriate display station problem determination manual.
Note: No PF keys are provided for this test to return to the Test Menu. To bring up the Test Menu after
performing the test, press the CLEAR key.
Test 8: Extended Functions and Programmed Symbols
Test 8 checks the programmed symbols (PS) and color for any device that uses PS or color. For a
description of this procedure, see the appropriate display station problem determination manual.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-115
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 10: Port Wrap Tests
Test 10 runs a wrap test on ports on the terminal adapter, the TMA card, the 3299 Models 2 and 3, and the
7232 dual control unit terminal multiplexer. Test 10 will not run on a 3299 Model 1. If a terminal is in use
on one of the ports selected for a wrap test, this test will not interrupt the operation of that terminal. The
wrap test will not be performed, and the test will indicate that the selected port is in use. This test cannot
be run on the requesting terminal. The results of the port wrap test will be indicated by a text message on
line 23. The menu displayed is shown in Figure 2-45. Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or
similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in 110
3. Press ENTER.
_ _ Port Wrap Test _ _
Option
Description
l,n
2,n
Direct wrap for terminal adapter port n
3299/terminal multiplexer wrap for port n (n=0-3l)
To insure a valid wrap the cable must be
disconnected from the wrapped port.
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Option; press ENTER ====>
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
l2=Test menu
2-45. Port Wrap - Test 10
When using Test 10, disconnect the signal cable from the port that is being wrapped. Reflections from the
signal cable can cause the test to fail, giving a false error indication. If failures occur, see the 3174
Subsystem Control Unit Status Codes, GA27-3832, for recovery action.
Option 1 (Direct Wrap)
•
•
•
For Models 1L through 13R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0, 8, 16, and 24.
For Models 51 R through 63R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 through 8.
For Models 81 R through 92R, the valid port number is O.
Option 2 (Multiplexer Wrap)
•
•
•
For Models 1L through 13R, valid port numbers are 0 through 31.
For Models 51 R through 63R, valid port numbers are 0 through 15.
For Models 81 R through 92R, valid port numbers are 0 through 7.
2-116
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test 11: Trace Control
This test is to be used by service representatives. The service representative must obtain a password from
an IBM support facility to perform this test.
Trace Control Is an internal subsystem facility that Is used to record specific subsystem processing
Information. The Information that Is traced Is saved In machine storage and can be written to the Control
diskette as required. Two types of Information can be recorded by the trace facility:
• Data between processes
• Internal data flow.
Environment control block (ECB) traces record Information between processes. When ECBs are traced, the
appropriate ECB numbers are entered as part of the trace test request.
Function traces record Information within a process. For example, internal data flow for the file adapter Is
recorded.
The trace facility is performed in two environments:
• Background
• Foreground.
Background trace is integrated into the controller microcode and is started as a part of the controller
normal IML sequence. Background trace must be stopped before a foreground trace can be started.
Foreground trace is started by selecting a Test 11 option and specifying ECB(s) tracing or Internal Data
Flow traCing. Test 11 provides a means of starting, stopping, or modifying a particular trace. When the
trace facility is started, with a Start Trace command, a foreground trace starts. When the trace facility is
stopped with a Stop Trace command, all traces are stopped. When a foreground trace is no longer
required, the foreground trace must be stopped and the background trace must be restarted, either by use
of the Test 11 trace facility or by a normal IML.
Trace Control Mode
There are four trace control modes. Mode 02 is the default mode if another mode is not selected when
setting up a trace.
Mode 01
Mode 02
Mode 03
Mode 04
Do not write to the diskette or fixed disk and do not wrap the trace data area in controller
storage.
Do not write to the diskette or fixed disk and wrap the trace data area in controller storage.
Write to diskette or fixed disk without suspend.
Write to diskette or fixed disk with suspend.
How to Use the Trace Facility
Before you attempt to start or stop a trace, the following information must be obtained from the 3174
support center:
• Check digit
• Trace mode (optional)
• Setup ECB number(s) or Setup Trace Function number(s).
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-117
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Trace Facility Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
11,1 ,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up ECB(s) Dispatched
11 ,2,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up ECB(s) Returned
11 ,3,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up DC8(s) Ports
11 ,4,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up Trace Functions
11 ,S,Check digit,nn Set Up Trace Mode
11 ,6,Password Start Trace
11,7 ,Password Stop Trace
11,1 Option The specified ECBs are traced when dispatched. Format = 11,1 ,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n
where n,n,n,n ........ n are ECB numbers. The check digit number and the ECB number(s) are
obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,2 Option The specified ECBs are traced when returned.
Format = 11 ,2,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n where n,n,n,n ........ n are ECB numbers. The check digit
number and the ECB number(s) are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,3 Option The specifi ed ports are traced.
Format = 11 ,3,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n where n,n,n,n ........ n are port numbers. The check digit
number and the port number(s) are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,4 Option The specified functions are traced.
Format = 11 ,4,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n where n,n,n,n ........ n are trace function numbers. The
check digit number and the trace function number(s) are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,5 Option The trace runs in the specified mode.
Format = 11 ,S,nn where nn are mode numbers 01 through 04. The check digit number and the
mode number are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,6 Option The trace is started.
Format = 11,6,password
The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,7 Option The trace is stopped.
Format = 11,7,password
The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
How to Start a Foreground Trace
Perform the following procedure at an attached 3278 or similar terminal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press and hold AL T; press TEST to enter test mode.
Type in 11,7,Password (Stop Trace)
Type in 11 ,5,check digit,nn (Set Up Trace Mode) (This step is optional.)
Type in one of the following to set up the desired trace:
11,1,check digit,n,n,n,n ....... ,n
11,2,check digit,n,n,n,n ....... ,n
11 ,3,check digit,n,n,n,n ....... ,n
11,4,check digit,n,n,n,n ....... ,n
5. Type in 11,6,password (Start Trace)
6. Type in 11,7,password (Stop Trace)
Note: The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
2-118
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
How to Start a Background Trace
Perform the following procedure at an attached 3278 or similar terminal.
1. Press and hold ALT; press Test to enter test mode.
2. Type in 11,7,Password
3. Type in 11,6,Password
Note: The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-119
Online Tests Configuration A5/S5
Test A: Operator·Originated Alerts
Network Problem Determination Aid (NPDA) provides support for 20 product-unique panels that can be
defined by the customer in the NPDA data base as part of the host SYSGEN process.
During configuring, one of the following options is selected:
•
•
•
•
No
An
An
An
alert function
alert function without operator-generated alert message capability
alert function with operator-generated alert message capability from all ports
alert function with operator-generated alert message capability from port 0 only.
When properly filled in, the information on such a screen is transmitted as part of an alert Network
Management Vector Transport (NMVT) inbound to the host.
Included in these alert request units (RUs) are the customer-specified user-action code, a 120 (maximum
length) test message, and up to three 8-digit qualifiers.
Once the alert is received by NPDA, the user-action code is mapped into one of the unique customer
screens. The text message and qualifiers allow the operator to pass such things as a 3174 status code, a
port number, and a telephone number, as well as a text message, up to the NPDA operator.
When an authorized display station operator enters TEST mode, types in lA, and presses the ENTER key,
the following panel is displayed:
fA
XX
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn -----------------------------Q1 mmmmmmmm Q2 mmmmmmmm Q3 mmmmmmmm
where,
fA
XX
nnnn...
mmmm...
indicates the alert screen is ready for transmission when the Enter key is pressed.
is a two-character field for the user-action code (01 - 20 decimal required).
is a 120-character field filled with nulls for the text message (optional).
are three 8-character fields filled with nulls for the qualifiers (optional).
When the ENTER key is pressed with the above panel, a check is performed to ensure that the user-action
code (XX) is a number between 01 and 20 (decimal). If the number is between 01 and 20, the number is
translated by the 3174 into the appropriate user-action code and an alert is sent. If an invalid user-action
code is entered, the wrong number indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
After an operator-generated alert is sent, the display screen is cleared to prevent accidental
retransmission of the message. Only one operator-generated alert may be pending with the 3174 at one
time. For example, several authorized display station operators may request an alert screen
simultaneously. Once an operator fills the screen with the required user-action codes (and any optional
text and qualifiers) and presses the ENTER key, that entry is queued for transmission, provided no
operator-generated alert is already pending. If a second authorized operator attemptsto enter an alert
before the first operator-generated alert is transmitted to the host, the second operator's entry is inhibited,
the screen is not cleared, and the minus function indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
The second operator must press the RESET key and try again. If the first operator's screen has been
transmitted and no other operator has entered an alert, the second operator's entry is honored.
2-120
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration AS/SS
Regardless of the upstream response, the screen is cleared. If a link-level error occurs, the hardware will
attempt retransmission of the alert. If the data has been lost because of an error above the link level
(DACTPU), the information may be lost without any error indication to the operator.
If an attempt is made to request an operator-generated alert screen from an unauthorized display station,
the operator unauthorized indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
If other than the basic characters have been entered from the keyboard, the try again (X ? +) indicator is
displayed.
If a communication check is detected, the Input Inhibited and Communication Reminder symbols, followed
by a 5xx number, are displayed.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-121
Online Tests Configuration B
Online Tests Configuration B
Introduction
The online tests are in two sections. One set of Online Tests is for microcode that is Configuration Support
A and S (see page 2-81). The other set is for microcode that is Configuration Support B. If you are not sure
of your 3174 microcode release level, select online test 5, option 1 (/5,1). The release level will be
displayed on the screen.
Configuration B online tests has three modes: 1TEST, 2TEST, and 3TEST. You determine which test mode
you are in by the number preceding the word "TEST" in the operator information area of the screen (1 TEST,
2TEST, or 3TEST) or by selecting the host 10 when selecting a test option. 1TEST is for host IDs 1A through
1H, 2TEST is for host 10 2A, and 3TEST is for host 10 3A.
Not all tests and options are available on 2TEST and 3TEST. If you select a test or option that is not available
the following error messages will be displayed.
4610
4626
4626
4626
This
This
This
This
function
function
function
function
is
is
is
is
not supported for this configuration
valid for 1TEST only
valid for 2TEST only
valid for 3TEST only
Online tests are selectable from any 3278, 3279, or similar display attached to the controller. These tests
are not selectable from distributed function terminals, such as a 3290. This test facility can be used during
normal subsystem operation and is available after entering\test mode. Test mode is entered by pressing
the ALT and TEST keys simultaneously on an attached display station keyboard. The following tests can be
selected by entering one of the test formats shown below or from the 3174 Test Menu shown in Figure 2-46
on page 2-125.
Test 0 (Terminal Check): Provides a facility to test a terminal's base and feature hardware. Test 0 also
identifies the hardware group and port number of the terminal requesting the test. For detailed information
about Test 0 see page 2-127.
10
Test 0 runs on the terminal being used to run tests.
Test 1 (Display Event Logs and Response Time Log): Event records for displays, printers, adapters, and
processor logic are displayed. Also provides a response time monitor log. For detaired information about
Test 1, see page 2-128. The following types of error logs can be displayed:
11,1
11,1,n
11,2
11,3,n
11,4,n
11,4,n,m
11,5,xxxx
11,6,n
11,6,n,m
11,7
11,8
11,9,n
2-122
Response time log for requestors active host 10
Response time log for host 10 n (n=1A-1H, 2A, 3A)
All event log: Error statistics for the 3174
Hardware group: Error statistics for a specific hardware group
Error statistics for a specific terminal port
Error statistics for a specific terminal port of a specific hardware group
Status code: Error statistics for a specific status code
Logical terminal: Error statistics for a specific logical terminal
Logical terminal n host 10 m (n=0-254, m=1A-1H, 2A, 3A)
Change log mode (Normal/Intensive)
Event log summary
Host 10 (n=1A-1H, 2A, 3A)
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 2 Display Configuration Panels: Provides both hardware and microcode configurations on the
controller For detailed information about Test 2, see page 2-134.
12,1
12,2
12,3
12,4
Hardware configuration: The hardware configuration is displayed.
Configuration questions: The panels presented during configure (except panel 118) are
displayed.
Device definition: Printer Authorization Matrix andlor Logical Terminal Assignment
panels.
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter configuration: The Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
configuration is displayed.
Test 3 (3270 Device Status Summary): The status of all terminal adapter (HG 26) attached devices is
displayed. For detailed information about Test 3, see "Test 3 Configuration B: 3270 Device Status
Information" on page 2-136.
13,1
13,2,n
13,3,n
13,4,n
Status Summary is displayed.
Error counters for port n (n = 0-31) are displayed.
Connectivity for port n (n = 0-31) is displayed
LU Status Summary for host IDn (n = 1A-1 H, 2A, and 3A) is displayed.
Test 4 (Reset Logs and Cable Errors): Resets the event log, traces, cable errors, and the response time
monitor log. For detailed information about Test 4, see page 2-142.
14,1,n
14,2
14,3
Resets the response time logs for host ID n
Resets the event log, traces, and cable errors
Resets the cable errors.
Test 5 (Display Vital Data): Provides the following 3174 information:
Model Number
Microcode functional release level
Installed microcode patches
DSL information.
Controller ID (serial number)
Microcode maintenance release
Installed RPQs
For detailed information about Test 5, see page 2-143.
15,1
15,2,n,m
Display Controller Vital Data
Display Port Vital Data
Test 6 (Display Control Blocks): The port control areas and host control data are displayed. Can also
display all logical terminal extensions (if any). For detailed information about Test 6, see page 2-146.
16,1,n
16,2
16,2,n,m
16,3
16,4,n,m
Register page
The port control area information for the requestor's port is displayed.
The port control area information for a specific port and hardware group is displayed.
X.25/X.21 SHM Host Control Data
LT n Control Area on Host ID m (n=0-254, m=1A-1H, 2A, 3A)
Test 7 (Color Convergence): For more information, see page 2-158.
Test 8 (Extended Functions and Programmed Symbols): For more information see page 2-158.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-123
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 10 (Port Wrap Tests): Provides a port wrap test for terminal adapter ports (00, 08, 16,24), TMA ports
00-31, and 3299 Model 2 and 3 ports 00-31. For detailed information about Test 10, see "Test 10
Configuration B: Port Wrap Tests" on page 2-159.
110,1,n
110,2,n
Direct wrap for a specific terminal adapter port
3299/TMA port wrap
Te.t 11 (Trace Control): Provides an Internal trace capability. This function Is available only to service
personnel. See "Test 11 Configuration B: Trace Control" on page 2·160.
Te.t A (Alert.): Provides a facility for operator-generated alerts on SNA controllers.
IA,n
Alerts to host n (n= 1A-1H, 2A, 3A)
For detailed Information about Test A, see page 2-163.
2-124
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
3174 Test Menu Configuration B
To display the 3174 Test Menu, shown in Figure 2-46, perform the following steps at any 3278 or similar
display.
1. Press and hold ALT. Press TEST.
2. Press PF12, or CLEAR, or PA2.
3174 Test Menu
Test
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A,n
D,n
Select test;
Description
Terminal check
Display event logs and response time log
Display configuration panels
3270 device status information
Reset logs and cable errors
Display vital data
Display Control Areas
Color convergence
Extended functions and program symbols
Token-Ring tests
Port wrap tests
Trace control
Asynchronous emulation adapter tests
Alerts to host n (n=lA-IH, 2A, 3A)
Dump device on port n (n=0-31)
press ENTER ===>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
2-46. 3174 Test Menu
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-125
Online Tests Configuration B
Online Test Format
The general format for all online tests is It,s,n,m, where:
= test number
s
= option number for tests that have menus, such as test 1
n,m = value(s) required by some test menus.
For example:
A test entry of 11,2 will display all log records.
A test entry of 11,3,1 will display the log records for HG01.
These tests can also be selected by entering the following:
Example 1
1.
From any select line, enter 11
The Logs Menu is displayed.
2.
From the select line of the Event Log Menu, enter 2
All log records are displayed.
Example 2
1.
From any select line, enter 11
The Logs Menu is displayed.
2.
From the select line of the Event Log Menu, enter 3,1
The log records for HG01 are displayed.
2-126
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 0 Configuration B: Terminal Check
This test may be run from ITEST, 2TEST, and 3TEST and it provides a facility to test the requesting terminal's
basic functions (such as highlighting, nondisplay, and insertion), as well as feature functions (such as light
pens, magnetic card readers, and scanners).
To request Test 0, perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in the following:
• 10 or 1
• Press ENTER.
The test pattern shown in Figure 2-47 is displayed.
__Terminal Check__
3174 Controller
Hardware Group
Port Number
nn
mm
?SEL PEN
&SEL PEN
NON DISPLAY
SEL PEN
>SEL PEN
INSERT CK
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select test; press ENTER ====>
PF:
3=Qui t
/Test,Option
12=Test menu
WHERE:
nn
mm
NON
Figure
The adapter HG number of the terminal that requested the test.
= The port number of the terminal that requested the test.
= The nondisplay field that should not appear on the screen.
2-47. Test 0 Display Pattern
The following terminal functions are tested:
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-intensity function
Nondisplay function
Selector pen (if one is attached)
Various key functions and modes
Four-color function and base-color switch capability on a 3279 or similar color display station
Audible alarm (if one is attached).
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-127
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 1 Configuration B: Display Logs Menu
Test 1 provides a response time log and event statistics for terminals, hardware groups, and ports. To
select a specific event log from the Logs Menu, shown in Figure 2-48, perform the following procedure at
any 3278 or similar display station:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
Type in 11
Press ENTER; the Logs Menu is displayed.
To display a specific event log, type in the option number of the desired log and press ENTER.
_ _ Logs Menu _ _
Description
Option
l,n
2
3,n
4,n,m
5,xxxx
6,n,m
7
8
9,n
(Current log mode:
Normal
Response time log for host ID n (n=IA-IH, 2A, 3A)
All events logged
Hardware group (n=0-99)
Port n, hardware group m (n=0-31,m=0-99)
Status code (replace XiS with search digits)
Logical terminal n host id m (n=0-254, m=IA-IH, 2A, 3A)
Change log mode (normal/intensive)
Event log summary (by category and hardware group)
Host 10 (n=IA-IH, 2A, 3A)
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select option; press ENTER ===>
PF:
3=Quit
12=Test menu
Notes:
1. For Models 1R through 13R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 to 31.
2. For Models 51 R through 63R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 to 15.
3. For Models 81 R through 92R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 to 7.
Figure
2-48. Test 1 Menu
Option 1. Type 1,n to select option 1 from the Logs Menu. The resulting panel shows the response time
monitor (RTM) log if the controller is configured for RTM.
Option 2 - 6.These options can only be run from 1TEST. Similar panels are displayed when options 2, 3, 4, 5,
or 6 are selected from the Logs Menu. The difference in the format of the log record panels is the title line.
Each panel contains the menu selection and the specified parameter value. If no event record exists for the
requested event log, a No entri es were found message is displayed. To select a log record from the Logs
Menu, enter one of the following test requests:
2 All events logged. All the errors in the event log are displayed.
3,n (n = a specific hardware group number from 0 to 99) All errors in the event log for the hardware
group selected are displayed.
4,n,m (n = a specific terminal port number from 0 to 31; m = a specific hardware group number from 0
to 99) all errors in the event log for the port number on the specific hardware group selected are
displayed.
2-128
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
5,xxxx (the x's are replaced with a status code). Four characters must be entered. An x can be used as
a "don't care" character. For example: On the select line on the Logs Menu panel, enter 5,x501. The
event log will be searched, and all the 501 status codes that occurred since the last time the logs were
reset will be displayed.
6,n,m (n = a specific logical terminal number from 0 to 254, m = a specific host 10 number from 1A to
1H, 2A, or 3A) all errors In the event log for the logical terminal number on the host 10 that was
selected are displayed.
Note.:
1. 1A to 1H Identifies from one to eight hosts that can be configured for the Token-Ring Adapter on
Models 3R, 13R, S3R, and 63R. This also applies to any model that can be alternately configured to
simulate a Model 3R, 13R, S3R, and 63R. See the 3174 Planning Guide for details.
2. 2A or 3A Identifies a host link through a Concurrent Communication Adapter
Option 7. This test can only be run from 1TEST. Type 7 to change the log mode from Normal to Intenllve
and from Intensive back to Normal. The current log mode is noted on the Test 1 Menu screen. Normal is
the mode regularly used for logging errors. Intensive was created to record those high-frequency loggable
errors that are not recorded in Normal mode. Because of the high frequency of the errors, Intensive mode
should only be used when needed. To guard against continued use, the controller will change the log
mode back to Normal when a 76-hour timer expires.
Option 8. This test can only be run from 1TEST. Type an 8 to display the Event Log Summary. Option 8
provides a single panel of error log summary information available through the 11 test in 3174 online TEST
MODE. All current log records, both internal and on diskette or fixed disk, are divided into the following
event categories. A breakdown by Hardware Group (HG) is under each category. See Figure 2-49.
Option 9. Type 9,n (n = 1A-1 H, 2A, 3A) to display all events logged for a specific Host 10.
_ _ Event Log Summary _ _
Category
Total
Subtotal
by
Machine
Check
Program
Check
Comm
Check
Media
Check
Port
Check
4
2
1
2
6
HG
26 1
00 1
HG
00 1
HG
16 2
HG
02 2
99 3
01 1
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select test: press ENTER ===>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
HG
26 4
Other
12
HG
02 2
26 10
/Test,Option
12=Test menu
2-49. Event Log Summary (Example)
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-129
Online Tests Configuration B
Log Records Example
Figure 2-50 illustrates the panel displayed if you select option 4 with a specific port number and hardware
group.
_ _ Log Records - All _ _
(Day/Time since last POR: 000/08:11)
Day Time SC
QA PHG_PN CHG_PN
000
000
000
000
000
015
015
015
015
015
015
015
08: 11
00:05
00:03
00:02
00:02
21:48
21:22
21:20
21:19
21:07
20:01
19:14
0331
0384
0500
0532
3174
0402
0401
0209
0201
3174
0311
0807
ID
lA
18
lC
51 11
05 99
01 16
10
11
01
02
03
51
51
01
01
20
00
16
16
26_08
26_08
00
87
22_04
26_02
26_02
16
16
2A
3A
2A
2A
26_00
10
HA Extended data bytes (81-816)
81 83 85 87 89 811 813 815
9025 1100 01
0387 0385
002 0000 0003F350 0000
006 0001 0004 3c40 4000
008
008
9051 0500
0000 0000 0000 0000 02
PHG_PN=Primary HG_PN HG=Hardware Group SC=Status Code 1D=Host 1D
CHG_PN=Connection HG_PN PN=Port Number QA=Qualifier HA=Host Address
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER====>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
8=Fwd
12=Test Menu
2-50. Log Record Display Panel
Day/Time
The Day/Time value indicates the setting of the 3174 interval timer when the request to display the log is
entered. Since the interval timer is reset to zeros when the controller is powered off and on, it also
indicates the elapsed time since the power-on occurred. This timer can be set to the actual time of day
using an offline test. The day value range is 000 to 255 and is increased by 1 every 24 hours. The time field
is specified as 00 hours through 23 and 00 minutes through 59.
The Day/Time represents the day and time with respect to power-on when the log event occurred.
SC Field
SC = The base status code that was logged. See the 3174 Status Codes, GA27-3832, for the recovery
action.
QA Field
QA
= The qualifier associated with the base status code.
PHG and CHG Fields
PHG (Primary Hardware Group) and CHG (Connection Hardware Group) = The hardware group associated
with the error that occurred. The PHG field contains 00 or 99 if the error is not associated with a particular
hardware group, or if the hardware group cannot be identified. The values 00 and 99 are not displayed in
the CHG field. An example of this would be a 3278 terminal attached to a TMA in a 3174 Model 1L. The
2-130
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
unllne I eSlS
\"onllgun::lllull
g
PHG would be HG26 and the CHG would be HG16. The hardware groups for all models of the 3174 are
shown in Table 2-19.
Table
2-19. Hardware Group Numbers
HG
Unit
HG
Unit
00
01
02
03
04
08
09
11
16
16
21
22
Invalid or unknown
Diskette Drive 1/File Adapter
Diskette Drive 2/File Adapter
Fixed Disk 1/File Adapter
Fixed Disk 2/File Adapter
Timer
Operator Panel
Communication Adapter
Channel Adapter
Channel Driver/Receiver
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
23
26
26
31
46
51
52
80
81
82
87
99
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
Terminal Adapter
Terminal Multiplexer Adapters
Token-Ring Adapter
Encrypt/Decrypt Adapter
Concurrent Communication Adapter
Concurrent Communication Adapter
Test Monitor
Test All CSU Mode
Test All Installed Mode
Processor/Storage
Unassigned Hardware Group
PN Field
PN = The port number (PN) is used in conjunction with the PHG and CHG fields in the Log Records menu.
This field is not displayed at the operator panel.
The Hardware Group 26 port numbers for the 3174 Models 1L through 13R range from 0 to 31. The
Hardware Group 26 port numbers for 3174 Models 51 R through 63R range from 0 to 15. The Hardware
Group 26 port numbers for 3174 Models 81R through 92R range from 0 to 7.
10 Field
10
= The host address that was active when the status code was logged.
HA Field
HA = The Host Address, if the error is related to attached terminals. The HA field is not displayed at the
operator panel. Certain terminals may use multiple logical terminals, such as a 3290.
Extended Data Fields (B1-B16)
The extended data fields contain supplementary information that may be useful to resolve a problem, such
as TYPE and LOCA of the failing FRU, or the failing bytes in a data stream error. To determine the
definition of the extended data (81 - 816), see the 3174 Status Codes, GA27-3832. The extended data field
in the status code chart correlates to this field. See the following example on how to correlate a log entry
to the 3174 Status Codes:
Log Entry
= 05040511 00925322
0504 = Status code
0511 = Qualifier and hardware group
00 = PN (none associated with this log entry)
9253 = FRU Type number
22 = Location of the FRU
To find this status code in the status code chart, look for status code
0504 with a QA field of 05.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-131
unllne
I
eSIS \,;ont.guratlon B
Status Code Entry
= 0504 05HG 8182 8384
0504 = Status code
05HG = Qualifier and hardware group
8182 = FRU Type Number
83B4 = Location of the FRU
Note that the PN field is not shown in the status code chart.
Test 1, Option 1
If the 3174 has been configured for local display of the RTM log or the host has enabled this function, the
11,1 Test allows an operator to show the RTM log on authorized displays (except terminals such as the
3290).
Type 1,n (n = 1A-1 H, 2A, 3A) to seleCt the Response Time Monitor (RTM) from the Logs Menu. An example
of the Response Time Monitor log is shown in Figure 2-51.
_ _ Response Time Log - Host ID xx
LT
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
DEFINITION
i b d3
b d3
3
P
v b d1
i d d2
v
3
v b d3
i b ?3
p
i
_
v
printer
b = BDYs set by host
Intelligent device d = DEF set by host
Never powered on
? = disabled by host
Video display
=
=
=
=
CTR#l
BDY#l
00000 11:01.0
00000
0.5
00000
1.0
00000
1.0
00000
1.0
00000
0.5
00000
1.0
00000
1.0
CTR#2
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
BDY#2
10:12.0
2.0
2.0
11:01.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
DEFINITION
CTR#3
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
-
BDY#3
11:15.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
11 :01.0
5.0
5.0
CTR#4
BDY#4
00000 11:10.0
00000
10.0
00000
10.0
00000
10.0
10.0
00000
00000
10.0
10.0
00000
00000 11:01.0
1 = Time to
2 = Time to
3 = Time to
4 = Time to
OVER
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
First Character
Keyboard Unlocked
CD/EB
last character
To go directly to other tests, enter: ITest, Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
7=Back
8=Fwd
12=Test menu
2-51. RTM Log Configuration Support 8
The example shows representative information for the first eight logical terminals. If the 3174 is not
customized for RTM, the display station keyboard is inhibited. Each time the PF8 key is pressed, the next
group of eight terminals is displayed.
CTR#1
CTR#2
CTR#3
CTR#4
BDY#1
BDY#2
8DY#3
BDY#4
OV
= 0 up to BDY#1 value
Second-counter response time greater than B,DY#1 up to 8DY#2 value
Third-counter respon~e time greater than BDY#2 up to BDY#3 value
Fourth-counter response time greater than 8DY#3 up to BDY#4 value
First boundary in minutes and seconds
Second boundary in minutes and seconds
Third boundary in minutes and seconds
= Fourth boundary in minutes and seconds
= Overflow (response time exceeding last boundary).
= First-counter response time
=
=
=
=
=
=
Note: The displayed boundaries are rounded to the nearest tenth of a second.
2-132
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration
t:I
Reset the Response Time Monitor
The operator at an authorized display can reset the RTM logs of all configured devices. All log information
is reset except the customized boundaries, the customized RTM definitions, and pending transaction status.
In test mode, entering 14,1 resets the RTM log. When the reset is completed, a completion message
appears on line 23.
If the 3174 is not customized for RTM, when 14,1 is entered, a message appears stating the function is not
supported for this configuration. See "Test 4 Configuration B: Reset Logs and Cable Errors" on
page 2-142.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-133
vnllne I eS1S ~onTiguratlon
B
Test 2 Configuration B: Configuration Menu
This test can only be run from 1TEST. Test 2 provides information about hardware configuration,
configuration questions, the printer authorization matrix, and the Asynchronous Emulation adapter
configuration. When Test 2 is selected, the menu shown in Figure 2-52is displayed. Perform the following
procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press and hold AL T; press TEST.
Type in 12
Press ENTER; the Configuration Menu is displayed.
Type in the option number.
Press ENTER.
_ _ Configuration Menu _ _
Option
Description
Hardware configuration
Configuration questions
Device Definition
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter configuration
1
2
3
4
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select Option, press ENTER ====>
/Test,Option
PF:
12=Test menu
Figure
3=Quit
2-52. Test 2 Menu
Option 1. The panel shows the hardware configuration. See Figure 2-53 on page 2-135.
Option 2. The configuration panels displayed during configuration (except panel 118) are displayed.
Option 3. If the 3174 is configured for Printer Authorization Matrix and Logical Terminal Assignment, the
PAM panel is displayed first and then the LTA panel is displayed. If the 3174 is configured for just PAM or
LTA only that panel(s) is displayed.
Option 4. The asynchronous emulation adapter configuration panels are displayed.
For more information about Options 2, 3, and 4, see the 3174 Utilities Guide, GA23-0214.
2-134
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 2, Option 1
The following panel is displayed.
_ _ Hardware Configuration Table _ _
HG
00
01
01
08
09
TYPE
9001
9113
9160
9160
9160
LC
00
01
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Invalid CardjCond
Diskette 1 - 1.2MB
File Adpt
Timer
Ops Panel Adpt
SC
32XX
HG
09
11
87
87
TYPE
9523
9160
9160
9160
LC
07
03
03
03
DESCRIPTION
Ops Panel Assembly
Type 1 Com Adpt-XXX
Processor
Storage 2MB
SC
Select Test; press Enter ====>
PF: 3=Quit
12=Test Menu
Where:
Hardware group
FRU Type number
FRU location
Status code This field contains a 32XX number only if a problem has occurred with a FRU
during an IML.
HG
TYPE
LC
SC
Note: This table shows the configuration for Model 81 R. Only those FRUs that are physically installed are
displayed in this table.
For the communication adapters, the XXX
WRP
V.35
EIA
NC
X.21
WRP
INV
Figure
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
= one of the following:
EIA/V.35 wrap plug is connected
V.35 cable is connected
EIA cable is connected
Nothing is connected
X.21 cable is connected
X.21 wrap plug is connected
An undefined cable or wrap plug is connected.
2-53. Hardware Configuration Table
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-135
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 3 Configuration B: 3270 Device Status Information
Test 3 provides the status of all configured devices. The 3270 Device Status Menu panel shown in
Figure 2-54 is displayed. The Control diskette must be installed and a normal IML has to be completed
before this test can be selected. Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Key In 13
3. Press ENTER.
3270 Device Status Menu
Option
1
2,n
3,n
4,n
Description
Display
Display
Display
Display
status summary
error counters for port n (n=0-31)
connectivity for port n (n=0-31)
LU status summary for host IO n (n=lA- 1H, 2A, 3A)
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select option; press ENTER ===>_
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
2-136
12=Test menu
2-54. 3270 Device Status Menu
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 3, Option 1
This test is only available from 1TEST. The following panel is displayed.
_ _Status Summary - HG 26_ _
Port
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Address
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
Attach mmmmmmmmd
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
Status 1 1 1 100 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - 1 0 1 1 1 0 100 1 001
Terminal e c v v ? v v v p
e ppvve vvvv
vvv
Cable
I
I
. . *
Cab 1e Max. .
* .
I .. : * .
d = direct
m = multiplexor
x = unconfigured
1 = on
o = off
c
p
v
= off(error)
= combined
= printer
i = OFT device
e = Reserved
? = unknown
= video display
= 0 errors
= 1-5 errors
= 6-15 errors
* = > 15 errors
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF:
Figure
3=Quit
12=Test menu
2-55. Status Summary
Port Address: indicates the terminal port number.
For Models 1L through 13R, ports 00-31 are displayed.
For Models 51R through 62R, ports 00 -15 are displayed.
For Models 81 R through 92R, ports 00 - 07 are displayed.
Attach:
d
m
M
x
?
The terminal is attached directly to the terminal adapter.
The terminal is attached through a 3299 Terminal Multiplexer.
A terminal that is attached to this controller through a dual control unit multiplexer.
A terminal that is configured only for another controller through a dual control unit
multiplexer. That terminal will not communicate with this 3174.
When displayed on this line under port 00, a question mark (?) means one of the
following:
• The controller has not communicated with a directly attached terminal.
• The controller has not communicated with any of the terminals connected to a 3299.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-137
Online Tests Configuration B
Status: Indicates one of the following conditions on the configured terminals at the time the test request
was entered:
The attached terminal is communicating with the 3174.
The attached terminal is powered off or disconnected.
The terminal had been communicating with the 3174, but the terminal is now disabled
from the controller because of errors. Run Test 1, Option 4 (Event Log) and check for any
2XX status codes logged against the port number that was disabled.
The terminal is presently communicating with another controller through a dual control
unit multiplexer, in other words, it is in the switched state.
1
(=)
s
Terminal: Indicates the type of device connected.
?
V,
p, or
The device attached to this port has not been communicating with the 3174. The
terminal on this port may not have been powered on.
To reset this condition at the terminal: set the Normal/Test switch to Test and back
again, or perform a power-on reset.
The display or video (v), printer (p), or OFT device (i) for this port has a known history
of communicating with the 3174.
Note: If a terminal or multiplexer cable is disconnected and then reconnected, a terminal power-on reset
is required to allow the 3174 to recognize the change. The terminal counter is reset by an IML, by a
power-on reset on the attached terminal, or by online test 4.
Cable: Terminal errors that are caused by cable media-related problems are counted by the cable counter
for each port address. The cable counters accumulate the number of cable transmission errors occurring
in the most recent 30-minute time period. Every 30 minutes the cable counters are reset to 0 and error
counting starts again. When any cable counter passes the threshold of 16 errors, status code 201 51 is
recorded in the event log. The event log can be viewed to determine the number of cable errors that have
occurred over an extended period of time. This log is displayed by using online test 11. The cable counters
are also reset by an IML and online test 14 options 2 and 3. Individual cable counters are reset when the
attached terminal is powered on.
Cable Max: The Cable Max counters retain the peak value attained by the Cable Threshold counters over
an extended period. They are not reset every 30 minutes, but only are reset by IML and online test 14
options 2 and 3.
2-138
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 3, Option 2
This option can only be run from 1TEST. The 3270 Device Status Menu is displayed. The following panel is
an example of the error counters for the port specified by the parameters.
__ Error Counters for PN 02. HG 26__
Adapter (HG) status:
Port (PN) status:
Error counters-
Disabled
Powered off due to error
Poll time out:
Read time out:
Poll parity:
Read parity:
Cable
Cable Max
10
10
10
10
40
75
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>_
PF:
Figure
3=Quit
12=Test menu
2-56. Error Counters Example: Disabled Adapter and Disabled Port
Test 3, Option 3
This option can only be run from 1TEST. The following panels are examples of connectivity. The status of
the device determines which panel is displayed.
_ _Connect i vity for PN 11, HG 26_ _
Adapter (HG) status:
Port (PN) status:
Device Type
Enabled
Powered on
Video display (MLT)
Current connectivityLT
Bound
Host
Addr
IOn
HG_PN
Host/Station Name
(No host connectivity configured)
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>_
PF:
Figure
3=Quit
12=Test menu
2-57. Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Host Unconfigured
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-139
Online Tests Configuration B
_ _Connectivity for PN 11, HG 26- Adapter (HG) status:
Port (PN) status:
Device Type
Enabled
Powered on
Video display (MLT)
Current connectivityHost
LT Bound Addr
1
2
Active 3
4
5
HG_PN
IOn
Host/Station Name
Yes
n/a
n/a
111
n/a
n/a
1A1
11
21_02
22_07
No
100
2A2
51
RALVM11
Dow Jones
The Source
not connected
RALVM29
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===>_
PF:
3=Quit
12=Test menu
Figure 2-58. Connectivity Example: Enabled Adapter and Live MLT Display
Test 3, Option 4
The following panel is an example of the LU Status Summary. The test you entered from (lTEST= 1A-1H,
2TEST = 2A, 3TEST = 3A) will be reflected by the ID at the top of the panel.
_ _ 10 2A LU Status Summary _ _
Port
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Address
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
Terminal v v v c ? v v c p v v v v v v v v p p v vee v v v v i v v v
+ + +
+
+
+
+
LU
+
p = printer
i = OFT device
v = video display e = Reserved
c = Combined
? = unknown
Connection number:
+
= in session
Outgoing call 999-555-1234
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF:
3=Qu;t
12=Test menu
Figure 2-59. Status Summary
LU: This line is present only for 3174s running SNA. It indicates whether the SNA session is bound and
active. For MLT ports, the + is displayed if any SNA session is active.
2-140
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Connection Number: This number is for X.21 or X.25 lines. One of the following messages can follow the
connection number:
Outgoing Call, followed by the number being called. For X.25, the outgoing call number (or host DTE
address) can be up to 15 digits long. For X.21, the outgoing call number can be up to 32 characters
long, as entered on the dial terminal.
Direct Call (X.21 only).
Incoming Call followed by an optional number. For X.25, the Incoming Call or Host DTE Address can be
up to 15 digits long. For X.21, the Incoming Call will be displayed.
Note: See Figure 2-55 on page 2-137 for an explanation of other fields shown on the panel.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-141
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 4 Configuration B: Reset Logs and Cable Errors
Test 4 resets the response time logs, the event logs, traces, and cable errors. The menu shown in
Figure 2-60 is displayed.
Warning: Do not select the options on this menu unless you want to reset all of your counters back to zero.
Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold AL T; press TEST.
2. Type in 14
3. Press ENTER.
__ Reset Log Menu __
Option
1,n
2
3
Description
Reset response time logs for host 1D n
Reset event log, traces, and cable errors
Reset cable errors
To go directly to other tests, enter:
Select option; press ENTER ====>
/Test,Option
PF: 3=Quit
12=Test menu
Figure 2-60. Test 4 Menu
Option 1,n. Select option 1,n on the Reset Log Menu to reset the response time log for a particular host
(n=1A-1H, 2A, 3A). If you are in IT EST the host IDs will be 1A-1H, 2TEST will be 2A, and 3TEST'wili be 3A.
Option 2. This option is valid only from 1TEST. Select option 2 on the Reset Log Menu to reset the event
logs, traces, and cable errors.
Option 3. This option is valid only from 1TEST. Select option 3 on the Reset Log Menu to reset only the
cable errors.
Notes:
1. Cable errors can be reset on an individual port by performing a power-on reset on the terminal
connected to that port.
2. To reset line errors on ASCII terminals, use Test 12, Option 3 or 4.
2-142
3174 Models
81R
through
92R
Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 5 Configuration B: Display Vital Data
Test 5: Controller information such as model number, serial number, and EC level is displayed. The menu
shown in Figure 2-61 is displayed. Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in 15
3. Press ENTER.
Vita 1 Data Menu
Option
Description
1
Controller Vital Data
Port n vital data on HG m (n=0-31, m=21-23, 26)
2,n,m
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select option; press ENTER ===> _
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Test menu
2-61. Vital Data Menu
Option 1. Controller Vital Data Menu.
See Figure 2-62 on page 2-144.
Option 2. This option is valid only from 1TEST. Port Vital Data panel. See Figure 2-63 on page 2-145.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-143
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 5, Option 1
The following panel is displayed. This panel reflects the Vital Data for the host selected by the 1TEST
(ID= 1A-1H), 2TEST (ID=2A), or 3TEST (ID=3A).
-
Controller Vital Data_
Help ## 914 555 5555 or 914 555 1212 after 5; IBM ## 914 555 1234
Model Number:
Cont ro 11 er ID:
Microcode Release:
Maintenance Release:
IML Drive/Type:
11R
1234567
B1.0
89186
01/41
DSL Information:
3290 01.02 0000000000
3179 01.00 0000000000
9999 01.00 0000000000
9998 01.00 0000000000
Active
RPQs
Patches
123456
112344
112343
112345
002222
112355
112356
012357
112361
112362
112368
112373
012364
112365
002366
112367
112371
012372
112369
112373
112374
112375
002376
112377
8K125
7L123
7L124
8K123
8K123
8K123
8K123
8K124
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===> _
PF: 3=Qu;t
Figure
12=Test menu
2-62. Controller Vital Data
Note: If more than 30 patches are installed on the Control disk, PF8
Help ##
= FWD will be displayed on this panel.
- This number is assigned by the customer in response to question 99 during customizing.
Model Number - The model number of the controller.
Controller ID - This ID is assigned by the customer in response to question 108 during customizing.
Microcode Release - This is the release level of the Control diskette. This is the configuration support
release and suffix level of the Control disk. B is configuration support, 1 is the release level, and 0 is the
suffix.
Maintenance Release - This is the year and Julian date that the microcode was released. 89 is the year,
and 186 is the day in the year.
IML Drive/Type -
This is the drive and the type of IML that was performed.
Drive Type
01 = Diskette drive 1
02 = Diskette drive 2
03 == Fixed disk drive 1
04 = Fixed disk drive 2.
2-144
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
IML Type
41 = Load production (default) operational microcode
42 = Load back level operational microcode
43 = Load trial operational microcode.
Patches - These are the patch ids that can be in effect for the current system configuration. Even though
listed, a patch is only active if the configuration of the system allows the patch to function. A listed patch is
not necessarily functional.
Active RPQs - These are the active RPQ ids that are in effect for the current system. Blank entries
indicate no active RPQs.
DSL Information - This information describes one OFT device on each line. The terminal model type
comes first, followed by the release level and suffix for the OFT microcode. The OFT RPQ is the last field.
The syntax (the parentheses do not appear) is:
(Configuration level)(Release level)(Suffix level)(OFT RPQ)
Test 5, Option 2
The following panel is displayed.
_ _ Port Vital Data-PN 02. HG 26 _ _
Device Type:
Model number:
Plant of manufacture:
Serial number:
Release level:
Engineering change date:
3179
G
*
*
*
*
Device characteristics (hexadecimal):
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10
03 1F 80
* = data not supplied by device
To go directly to other tests. enter: /Test.Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Test menu
2-63. Port Vital Data
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-145
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 6 Configuration B: Display Control Blocks
Test 6 provides the following information. Option 2 Port Control Area contains common subsystem
information pertaining to all terminals and devices, and the Host Control Data (Option 3) contains
information on the host adapter. In addition, limited device feature information is provided. Options 2 and
3 represent the most current information about a specific device, and should be checked when it is
necessary to determine specific device parameters, such as:
• Type and feature information for attached terminals.
• Is the display screen size correctly specified?
• Is a modified data tag (MDT) bit set?
• The type of keyboard for a specific terminal.
Perform the following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold AL T; press TEST.
2. Type in /6
3. Press ENTER.
_ _ Display Control Areas Menu_ _
Option
Description
1,n
Register page n (n=0-3F)
Port control area (Requestor's Port)
Port n control area on HG m (n=0-31 m=21-23,26)
X.21 SHM f X.2S Host Control Data
Port Control Area for Host Address n on Host 1D m
(n=0-2S4 m=lA-IH, 2A, 3A)
2
2,n,m
3
4.n,m
To go directly to other tests, enter: fTest,Option
Select option; press ENTER ===>
PF:
Figure
3=Quit
12=Test menu
2-64. Test 6 Menu
Option 1,n. Register page (n = 0-3F)
Option 2. Select option 2 on the Display Control Blocks Menu to display the port control area for the
requesting terminal.
Option 2,n,m. Select option 2,n,m to display the port control area for the terminal on port n of hardware
group m.
An example of the Port Control Area panel is shown in Figure 2-65 on page 2-147. Multiple panels,
labeled LT Control Area, are then displayed for each session. Multiple Logical Terminals (MLTs) are
distinguished by an LT number at the top of those panels. See Figure 2-66 on page 2-148 for an example
of an LT Control Area panel.
2-146
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Option 3. Select option 3 on the Display Control Blocks Menu to display the host control data on controllers
that are configured for X.21 or X.25. Figure 2-67 on page 2-154 shows the host control data for X.21
short-hold mode. Figure 2-68 on page 2-156 shows the host control data for X.25.
Note: This option only shows the correct XIDs sent and received during an X.21 short-hold mode session.
XIDs exchanged before an SHM session is established are not included in the host control data.
Option 4,n,m. Select option 4,n,m (n=Q-254, m = 1A-1H, 2A, 3A) to display the Logical Terminal Control
Area for a selected host address on a specific host 10.
Notes:
1. 1A to 1H identifies from one to eight hosts that can be configured for the Token-Ring Adapter on Models
3R, 13R, 53R, and 63R. This also applies to any model that can be alternately configured to simulate a
Model 3R, 13R, 53R, and 63R. See the 3174 Planning Guide for details.
2. 2A or 3A identifies a host link through a Concurrent Communication Adapter
An example of the Port Control Area panel is shown in Figure 2-65. Multiple panels, labeled LT Control
Area, are then displayed for each session. Multiple Logical Terminals (MLTs) are distinguished by an LT
number at the top of those panels. See Figure 2-66 on page 2-148 for an example of an LT Control Area
panel.
Test 6, Option 2
The following panel will display information about your terminal.
- - Port Control Area - PN 17, HG 26- Segment 00
0
00 1111
10
0000
20 1234
30 1234
40 1234
50 1111
60 0000
70 1234
80 1234
90 1234
A0 1234
B0 1111
C0 1234
00 1235
E0 1234
F0 1234
2
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1111
1234
4
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
4444
1234
6
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
3333
1234
8
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1111
1234
A
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
2222
1234
C
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
3333
1234
E
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
2222
1234
To go directly to other tests, enter: jTest,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===> PF:
Figure
3=Quit
8=Fwd
12=Test menu
2-65. Port Control Area Panel
Note: To analyze the information contained on this panel, see "Port Control Area Bit Definitions" on
page 2-149.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-147
Online Tests Configuration B
Type 2,n,m to select option 2,n,m. The following panel will display information for the logical terminal
specified by the parameter values.
Segment mm
0
00 1111
10 0000
20 1234
30 1234
40 1234
50 1111
60 0000
7e 1234
80 1234
90 1234
A0 1234
Be 1111
C0 eeee
00 1234
E0 1234
F0 1234
2
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
4
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
LT 2 IOn 1A1 Control Area - PN 17, HG 266
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
8
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1111
1234
1234
1234
1234
A
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
2222
1234
1234
1234
1234
C
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
3333
1234
1234
1234
1234
E
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
4444
1234
1234
1234
1234
To go directly to other tests, enter: fTest,Option
Select test; press ENTER ===> _
PF:
3=Quit
7=Back
8=Fwd
12=Test menu
Where:
n
n
mm
blank, non-MLT device
1-5, logical terminal number of the MLT device for which the data on the panel applies
segment number of the current panel.
Note: To analyze the information contained on this panel,
see "LT Control Area Bit Definitions" on page 2-108.
Figure
2-148
2-66. LT Control Area Panel
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Port Control Area Bit Definitions
Bits defined as "Reserved" may contain zeros or ones. They should be disregarded unless otherwise
directed by the next level of the support structure.
Table
2-20 (Page 1 of 2). Port Control Area Bit
Definitions
Location
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Byte 04
0- 1
2
3
4
5- 6
7
Reserved
Op Complete pending from device
Selector Pen retry processing
Reserved
Reserved
Print ID entry mode
Byte 05
0-6
Reserved
Port timer enabled
7
Byte 06
o
2
3
4
5-6
7
Byte 07 1
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 08
o
1
2
3 -7
Byte 09 1
(Display)
0-3
APL2 Character set supported
Reserved
Any ROS installed
Reserved
APL ROS installed
Number of PS Sets
00 = 0
01 = 2
10 = 4
11 = 6
Color device
Table
2-20 (Page 1 of 2). Port Control Area Bit
Definitions
Location
4-6
7
Byte 09 1
(Printer
1
7
Byte OA 1
(Display)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved
Security key
Selector light pen
Reserved
Magnetic slot reader
Reserved
Extended function buffer
ECS adapter
Byte OB 1
0-2
3
4
5-7
Reserved
Color
Display HAP present
Reserved
= 3278 mode
Native mode
1 = Numeric lock
o = No numeric lock
1 = Keyboard functions have
been redefined
o = No modifiable keyboardKeyboard functions have not
been redefined
Modifications keyboard ID
If Bit 2 = 0
If Bit 2 = 1
00000 Reserved
Reserved
00001 Typewriter
A
00010 Data Entry 1 B
00011 APL
C
0100
Reserved
D
through
11111
0000 - Reserved
0001 - APL keyboard/numeric lock
0010 - Text keyboard/numeric lock
0011 - RPQ typewriter
keyboard/numeric lock
0100 - Typewriter Attribute Select
keyboard/numeric lock
0101 - APL keyboard
0110 - Text keyboard
1Actual features identified to the 3174 by the terminal.
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
0111 - APL Attribute Select keyboard
1000 - Data Entry 2
keyboard/numeric lock
1001 - Data Entry keyboard/numeric
lock
1010 - Typewriter/numeric lock
1011 - Reserved
1100 - Data Entry 2 keyboard
1101 - Data Entry 1 keyboard
1110 - Typewriter
1111 - No keyboard
001 - Model 1
010 - Model 2
011 - Model 3
100 - Escape
101 - Reserved
110 - Model 5
111 - Model 4
0- indicates display byte
ECS feature present
APL feature present
Reserved
Reserved
001 - Model 1
010 - Model 2
011 - Model 3
100 - Reserved
101 - Reserved
110 - Model 5
111 - Model 4
1 - Indicates printer byte
Printer
CUT display
DFT device
MLT device
Reserved
Reserved
Display HAP
Reserved
o=
Bit
0
1
2
3
4-6
Byte OF
Port Number
00-1F = TA ports 0-31
20-27 = AEA 1 ports 0-7
28-2F = AEA 2 ports 0-7
30-37 = AEA 3 ports 0-7
Bytes
18-1B
Device Type in EBCDIC (FOFOFOFO if
not known)
Byte1C
Additional Information
(00 If not known)
= E = Programmable device
0-3
1Actual features identified to the 3174 by the terminal.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-149
Online Tests Configuration B
Table
Location
2-20 (Page 2 of 2). Port Control Area Bit
Definitions
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
= 1 = Hardware or Microcode
product
4-7
= 1 = IBM Product
= 9 = Non-IBM Product
Bytes
1D-1F
Model in EBCDIC
(OOOOOOif not known)
Bytes
20-21
Plant of Manufacture in EBCDIC
(0000 if not known)
Bytes
22-28
Serial number in EBCDIC
(00000000000000 if not known)
Bytes
29-2B
Release level in EBCDIC
(0000000 if not known)
Bytes
2C-3B
Addition level information
(00 ...... 00 if not known)
Byte3C
2NN
Byte 3D
3NN
Byte 3E
4NN (Program Check Number)
Byte 3F
0-2
3
4-7
3NN
Reserved
Device powered on
Reserved
Byte 50
0
1
2-6
7
Reserved
VPD support
Reserved
o = Converged keyboard present
1 = Enhanced keyboard present
Byte5D
0-3
4
5
6
7
Reserved
Monocase switch active in device
Clicker enabled
CECP Enabled
Device CECP capable
Byte 75
1
Multiple display sessions on display
Byte 77
5
Shared Mode Printer
Local Mode Printer
System Mode Printer
6
7
Byte C8
0
1
2
3-4
5
ASCII connection for ASCII terminal
or ASCII printer available
ASCII host connection valid on this
port
AEA port configured as switched
Reserved
AEA line trace running
lActual features identified to the 3174 by the terminal.
2-150
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
LT Control Area Bit Definitions
Bits defined as "Reserved" may contain zeros or ones. They should be disregarded unless otherwise
directed by the next level of the support structure. Bytes 04 and 06 indicate functions supported by the
controller and reported as available by the device.
Table
2-21 (Page 1 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Location
Bit
Meaning H Bit Is Turned On
Byte 04
0-2
Value Model Buffer Size
Reserved
000
001
1
960 (480)
010
2
1920(1920).
011
3
2560 (1920)
100
Reserved
101
Reserved
110
5
3564 (1920)
111
4
3440 (1920)
0= Display 1 = Non-Display
11 Printer
01 Data Entry Display
10 None ofthe others
00 Typewriter Display
0= Escape 1 = Printer
SOEMI printer present
BREG printer present
3
3-4
4
5
5-7
Byte 05
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 06
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0-2
3
4
5-7
Byte 08
o
1
2-5
6
7
Byte 09
ByteOA
o
Katakana keyboard attached
SCS feature installed on printer
Text keyboard
3289 text feature
APL keyboard
Extended keyboard function
Printer supports extended LU1
data stream with SNA FM headers
OFT session
Not used
Security keylock present
Selector pen attached
Reserved
MSR/MHS attached
Reserved
3180 in model 6,7,8, or 9 mode
ECS (APLlText)
Reserved
Color
Display HAP Supported
Reserved
Table
Location
Protected field or attribute character
Reserved
Keyboard inhibited
Reserved
Insert mode
o
Reserved
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
1
2
3
Test mode
Alpha shift (not Katakana shift)
Reserved
Text indicator
Upshift indicator
Katakana shift
APL indicator
4
5
6
7
ByteOB
o
1
2
3
4-7
Byte 00
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte OE
0-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte OF
o
1
2
3-4
5
6-7
Byte 10
o
1
2
3
Reserved
LT connection active
Reserved
Numeric lock field
Reserved
1- 4
5
6
7
2-21 (Page 1 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
4
5
6
7
Byte 11
o
1
2
3
4
5
Online indicator
System wait condition
Hard lock condition
Keyboard in use by operator
Reserved
Reserved
Color override
Reserved
Host-initiated local copy request
Alternate screen size
Attributes not valid
Reserved
X.21/X.25 Primary dial terminal
Reserved
Print failure indicator
Go elsewhere
Minus function
Wrong card
Message pending
Message reminder
Printer printing - local copy
If display has printer assigned for
local copy
Printer matrix changed (associated
with this display)
Reserved
Communication Check Reminder
Reserved
Invalid dead key
2NN machine check
Communication check
Application Program check
Security key off
3NN machine check
Too much data entered
Operator not authorized
Not enough data entered
Wrong number
Numeric shift
Operator retry
Device not functional
Device busy doing local copy
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-151
Online Tests Configuration B
Table
Location
Byte 12
Byte 13
2-21 (Page 2 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Location
6
7
X.21/X.25 operator communication
System lock (X-System)
Byte 3E
4NN (Application Program check
number)
o
Reserved
My job indicator
System operator indicator
Unowned indicator
Byte 3F
1
2
3
4NN (Communication check
number)
4
5
Not enabled (not online)
Reserved
6
7
Reserved
Minus symbol indicator (WT)
4
PU not active
Cursor position (CUT display only)2
Bytes
1A-1B
First character on display2
Bytes
1C-1D
Last character on display2
o
3
Model 5 wide screen
Model 5 wide screen
Reserved
Reserved
Inhibit display video
Blank cursor
Cursor reverse
Cursor blink
APL mode
APL attached
Byte 26
Row length
Byte 27
Indicator row length
(if printer then PCIA length)
Byte 29
AID Code
Byte 33
Printer buffer size
08 = 2K
10 = 4K
20 = 8K
o
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 37
o
Printer allocated to local copy
SNA - local copy printer allocated
to host
SNA - host request for local copy
allocated printer
Alternate row length
Default row length indicator
Reserved
SNA - LU in ERP state
SNA - Host communication
disabled (LU active)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
Reserved
Selector pen for immediate defect
field
Request for select pen field
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Disable cursor display
Reserved
Second local copy requested
Local copy busy
Reserved
Dead key sequence in progress
Local copy received IR
Reserved
Byte4C
0
Device attached to CU VIA AEA
adapter
Byte 52
0-7
Attribute affecting field cursor 3
Byte 53
0-7
Current extended field attribute
Bytes
54-55
Present attribute address 2
Bytes
56-57
Next attribute address 2
Byte 68
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte6A
Byte 6B
Local copy printing (host-initiated)
lFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte. subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
I
3See 3174 Reference Summary. GX27-3872. for attribute
description.
2-152
Bit
3
4
Byte 36
Byte4A
Byte 4B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 25
2-21 (Page 2 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Bit
Bytes
16-17
Byte 24
Table
Printer equipment check/display
disabled error
Intervention required
Printer busy processor abort
Reserved
Print in process
Start printing pending
Printer disabled
Reserved
1
2
3
4
5
Shift/numeric lock key still
depressed
Alpha key pressed
Alternate shift key pressed
Shift/numeric lock key in effect
Left shift key
Right shift key
6
7
Katakana shift key was pressed
APL key select APL mode
0
1
2
3
Reserved
Local copy being printed
Reserved
Reserved
0
lFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte. subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary. GX27-3872. for attribute
description.
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Table
Location
2-21 (Page 3 of 3). LT Control Area Bit
Definitions
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
4
5
6-7
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Byte 70
Local copy printer 10
Byte 71
Local copy printer address
Bytes
72-73
Printer DCB devices 0 - 15, ones in
this field are authorized to use this
printer
Bytes
74-75
Printer DCB devices 16 - 31 (same
as Bytes 72, 73 description)
Bytes
76-77
Printer class assignments (printer
only) 1 in one or more bits (0-15)
represents printer class
assignments 70-85
Byte AO
Byte AE
WCC save area
0
1
2
3
4-6
7
Byte AF
0-3
4
5- 6
Reserved
Device is bound
Start data traffic (OFT - pending
bind response)
Outbound pacing ind (OFT pending unbind response)
Half-duplex FSM
000 = Send state
001 = Pending send
010 = Pending receive
101 = Contention
111 = Receive
Error pending (response sent)
Table
Location
Byte BO
2-21 (Page 3 of 3). L T Control Area Bit
Definitions
Bit
Meaning If Bit Is Turned On
7
Crypto inbound padding indicate
5
6
o=
4
o
End chain receive
Outbound segmenting between
BIU
1 = Outbound segmenting in BIU
5
= Not last buffer in this RU
1 = Last buffer in this RU
First buffer in RU
Byte B5
0-7
LU type bound (01,02,03)
Byte B6
0-7
Printer outbound pacing count
Byte B1
Bytes
DC-DO
Default screen size
Bytes
DE-OF
Alternate screen size
Byte F3
Byte F7
o
2
LT trace enabled
OFT LTs are mapped
2
Greek E - Tech keyboard attached
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2When using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Reference Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
Bracket state mach
0000 = Between brackets
1111 = In brackets
0001 = Pending in brackets
0010 = Pending begin bracket
0011 = Pending between
bracket-EC received
0100 = Pending between
bracket-EC sent
0101 = Pending between
bracket-response received
0110 = Pending between
bracket-response sent
0111 = Pending between
bracket-purge received
1000 = Pending between
bracket-receive
1001 = Pending between
bracket-purge sent
0 == Send between chain
1 == Send in chain
Chain receive
00 == Receive between chain
01 = Receive In chain
11 = Receive purging chain
IFeatures supported and reported as available by the
device associated with the LT Control Area.
2WheA using this byte, subtract hex 50. This will give you
presentation space address origin O.
3See 3174 Referenoe Summary, GX27-3872, for attribute
description.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2·153
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 6, Option 3
Type 3 to select option 3 from the Display Control Blocks Menu. Figure 2-67 shows the information for X.21
short-hold mode.
__ X.21 /X.25 SHM Host Control Data-0
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
2
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
4
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
6
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
8
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
A
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
C
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
E
0000
uuuu
uuuu
uuuu
xxxx
xxx x
xxxx
E0
F0
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Test menu
2-67. X.21 Short-Hold Mode Host Control Data
Where:
uuuu
xxxx
= XID sent by the 3174 (comes from configured data)
=
XID received by the 3174 on a reconnection
The configured XID (the one sent to the host at start time) and the last reconnect XID (the last one sent to
the host during an SHM session) are displayed. If, for example, a normal X.21 host connection should be
established following an SHM connection, the XID displayed by 16,3 would be for the last SHM connection.
Bit 6 (SHSI) in the XID sent indicates short hold mode is active: it is not sent on with the initial XID; it is sent
during a reconnection. This bit is turned on after an SNRM (Set Normal Response Mode) has been
received. Table 2-22 on page 2-155 explains the information contained on the X.21 SHM Host Control Data
panel shown in Figure 2-67.
2-154
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Table
2-22. X.21 XID Summary
Location
Bit
Byte 0 1
0-3
4-7
Meaning
Table
Location
Format of XID I-field and PU type of
Format of XID I-field.
o = fixed format; bytes 0 - 5 used
1 = variable format; bytes 0 - Pare
used
PU type of the sender
1 = PU-T1
2 = PU-T2
3 = Reserved
4 = PU-T4
5 = PU-T5
2-22. X.21 XID Summary
Bit
63
7
1=
Length in hexadecimal of the
variable format XID I-field. This
byte is reserved in a fixed format
XID.
0
1-15
~3
4-7
Node identification
0-11
12-31
The product block number.
The SDLC ID.
Bytes 6,7
Reserved
Byte 8
Link-station and connection protocol
flags
Reserved
Link station role of XID sender
~1
2
o=
3
4-7
Sender is a secondary link
station
1 = Sender is a primary link station
Reserved
Link station transmit/receive
capability
Not already engaged in a
SHM session
1=
Engaged in a SHM session
Short hold indicator (SHI)
0=
Byte 12
Bytes
2-72
Bytes 2-5
Short hold status indicator (SHSI)
0=
Byte 10
Byte 1
Meaning
Maximum I field length the XID
sender receives
Format flag (always 0)
Maximum I (field length)
Reserved
SCLC command/response profile
o=
Byte 13
~1
2
Short-hold mode not
supported
Short-hold mode supported
SNA link profile (only value)
Reserved
SDLC initialization mode options
o=
3-7
Byte
14-15
Byte 16
SIM and RIM not supported
1 = SIM and RIM supported
Reserved
Reserved
0
1-7
Reserved
Maximum number of I frames that
can be received by the XID sender
before an ACK is sent
Byte 17
Reserved
Byte18
Length in bytes of the SDLC address
to be assigned. Byte 18 is not used
by the 3174. (Byte 18 = 00).
Byte 19
The length of the dial digits in
hexadecimal of the XID sender.
Byte 20
The.starting byte of the XID sender
dial digits.
o=
two way alternating
1 = two way at the same time
Byte 9
0
Node characteristic of the XID
sender
PU capability to receive FMD
requests
o=
1
2-3
PU cannot receive FMD
requests from the SSCP
1 = PU can receive FMD requests
from SSCP
Reserved
Segment assembly capability of the
nodes PC element
00 =
4-5
The mapping field is ignored
and PUis are forwarded
unchanged
01 = Segments are assembled on
a link station basis
10 = Segments are assembled on
a session basis
11 = Only whole BIUs are allowed
Reserved
IByte 0 = 12 for 3174 variable format XIDs
2Bytes 2-7 = 017nnnnxxxx where: 017 = 3174 block
number nnnnn = Answer to configuration question 215
(PUID), xxxx = Reserved
3Bit 6 of byte 9 has no meaning if bit 7 of byte 9 is off.
IByte 0 = 12 for 3174 variable format XIDs
2Bytes 2-7 = 017nnnnxxxx where: 017 = 3174 block
number nnnnn = Answer to configuration question 215
(PUID), xxxx = Reserved
3Bit 6 of byte 9 has no meaning if bit 7 of byte 9 is off.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-155
Online Tests Configuration B
Type 3 to select option 3 from the Display Control Blocks Menu. the following panel shows the information
for X.25.
_ _X.21/X.25 Host Control Data_ _
o
2
4
6
0000
iii i
i;;i
iii i
xxxx
xxxx
0000
iii;
i;ii
iii i
xxxx
xxxx
0000
iii;
iii i
xaxb
xxxx
xxxx
0000
iii i
iii i
xxxx
xxxx
rrrr
8
0000
; iii
iii i
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
zzzz zzzz zzzz zzzz rrrr
rrrr
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
EO
F0
A
CE
0000
iii i
iii i
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
0000
i;ii
iii i
xxxx
xxxx
rrrr
0000
iii i
iii i
xxxx
xxxx
rrrr
zzzz zzzz zzzz
To go directly to other tests, enter: /Test,Option
Select Test; press ENTER ===>
PF: 3=Quit
12=Test menu
Where:
iiii
xxx x
xaxb
zzzz
rrrr
= Reserved
= 2-byte link counter
= 2-byte link counter used in the example below
= 2-byte circuit counter
= Reserved
Figure
2-68. X.25 Host Control Data
Use the following example to determine how to locate a particular byte and the information following the
example for descriptions of the link and circuit counters. The bytes are described in Table 2-22 on
page 2-155, "Link Counters" on page 2-157, and "Circuit Counters" on page 2-157.
Example
To locate bytes 24 and 25:
1. Use the high-order digit 2. Scan down the column of numbers in the
left margin of the panel. Find address 20.
2. Use the low-order digit 4. Scan left to right in the row of data
next to address 20. Find the data under column number 4.
Byte 24 contains xa; byte 25 contains xb.
2-156
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Link Counters
Bytes 24, 25
=
The number of Information (I) frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 26, 27
=
The number of Information (I) frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 28,29
=
The number of Receiver Ready (RR) frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 2A, 2B
=
The number of Receiver Ready (RR) frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 2C, 2D
=
The number of Receiver Not Ready (RNR) frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 2E, 2F
=
The number of Receiver Not Ready (RNR) frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 30,31
=
The number of Reject frames sent by the 3174.
Bytes 32, 33
=
The number of Reject frames received by the 3174.
Bytes 34,35 =
The number of I-frames that were retransmitted by the 3174.
Bytes 36,37 =
The number of I-frames that were received by the 3174 with Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) errors.
Bytes 38, 39
=
The number of receive errors detected by the 3174.
Bytes 3A, 3B
=
The number of cycle steal underruns detected by the3174. This is an internal-exception
condition and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 3C, 3D
=
The number of receive buffer overruns detected by the3174. This is an
internal-exception condition and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 3E, 3F
=
The number of receive control block overruns detected by the 3174. This is an
internal-exception condition and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 40,41
=
The number of aborts detected by the 3174.
Bytes 42,43
=
The number of CS overruns detected by the 3174. This is an internal-exception condition
and is retried by the 3174.
Bytes 44,45
=
A valid frame has not been received within the time limit specified during configuration.
Bytes 48,49
=
The number of call attempts counted by the 3174 .
.
Circuit Counters
Bytes 50,51
=
The number of Data packets sent by the 3174.
Bytes 52, 53
=
The number of Data packets received by the 3174.
Bytes 54,55
=
The number of Receiver Ready packets sent by the 3174.
Bytes 56,57
=
The number of Receiver Ready packets received by the 3174.
Bytes 5A, 5B =
Bytes 5C, 5D
=
Bytes 5E, 5F =
The number of Receiver Not Ready packets sent by the 3174.
The number of Interrupt packets sent by the 3174.
The number of Interrupt packets received by the 3174.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-157
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 7 Configuration B: Color Convergence
This test is only available on 1TEST. Test 7 performs color convergence on 3279 color display stations. For
a description of this procedure, see the appropriate display station problem determination manual.
Note: No PF keys are provided for this test to return to the Test Menu. To bring up the Test Menu after
performing the test, press the CLEAR key.
Test 8 Configuration B: Extended Functions and Programmed
Symbols
Test 8 checks the programmed symbols (PS) and color for any device that uses PS or color. For a
description of this procedure, see the appropriate display station problem determination manual. .
2-158
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 10 Configuration B: Port Wrap Tests
This test is only available on ITEST. Test 10 runs a wrap test on ports on the terminal adapter, the TMA
card, the 3299 Models 2 and 3, and the 7232 dual control unit terminal multiplexer. Test 10 will not run on a
3299 Model 1. If a terminal is in use on one of the ports selected for a wrap test, this test will not interrupt
the operation of that terminal. The wrap test will not be performed, and the test will indicate that the
selected port is in use. This test cannot be run on the requesting terminal. The results of the port wrap test
will be indicated by a text message on line 23. The menu displayed is shown in Figure 2-69. Perform the
following procedure at any 3278 or similar display station:
1. Press and hold ALT; press TEST.
2. Type in 110
3. Press ENTER.
__ Port Wrap Test__
Option
Description
l,n
2,n
Direct wrap for terminal adapter port n
3299fterminal multiplexer wrap for port n (n=O-3l)
To insure a valid wrap the cable must be
disconnected from the wrapped port.
To go directly to other tests, enter: fTest,Option
Select Option; press ENTER
>
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
l2=Test menu
2-69. Port Wrap - Test 10
When using Test 10, disconnect the signal cable from the port that is being wrapped. Reflections from the
signal cable can cause the test to fail, giving a false error indication. If failures occur, see the 31743174
Status Codes, GA27-3832, for recovery action.
Option 1 (Direct Wrap)
•
•
•
For Models 1L through 13R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0,8, 16, and 24.
For Models 51 R through 63R, valid terminal adapter port numbers are 0 through 8.
For Models 81 R through 92R, the valid port number is O.
Option 2 (Multiplexer Wrap)
• For Models 1L through 13R, valid port numbers are 0 through 31.
• For Models 51R through 6R, valid port numbers are 0 through 15.
• For Models 81 R through 92R, valid port numbers are 0 through 7.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-159
Online Tests Configuration B
Test 11 Configuration B: Trace Control
This test is to be used by service representatives. The service representative must obtain a password from
an IBM support facility to perform this test.
Trace Control is an internal subsystem facility that is used to record specific subsystem processing
information. The information that is traced is saved in machine storage and can be written to the Control
diskette as required. Two types of information can be recorded by the trace facility:
• Data between processes
• Internal data flow.
Environment control block (ECB) traces record information between processes. When ECBs are traced, the
appropriate ECB numbers are entered as part of the trace test request.
Function traces record information within
recorded.
a process. For example, internal data flow for the file adapter is
The trace facility is performed in two environments:
• Background
•
Forp.nrf'llJnn
-'-g--_ .. _-
Background trace is integrated into the controller microcode and is started as a part of the controller
normal IML sequence. Background trace must be stopped before a foreground trace can be started.
Foreground trace is started by selecting a Test 11 option and specifying ECB(s) tracing or Internal Data
Flow tracing. Test 11 provides a means of starting, stopping, or modifying a particular trace. When the
trace facility is started, with a Start Trace command, a foreground trace starts. When the trace facility is
stopped with a Stop Trace command, all traces are stopped. When a foreground trace is no longer
required, the foreground trace must be stopped and the background trace must be restarted, either by use
of the Test 11 trace facility or by a normal IML.
Trace Control Mode
There are four trace control modes. Mode 02 is the default mode if another mode is not selected when
setting up a trace.
Mode 01
Mode 02
Mode 03
Mode 04
Do not write to the diskette or fixed disk and do not wrap the trace data area in controller
storage.
Do not write to the diskette or fixed disk and wrap the trace data area in controller storage.
Write to diskette or fixed disk without suspend.
Write to diskette or fixed disk with susfJend.
How to Use the Trace Facility
Before you attempt to start or stop a trace, the following information must be obtained from the 3174
support center:
• Check digit
• Trace mode (optional)
• Setup ECB number(s) or Setup Trace Function number(s).
2·160
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Trace Facility Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
11,1 ,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up ECB(s) Dispatched
11 ,2,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up ECB(s) Returned
11 ,3,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up DCB(s) Ports
11 ,4,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n Set Up Trace Functions
11 ,5,Check digit,nn Set Up Trace Mode
11 ,6,Password Start Trace
11 ,7,Password Stop Trace
11,1 Option The specified ECBs are traced when dispatched. Format = 11,1,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n
where n,n,n,n ........ n are ECB numbers. The check digit number and the ECB number(s) are
obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,2 Option The specified ECBs are traced when returned.
Format = 11 ,2,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n where n,n,n,n ........ n are ECB numbers. The check digit
number and the ECB number(s) are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,3 Option The specified ports are traced.
Format = 11 ,3,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n where n,n,n,n ........ n are port numbers. The check digit
number and the port number(s) are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,4 Option The specified functions are traced.
Format = 11 ,4,Check digit,n,n,n,n ....... n where n,n,n,n ........ n are trace function numbers. The
check digit number and the trace function number(s) are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,5 Option The trace runs in the specified mode.
Format = 11,5,nn where nn are mode numbers 01 through 04. The check digit number and the
mode number are obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,6 Option The trace is started.
Format = 11,6,password
The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
11,7 Option The trace is stopped.
Format = 11,7,password
The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
How to Start a Foreground Trace
Perform the following procedure at an attached 3278 or similar terminal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press and hold ALT; press TEST to enter test mode.
Type in 11,7,Password (Stop Trace)
Type in 11,5,check diglt,nn (Set Up Trace Mode) (This step is optional.)
Type in one of the following to set up the desired trace:
11,1,check digit,n,n,n,n ....... ,n
11,2,check digit,n,n,n,n ....... ,n
11,3,check digit,n,n,n,n....... ,n
11,4,check digit,n,n,n,n ....... ,n
5. Type in 11,6,password (Start Trace)
6. Type in 11,7,password (Stop Trace)
Note: The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-161
Online Tests Configuration B
How to Start a Background Trace
Perform the following procedure at an attached 3278 or similar terminal.
1. Press and hold AL T; press Test to enter test mode.
2. Type in 11,7,Password
3. Type in 11,6,Password
Note: The password is obtained from the 3174 support center.
2-162
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Online Tests Configuration B
Test A Configuration B: Operator-Originated Alerts
Network Problem Determination Aid (NPDA) provides support for 20 product-unique panels that can be
defined by the customer in the NPDA data base as part of the host SYSGEN process.
I
During configuring, one of the following options is selected:
•
•
•
•
No
An
An
An
alert function
alert function without operator-generated alert message capability
alert function with operator-generated alert message capability from all ports
alert function with operator-generated alert message capability from port 0 only.
When properly filled in, the information on such a screen is transmitted as part of an alert Network
Management Vector Transport (NMVT) inbound to the host.
Included in these alert request units (RUs) are the customer-specified user-action code, a 120 (maximum
length) test message, and up to three a-digit qualifiers.
Once the alert is received by NPDA, the user-action code is mapped into one of the unique customer
screens. The text message and qualifiers allow the operator to pass such things as a 3174 status code, a
port number, and a telephone number, as well as a text message, up to the NPDA operator.
When an authorized display station operator enters TEST mode, types in fA,n (n =.1A-1 H, 2A, 3A) and
presses the ENTER key, the following panel is displayed:
fA
XX
Host 1D= 1A
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn -----------------------------Q1 mmmmmmmm Q2 mmmmmmmm Q3 mmmmmmmm
Figure
2-70. Alert Message panel
where,
fA
XX
nnnn...
mmmm...
indicates the alert screen is ready for transmission when the Enter key is pressed.
is a two-character field for the user-action code 01 - 20 decimal required).
is a 120-character field filled with nulls for the text message (optional).
are three 8-character fields filled with nulls for the qualifiers (optional).
When the ENTER key is pressed with the above panel, a check is performed to ensure that the user-action
code (XX) is a number between 01 and 20 (decimal). If the number is between 01 and 20, the number is
translated by the 3174 into the appropriate user-action code and an alert is sent. If an invalid user-action
code is entered, the wrong number indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
After an operator-generated alert is sent, the display screen is cleared to prevent accidental
retransmission of the message. Only one operator-generated alert may be pending with the 3174 at one
time. For example, several authorized display station operators may request an alert screen
simultaneously. Once an operator fills the screen with the required user-action codes (and any optional
text and qualifiers) and presses the ENTER key, that entry is queued for transmission, provided no
oper;3,tor-generated alert is already pending. If a second authorized operator attempts to enter an alert
before the first operator-generated alert is transmitted to the host, the second operator's entry is inhibited,
the screen is not cleared, and the minus function indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-163
Online Tests Configuration B
The second operator must press the RESET key and try again. If the first operator's screen has been
transmitted and no other operator has entered an alert, the second operator's entry is honored.
Regardless of the upstream response, the screen is cleared. If a link-level error occurs, the hardware will
attempt retransmission of the alert. If the data has been lost because of an error above the link level
(DACTPU), the information may be lost without any error indication to the operator.
If an attempt is made to request an operator-generated alert screen from an unauthorized display station,
the operator unauthorized indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
If other than the basic characters have been entered from the keyboard, the try again (X? +) indicator is
displayed.
If a communication check is detected, the Input Inhibited and Communication Reminder symbols, followed
by a 5xx number, are displayed.
2-164
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
uenenll ,..rulW"UUnnt
General Procedures
This section describes the following procedures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
How to
How to
How to
How to
How to
How to
display the Master Menu
perform an operator panel lamp test
perform the coaxial cable ground loop check
check for a terminal-ready condition
use the 3174 patch procedure
perform the 3174 dump procedure.
How to Perform an Operator Panel Lamp Test
To test the light emitting diodes (LEOs) in the operator panel display, press and hold the IML pushbutton.
All the LEOs should light indicating 8888.
How to Display the Master Menu
The Master Menu (Figure 2-71) lists the utilities available on the Utility diskette or fixed disk. From this
menu, you select the option you want.
To display the Master Menu:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insert the Utility diskette into the diskette drive.
Press and hold Alt 1.
Press and release IML
Release Alt 1.
40 is displayed.
Press Enter. The Master Menu is displayed on the terminal connected to port 0 on the 3174.
_Master Menu
3174 MICROCODE © COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1986, 1987, 1988
Licensed Internal Code - Property of IBM
Select option; press ENTER
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
K
Select
Figure
Description
Customize the Control Disk
Merge DSL
Copy Files
Diagnostics
Microcode Upgrade
Encrypt/Decrypt Master Key
Central Site Customizing
Media Management
Identify Customizing Keyboard
===>
2-71. The Master Menu
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-165
U~II~I GI rTU\;~UUnni
Customize the Control Disk
Some customizing requires that hardware and software configuration information be either
specified or modified on the Control disk that will be used to make a 3174 operational; for
example, defining host, device, and printer attachments, modifiable-keyboard types, and RPQs.
When you select this procedure, a second menu is displayed. See the 3174 Utilities Guide for
the procedure.
Merge DSL Code
For DSL displays or for the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter (both of which require the
controller to downstream-load microcode), there is a separate DSL disk. During this procedure,
you merge one DSL disk onto another DSL disk. See 3174 Utilities Guide for this procedure.
Copy Files
This selection allows you to duplicate valid 3174 disks (Control, DSL, and Utility disks) and copy
portions of a Control disk or to modify certain parameters during a copy. See the 3174 Utilities
Guide for this procedure.
Diagnostics
IBM service representatives or customer service personnel can select this procedure to detect
and isolate hardware or software problems in the controller.
Microcode Upgrade
When new function or maintenance enhancements are added to a configuration support, IBM
sends its customers, at their request, an upgraded Utility, Control, RPQ, or DSL diskette. During
this procedure, you merge the customizing data from an already customized Control disk onto
the upgraded Control disk. See the 3174 Utilities Guide for this procedure.
Encrypt/Decrypt
If you have ordered the Encrypt/Decrypt feature for your 3174, you need to use this procedure.
The Encrypting/Decrypting procedure protects data from unauthorized disclosure by encrypting
data sent from the 3174 to the host system and by decrypting data received by the 3174 from the
host system. Only authorized persons should use this procedure. See the 3174 Utilities Guide
for this procedure.
Central Site Customizing
Central Site Customizing allows you to tailor control unit microcode for each controller in a
network at a central location. The tailored microcode can then be sent electronically (if you are
using the NetView™ Distribution Manager software package) or physically (on a diskette) to the
various controllers in the network, while a copy of the customizing is stored at the central site
for future reference. See the 3174 Central Site Customizing User's Guide for more information
on this procedure.
Media Management
If your 3174 Establishment Controller is equipped with at least one fixed disk drive, you may
wish to perform this procedure. The Media Management procedure provides a means for
managing the data resident on a fixed disk. You may use this procedure to set up a fixed disk in
order to IML from it, or you can use this procedure to delete subdirectories that are stored on it.
The 3174 Utilities Guide describes the procedure.
Identify Customizing Keyboard
During this procedure, you identify on a Utility disk the keyboard of the display you are using to
customize. The keyboard you specify will be supported on that disk for all other customizing
procedures and any time you recustomize using that disk. See the 3174 Utilities Guide for more
detail on this option.
NetView is a trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.
2-166
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
\:jeneral .... roceuure=t
How to Perform the Coaxial Cable Ground Loop Check
CAUTION:
Do not connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. (For translations of this safety
notice, see Safety Notice 5 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, disconnect all power plugs before connecting or disconnecting
cables. Do not reconnect power plugs until connection or disconnection of the cables is completed. (For
translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 1 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
This procedure is used to test for ground loop problems on each terminal connected by coaxial cable to the
controller. This procedure is not to be used with either the IBM Cabling System or telephone twisted-pair
cable.
A ground loop is a condition where earth ground is connected to the controller from an external ground
source. Ground loops can cause intermittent problems on terminals or other equipment connected to the
subsystem. Most ground loops occur through shield problems of the coaxial cable, keyboard grounds, or
an internal short in the connected terminal. The shield of the coaxial cable is connected to DC ground. DC
ground is only connected to earth ground in the controller but not in the terminals or terminal multiplexers.
Step 1: AC Voltage Check
At the terminal end of the coaxial cable being tested, check for AC voltage between the coaxial cable shield
and the terminal frame.
Note: Do not disconnect the coaxial connector from the terminal until you are directed to do so later in this
procedure.
a. Set the terminal power on.
b. Set the meter range to measure AC line voltage.
c. At the terminal, connect the meter between the coaxial connector shell and the terminal frame. Do
not physically touch either surface.
d. If the meter indicates an AC voltage less than 1 volt, go to "Step 2: Coaxial Resistance Check." If
the meter indicates an AC voltage greater than 1 volt, AC ground is not correct. A hazardous
condition exists. The power cord may be damaged or the AC power source may not be grounded
correctly.
e. Set the terminal power switch to OFF.
f. If the terminal is an IBM terminal, remove the power cord from the voltage source and check the
terminal power supply for broken insulation, arcing, and the correct wiring of the power cord. If the
terminal is not an IBM terminal, notify the customer that there is a ground problem on the terminal
or the power source is wired incorrectly. If no problem is found in the terminal, have the customer
call an electrician to check the grounding and wiring of the AC power source.
g. Do not continue until the problem is repaired. Repeat steps a through d to verify the repair and
continue the ground loop check.
Step 2: Coaxial Resistance Check
At the terminal end of the coaxial cable being tested, check resistance in the coaxial cable.
a.
b.
c.
d.
At the terminal, set the Power switch to the Off Position.
Connect the meter between the coaxial connector and the terminal frame.
Set the meter to the lowest resistance scale.
The meter should indicate a reading between 0 and 6 ohms. If the meter reading is correct, go to
"Step 3: Terminal Ground Check" on page 2-168.
e. If the reading is higher than 6 ohms, there is a high resistance because the coaxial cable shield is
not grounded correctly at the controller end of the cable.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-167
\:ieneral proceaures
This may be caused by:
• An open coaxial shield
• An open coaxial cable (not connected at the controller).
f. Do not continue until the problem is corrected. After the problem is corrected, repeat steps a
through d to verify the repair and continue the ground loop check.
Step 3: Terminal Ground Check
At the terminal end of the coaxial cable being tested, check for a ground on the coaxial cable connector in
the terminal.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Disconnect the coaxial cable from the terminal.
Connect the meter between the coaxial connector body (on the terminal) and the terminal frame.
Set the meter to the highest resistance scale.
If the meter does not indicate a reading of infinity or a very high resistance, there is a short to
ground in the terminal between the coaxial connector body and the terminal frame ground. If the
meter reading is correct, go to "Step 4: Coaxial Cable to Terminal Check."
• If this is an IBM terminal, repair the short in the terminal. Repeat steps a through d to verify
the repair. If this is not an IBM terminal, report the problem to the customer. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of non-IBM devices. After the terminal is repaired,
repeat steps a through d to verify the repai r.
e. Connect the coaxial cable to the terminal.
f. Go to the controller to continue the ground loop check.
Step 4: Coaxial Cable to Terminal Check
At the controller end of the cable, check for a ground in the coaxial cable.
a. At the controller:
1) Disconnect the coaxial cable from the controller coaxial connector.
2) Set the meter range to the highest resistance scale.
3) Connect the meter between the coaxial cable shell and the controller frame.
4) If the meter does not indicate a reading of infinity or a very high resistance (meg-ohms), there
is a low resistance ground in the coaxial cable. If the meter reading is correct repeat Step 4 on
any remaining coaxial cables.
This may be caused by:
• A pinched coaxial cable
• A grounded shield on the coaxial cable
• A bad lightning protective device on the coaxial cable.
b. Have the customer correct the problem.
c. When the problem is corrected, repeat steps a 1) through a 4) to verify the repair.
If all problems have been repaired or there are no failures of the coaxial cable that was just tested:
a. Reconnect the coaxial cable at both ends.
b. Set the Power switch on the terminal to the ON position.
c. Repeat Step 4 on any remaining coaxial cables.
2-168
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
General proceaures
How to Check for a Terminal-Ready Condition (S, 4, or 6 Indicator)
This procedure is used to isolate terminal problems by exchanging a known working terminal, such as a
3278, 3279, 3290, or printer, with another terminal or a 3299 Terminal Multiplexer.
1. At the terminal to be tested, switch the Normal/Test switch from Normal to Test and back again or
perform a power-on reset. Some terminals require up to 2 minutes to complete a power-on reset.
2. Check the terminal for the ready symbol (S, 4, or 6) in the operator information area. For printers,
check for the appropriate ready indicator. For some terminals, such as a personal computer, you may
need to change its mode that allows communication with the 3174.
3. If the ready condition is on, the terminal and the port the terminal is attached to are working properly.
Return to the MAP that sent you here.
4. If the ready condition is not on, then the hardware configuration from the terminal back to the controller
is failing. Return to the MAP that sent you here.
How to Use the 3174 Patch Procedure
The patch procedure provides the ability either to add two types of patches or to process an existing patch.
The two types of patches that can be added are PC and ZAP patches. When a patch is added, a check digit
and a line count are entered as part of the patch data to verify that all patch data has been keyed in
correctly. Sixty patches can be installed on the Control diskette and 60 on the Utility diskette.
PC Patches
PC patches are applied only to the link-edited microcode that is on the Control diskette. PC patches are
prefixed with the letters PC. PC patches are not connected in any way with the IBM Personal Computer.
When these patches are added, they display on the patches panel of the Control diskette. When a PC patch
is added, data is entered only on those panels that are required for the patch being added. When a panel is
displayed that does not require any input, use PF 8 to bypass that panel, or PF12 to process the patch if all
the required patch data has been entered.
Zap Patches
Zap patches are applied to prelinked microcode that is contained on the Control or Utility diskette. Zap
patches are prefixed with the letters ZC or ZU. ZC means the patch is applied to the microcode on the
Control diskette. ZU means the patch is applied to the microcode on the Utility diskette.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-169
,,",,~II~I
ctl r l U\;t:uun::ti
Processing a Patch
This procedure provides the capability of including a patch during an IML, omitting a patch from an IML, or
deleting a patch from the Control or Utility diskette.
Starting the Patch Procedure
1. Insert the Utility diskette.
2. Perform an Alt 1 IML. See "Obtaining the Alt 1 IML 40 Prompt Message" on page 2-39.
3. At 40, press ENTER.
4. Go to the terminal connected to port O.
The Master Menu is displayed. See Figure 2-72.
Master Menu
Select Option:
press Enter
1. Customize the Control Diskette
2. Merge DSL
3. Copy Fi 1es
4. Diagnostics
5. Microcode Upgrade
6. Encrypt/Decrypt Master Key
K. Identify Customizing Keyboard
Select
Figure
===>
2-72. Master Menu
5. Type in P
6. Press ENTER. The Patch Menu is displayed on your screen. See Figure 2-73.
2-170
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Patch Menu
Option
Description
1
2
3
Patch Control Dsk
Patch Utility Dsk
Patch DSL Dsk
Select
>
Select option, press ENTER
Figure
2-73. Patch Menu
7. Select the Option number of the diskette you are patching.
8. Press ENTER. The following panel is displayed on your screen and the line containing the selected
diskette is highlighted.
Patch Menu
Option
Description
1
Patch Control Dsk
Patch Utility Dsk
Patch DSL Dsk
2
3
Available drives:
1 To
>
1
Verify drive selection, press ENTER
Figure
2-74. Diskette Drive Selection Menu
9. Type in 1 for your To (or target) drive.
10. Press ENTER. The following panel is displayed on your screen.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-171
Patch Menu
Option
Description
1
2
Patch Control Dsk
Patch Utility Dsk
Patch DSL Dsk
3
Available drives:
1 To => 1
Insert XXX disk. press ENTER
Figure
2-75. Diskette Drive Selection Menu
xxx =
the diskette you selected to patch.
11. Insert the selected diskette into the diskette drive.
12. Press ENTER.
The Patches panel is displayed (see Figure 2-76 on page 2-173).
To add a patch, go to "Adding a Patch" on page 2-173.
To add a Zap patch, go to "Adding a Zap Patch" on page 2-176.
To process a patch, go to "Pro~essing an EXisting Patch" on page 2-178.
2-172
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General Procedures
Adding a Patch
The Patches panel shown in Figure 2-76 does not show any patches installed. If patches were previously
installed, the patch numbers would be displayed with a 1 or 2 next to the patch number.
Patches
l=Include in IML
2=Omit from IML
3=Delete
XXX DSK:
PF: 3=Quit
10=Add Patch
12=Process
xxx = the diskette you selected to patch.
Figure
2-76. Patches Panel
1. Press PF10.
The following panels display:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Patch Header Panel (see Figure 2-77 on page 2-174)
Patch Data Panel (see Figure 2-78 on page 2-174)
Relocatable Information Panel (see Figure 2-79 on page 2-175)
Call to Patch Area Panel (see Figure 2-80 on page 2-175).
2. Fill in the fields as required for the patch being added.
3. Press PF12 (or PA2 on keyboards that do not have a PF12 key).
The patch processes, and the Patches panel appears with the new patch number displayed.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-173
General Procedures
Enter data only on the panels required by the patch being installed. If the patch data does not indicate that
a particular panel must be filled in, press PF8 to bypass that panel.
Patch Header
Patch 1D ............... .
Microcode Level ........ .
Line Count ............. .
Clan ................... .
Selection Criteria ...... 001F
Check Digit .............. _
PF :3=Quit
Figure
8=Fwd
2-77. Patch Header Panel
Patch Data
CSECT Name ....... .
Text
Offset
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
2-174
CSECT Alignment ........ 004
Text
Code/Data
8=Fwd
Check
Digit
l1=More
2-78. Patch Data Panel
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
General t'roceaures
Relocatable Information
CSECT to be Modified .................. .
CSECT to be Resolved .................. .
Offset within CSECT to be Modified ..•.•
Offset within CSECT to be Resolved •....
RLD Type .......•.•.....•..•...........• _
Check Di gi t .••.•........••........••...
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
8=Fwd
l1=More
2-79. Relocatable Information Panel
Call to Patch Area
CSECT Calling to Patch Area ............ ____
Offset of Ca 11 inCa 11 i ng CSECT ........ ____
Return Reg; ster ....................... .
Check Di gi t ........................... .
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Process
2-80. Call to Patch Area Panel
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-175
\.3~neral
.... roceaures
Adding a Zap Patch
Figure 2-81 shows the Patches panel before a zap patch is added.
Patches
l=Include in IML 2=Omit from IML 3=Delete
XXX DSK:
PF: 3=Quit
10=Add Patch
xxx =
the diskette you selected to patch.
Figure
2-81. Patches Panel (Adding a Zap Patch)
12=Process
1. PressPF10.
The following panels are displayed:
a. Patch Header panel (see Figure 2-82 on page 2-177).
b. Zap Patch panel (see Figure 2-83 on page 2-177).
2. Fill in the fields as required for the patch being added.
3. Press PF12 (or PA2 on keyboards that do not have a PF12 key).
The patch processes, and the Patches panel appears with the new patch number displayed.
2-176
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Patch Header
Patch 10 ...•••••..•.••..
M1 crocode Level •••••••••
L1ne Count •.•.••.••..•.•
Cl an .....•..............
Selection Criteria ......
eelF
Check Digit ............. .
PF :3=Quit
Figure
2-82.
8=Fwd
Patch Header Panel (Adding a Zap Patch)
__ Zap Patch __
DOS File Name ....... .
Text
Offset
Extension
Text
Code/Data
Check
Digit
VER
REP
VER
REP
VER
REP
VER
REP
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
12=Apply ZAP
2-83. Zap Patch Panel
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-177
Processing an Existing Patch
The panel in Figure 2-84 shows one patch installed on the Control diskette. Option 2 is in the field next to
the patch number, which means this patch is not loaded when a normal IML is performed. To change this
option:
1. Move the cursor under the 2.
2. Type in 1 or 3 where:
1 loads the patch when a normal IML is performed.
3 deletes the patch from the diskette.
Warning: When option 3 is entered, the patch is deleted when PF12 is pressed. Be sure the patch selected
for deletion is the correct patch number.
3. Press PF12 (or PA2 on keyboards that do not have a PF12 key).
The patch processes and the Patches menu reappears reflecting the changed option number or deleted
patch.
Patches
l=Include in IML 2=Omit from IML 3=Delete
CTL DSK:
2
Pll1111
PF: 3=Quit
Figure
2-178
lO=Add Patch
12=Process
2-84. Patches Panel with One Patch Installed
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
'-iiilI~""."
••• """ .......... __
How to Perform the 3174 Dump
The 3174 dump procedure is a standalone program that is contained on its own diskette. The dump
diskette (PN 73X3726) is obtained from an IBM Parts Distribution Center. The following information can be
retrieved from the controller by use of the dump procedure:
•
•
•
•
•
Controller Storage and Register Space
Controller Memory Mapped 1/0 (MMIO)
Control Diskette Link-Edit Map
Control Diskette Configuration Files
Control Diskette Event Log and Trace.
The dump procedure is performed at the 3174 operator panel. The 3174 must be offline from the host
system. This procedure requires a 3174 dump diskette and is performed when the controller is in its failing
state.
Note: A second dump diskette may be required to dump all of machine storage.
1. Remove the diskette from the diskette drive.
2. Insert the 3174 dump diskette.
Warning: If the following steps are not performed properly, the dump information may be DESTROYED.
3. Press and hold Alt 1
4. Press and rei ease 1M L.
5. At 31, release Alt 1.
6. At 40, press Enter.
7. The following status codes are displayed:
5901 5902 5903 5904 5905
8. At 5907, remove the dump diskette and insert the Control diskette.
Do NOT press any operator panel keys at this time.
9. The following status codes are displayed:
5908 5909
10. At 5910, remove the Control diskette and insert the original dump diskette.
11. The following status codes are displayed:
5912 5913
12. If status code 5914 is displayed, remove the dump diskette and insert a second dump diskette. If 5914 is
not displayed, continue with the next step.
13. At 5916, remove the dump diskette. The dump is completed. Save this diskette for analysis.
14. If 5917 or 5918 is displayed, the contents of the dump may not be valid. In this case, record the
additional fields and perform the following procedure:
a. Remove the dump diskette.
b. Save this dump diskette for analysis.
c. Perform an Alt 2 IML to verify proper operation of the controller. See" Alt 2 IML (Test 82)
Procedure" on page 1-24.
d. Re-create the failure.
e. Perform the dump procedure again.
f. Save this dump diskette for analysis.
15. If any other status code is displayed, see the 3174 Status Codes manual.
Chapter 2. Diagnostic Information
2-179
3174
Mode~s
81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R Establishment Controller OlTs
These online tests (OLTs) provide path testing for the 3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R Establishment
controller downline from a 270x or a 370x. (See Table 2-23.)
Prior to invocation, the 3174 must complete its IML sequence; that is, the operational microcode must be in
control and ready for 110 operations with the host.
Applicable Executive Control Program
These OL Ts are compatible with the following control programs at the levels indicated or higher:
DOS/VS OL TEP
OS/VS10LTEP
OS/VS2 SVS OLTEP
OS/VS2 MVS OLTEP
TeAM TOTE
OLTSEP
OS OLTEP
DOS OLTEP
Table
33
6
1.7
3.7
10
9.0
21.8
26
2-23. 3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R OLTs
Configuration
Ol T User's Guide
OlT
3174 Models 81R and 91R, BSC operating
with a 270x, or a 370x with the
Emulator Program (EP)
D99-3174B
R3174A
3174 Models 81R and 91R BSC operating
with a 270x, 370x EP, or a
370x NCP, R31748 requires
that the 3700 Series
Diagnostics be cataloged at
the host. It is suggested that
R3174A be used when operating
with a 270x, or 370x EP.
D99-3174-C
D99-3700A
R3174B
174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R SOLC operating
with a 370x NCP. Use the
following Link Level Tests:
Link Level 1
D99-3700C
T3700LTE
Link Level 2
D99-3705A
T3705
2-180
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Repair Information
Chapter 3. Repair Information
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Removal/Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Cover Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Supply Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Operator Panel Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Storage Card Removal/Replacement Models 91 Rand 92R
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Diskette Drive Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fan Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-10
Planar Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Chapter 3. Repair Information
3-1
Repair Information
Introduction
This chapter contains 3174 locations, power supply voltage charts, DC power connector wiring, DC power
connector locations, and removal/replacement procedures.
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock, switch off power and disconnect power cord before
disconnecting cables or removing a component, such as the planar board, power supply, or diskette drive.
(For translations of this safety notice, see Safety Notice 10 in IBM 3174 Safety Notices, GA27-3824.)
Locations
Figures 3-1 and 3-2 illustrate the front-panel and back-panel locations of the 3174.
Diskette Storage
Compartment
Diskette Drive
Figure
I
Ie
----
j I.........r
IL
V
\J
-~
~~~~~~ ~ ~~ ~~~~~~~ ~~ ~~~~~~~
~~ t;J
IIIII
HG 26
DB
I
9/
rr
HG 11
10\
}o1
0
g
000
/
-
I
Communication Port
3-2. 3174 Back Panel Locations
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
-
I
- Operator Panel
oQ
I
J-.-J
L.J
3-1. 3174 Front Panel Locations
AC Indicator
3-2
e1 g] 10
c
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Figure
0
Status
18 8 8 81
I
nepi:llr IIIIUlllla,.U ..
Table
3-1. Power Supply Voltage Chart (No-Load Condition)
DC Limits
Voltage
Test Point
Nominal
Maximum
+5.0
P1-1 (Planar)
P-2 (Planar)
P1-7 (Planar)
P1-4 (Diskette Drive)
P1-3
P3-1 (Fan)
P1-8 (Planar)
+5.0
+6.0
-5.0
-12.0
-12.0
-6.0
-14.0
-5.0
-12.0
-12.0
-14.0
+12.0
.
GND
P1-9
P2-1
P1-4
P1-5
P2-2
P2-3
P3-2
(Planar)
(Diskette Drive)
(Planar)
(Planar)
(Diskette Drive)
(Diskette Drive)
(Fan)
+12.0
I
+13.2
Ground
Return
Notes:
1. Under normal no-load conditions, the output of the power supply should never exceed the Maximum
Limit. The no-load upper limit range will vary according to how much of the "LOAD" is attached.
2. The -5Vdc and -12Vdc are not used on some models.
Example: Removing just one power connector, such as P1 (Planar), leaves the "LOAD" of P2 (Diskette
Drive) and P3 (Fan) still connected to the power supply. When the voltages are measured at the P1 (Planar)
connector, the voltages will tend to be high, but not as high as when all three power plugs are removed.
Table
3-2. Power Supply Voltage Chart (Normal Operating Condition)
DC Limits
Voltage
Wire Color
Test Point
Nominal
Maximum
+5.0
Orange
P1-1
P1-2
P1-7
P1-4
+5.0
+6.0
-5.0
Yellow
P1-3
-5.0
-6.0
-12.0
Blue
P3-1 (Fan)
-12.0
-14.0
-12.0
Blue
P1-8 (Planar)
-12.0
-14.0
+12.0
Red
P1-9 (Planar)
P2-1 (Diskette
Drive)
+12.0
+13.2
GND
Black
P1-4
P1-5
P2-2
P2-3
P3-2
Ground
Return
(Planar)
(Planar)
(Planar)
(Diskette Drive)
(Planar)
(Planar)
(Diskette Drive)
(Diskette Drive)
(Fan)
Note: The -5Vdc and -12Vdc are not used on some models.
Chapter 3. Repair Information
3-3
P1 Planar Power Plug
P1 Planar Power Plug
Wire Side View
End View
+5.0
+5.0
+5.0
+5.0
(Orn)
(Orn)
+6.0
+5.0
(Orn)
·12.0
-5.0
-5.0
(Yel)
GND
-12.0
(Blue)
GND
+ 12.0
+ 12.0
(Red)
POR
To Power Supply
P2 Diskette Drive Power Plug
P2 Diskette Drive Power Plug
End View
Wire Side View
+ 12.0
GND
GND
+5.0
To Power Supply
P3 Fan Power Plug
P3 Fan Power Plug
End View
Wire Side View
1GJ 81
GND
-12.0
-12.0
(Blue)
GND
~(Blk)
To Power Supply
Figure
3-4
3-3. DC Power Connectors
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Repair Information
Wi re Side View
PIN 10A +5.0
- -
PIN 9A + 1.7
-
PIN 8A GND
Front of
Planar
Board
PIN 1A
•
· •
• •
• •
• • •
• •
• •
- •
A
PIN 1OB +5.0
PIN 5B GND
Right Side of
Plana r Board
B
I
Figure
3-4. Operator Panel Connector (J10)
Chapter 3. Repair Information
3-5
Repair Information
Fan
To Power
Supply
Diskette Drive
Storage Cards
Figure
3-6
3-5. DC Power Connector Locations
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Repair Information
Removal/Replacement Procedures
This section provides the information needed to remove and replace the front and top covers, the power
supply, the operator panel, the diskette drive, the fan, and the planar board.
Cover Removal/Replacement
1. Switch off AC power.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and the rear of the 3174.
3. Disconnect the communication interface cable and the terminal signal cables.
Note: See Figure 3-6 and perform the following steps to remove the covers:
4. Loosen the two superdrive screws located at the bottom front corners of the 3174.
5. Press the locking tab in and pull the bottom of the front cover away from the front of the machine. The
locking tab is centered between the two screws that were loosened in step 4.
6. Remove the top cover by pressing down on the two locking tabs at the rear of the controller and sliding
the cover away from the rear of the 3174. See Figure 3-6.
7. Reverse the steps and the actions to replace the front and top covers.
Superdrive
Screws
Top
Cover
Latches
Figure
3-6. Top and Front Cover Removal/Replacement
Chapter 3. Repair Information
3-7
Repair Information
Power Supply Removal/Replacement
1. Switch off AC power.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and the rear of the 3174.
3. Disconnect the communication interface cable and the terminal signal cables.
4. Remove the front and top covers. See "Cover Removal/Replacement" on page 3-7.
Note: See Figure 3-8 on page 3-12 and perform the following steps:
5. Remove three hex screws (7mm) from the top of the power supply cover and remove the cover.
6. Disconnect the following power cables:
• Planar board power cable (P1)
• Fan power cable (P3)
• Diskette power cable (P2).
7. Remove the plastic grommet from the side of the power supply housing.
8. Disconnect the plastic AC actuator link. Rotate the link locking collar counterclockwise and slide it
toward the front of the 3174. Pull the end of the link out of the AC actuator.
9. Remove the hex screw (7mm) from the end of the green/yellow ground wire.
10. Remove the two power supply mounting screws (7mm).
11. Lift up on the power supply and disengage the four plastic locking tabs one at a time to complete the
removal procedure of the power supply.
12. Reverse the steps and actions to replace the power supply.
Operator Panel Removal/Replacement
1. Switch off AC power.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and the rear of 3174.
3. Disconnect the communication interface cable and the terminal signal cables.
4. Remove the front and top covers. See "Cover Removal/Replacement" on page 3-7.
Note: See Figure 3-8 on page 3-12 and perform the following steps:
5. Remove three hex screws (7mm) from the top of the power supply cover and remove the cover.
6. Disconnect the plastic AC actuator link. Rotate the link locking collar counterclockwise and slide it
toward the front of the 3174. Pull the end of the link out of the AC actuator.
7. Disconnect the operator panel signal cable.
8. Pull the operator panel assembly away from the front of the 3174. Slide the operator panel signal cable
to the left to clear the machine frame.
9. Disengage the four plastic locking tabs to remove the operator panel logic card from the operator panel
assembly.
10. Remove the two screws that secure the power switch to the operator panel assembly.
11. Reverse the steps and actions to replace the operator panel.
3-8
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Repair Information
Storage Card Removal/Replacement Models 91 Rand 92R
1. Switch off AC power.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and the rear of 3174.
3. Disconnect the communication interlace cable and the terminal signal cables.
4. Remove the front and top covers. See "Cover Removal/Replacement" on page 3-7.
5. Loosen the retaining screw at each end of the storage card in location 22 or 23 and pull straight up on
the card.
6. Reverse the above steps to replace the card.
~---Storage
Figure
Card
3-7. Storage card removal/replacement
Chapter 3. Repair Information
3·9
Repair Information
Diskette Drive Removal/Replacement
1. Switch off AC power.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and the rear of 3174.
3. Disconnect the communication interface cable and the terminal signal cables.
4. Remove the front and top covers. See "Cover Removal/Replacement" on page 3-7.
Note: See Figure 3-8 on page 3-12 and perform the following steps:
5. Disconnect the planar board power cable (P1).
6. Disconnect the fan power cable (P3).
7. Disconnect the diskette drive power cable (P2).
8. Disconnect the diskette drive signal cable from the planar board and the diskette drive.
9. Remove the three plenum mounting screws (7mm).
10. Remove the four slotted diskette drive mounting screws.
11. Reverse the steps and actions to replace the diskette drive.
Fan Removal/Replacement
1. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and the rear of 3174.
2. Disconnect the communication interface cable and the terminal signal cables.
3. Remove the front and top covers. See "Cover Removal/Replacement" on page 3-7.
Note: See Figure 3-8 on page 3-12 and perform the following steps:
4. Disconnect the fan power cable.
5. Remove the four fan mounting screws.
6. Reverse the steps and actions to replace the fan.
3-10
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Repair Information
Planar Board Removal
Note: Follow the normal electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when removing and replacing the
planar board.
1. Switch off AC power.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and the rear of 3174.
3. Disconnect the communication interface cable and the terminal signal cables.
4. Remove the front and top covers. See "Cover Removal/Replacement" on page 3-7.
Note: See Figure 3-S on page 3-12 and perform the following steps:
5. Remove three hex screws (7mmt from the top of the power supply cover and remove the cover.
6. Disconnect the following power cables:
•
•
•
•
•
Planar Board power Cable (P1)
Fan power cable (P3)
Diskette power cable (P2)
Diskette signal cable
Operator panel signal cable (P10).
7. Remove the three plenum mounting screws (7mm) and remove the plenum.
S. Remove the two planar board mounting screws (7mm).
9. Disengage the three locking tabs located near the rear of the 3174.
10. Slide the planar board toward the rear of the 3174 to remove it.
11. Reverse the steps and actions to replace the planar board.
Chapter 3. Repair Information
3-11
W
I
~
I\)
~
"T1
cO·
c
Fan Mounting
c.>
SCrews
Co
s:
-=a
P>
~
0
a.
(1)
"iii
::l
00
2-
:D
~
~
=r
"T1
0
c
:D
=r
:D
<0
C
CO
(1)
:D
0
I\)
s:
!!?
3
<
P>
::::::
:::I
:D
CD
"0
:::I
P>
:::I
0
(1)
:::I
0'
(4)\
CD
-....J
V ,.
Di~kette
Drive
Signal Cabl e
Plenum
scre~O(~)tl~
Plenum
~
"!..,
-.,
-o·
S"
o
3
I»
~
Diskette Storage
Pocket
:D
CD
'
)/
,
:::J
"~,':
Planar Board
Mounting Screws (2)
/
Planar Board
--
/
(1)
iii"
0
Planar Board
Power Cable (P1)
(1)
3
(1)
~
Fan Power Cable (P3)
'"'t
3
o·e
:::I
Diskette Drive
Mounting Screws
(2 Each Side)
Repair Information
....
urn
o
CDc,
.... ..0
alal
~
a
Or
.... c
>-
aI·-
Cirn
c~
§-~
al°
0
0.......1
00 ....
.... 0
(\)00
3=x
a(\)
o..I
OJ
c
32
o
a
........................:,................................... .....1 L- ......................................................... \
~~
c._
a
.....10
a;
c(\)
aI_
o....c
L-al
00
~L-al_
(\)co
0...
OJ-r-
OU5~
Figure
3-8 (Part 2 of 2). FRU Removal/Replacement
Chapter 3. Repair Information
3-13
Repair Information
3-14
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Safety Inspection Guide
Chapter 4. Safety Inspection Guide
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
General Checklist Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chapter 4. Safety Inspection Guide
4-1
Safety Inspection Guide
Introduction
This chapter is a guide to inspecting 3174 Establishment Controller Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R for
potentially unsafe conditions. It provides a list of preparatory items, a checklist of inspection items, and an
illustration of safety labels.
Preparation
• Completion of Electrical Safety Training Course for IBM Customer Engineers is required (self-study
Course 77170, or FI8 II Course 70702, or the current level of each).
• Machine power should be off and electrical power removed from the machine before you begin the
checklist.
• The following should be available for reference:
-
Copies of CEMs (ECs) for this machine type
3174 Site Planning, GA23-0213
Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers, 8229-8124.
Note: Although completeness and accuracy are the goals of this guide, not all machine configurations (for
example, special features, RPQs) are covered. If you encounter a machine with RPQs or features
not described in this guide, use the installation instructions for the RPQ or feature for additional
information. Otherwise, use this guide and good judgment to obtain a safe machine.
General Checklist Guidelines
The intent of this inspection guide is to help you identify potentially unsafe conditions on machines being
inspected. Each machine, at the time of its manufacture, had required safety items installed to protect the
owners/operators and service personnel from injury. This checklist covers only those items. Good
judgment should be used to identify potential safety conditions not covered by this inspection guide.
Perform the following checklist procedure before bringing power up on the machine. If any apparent
unsafe conditions are present, a determination must be made on how serious the hazard could be and
whether to continue without first correcting the problem.
Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they present:
• Electrical, especially primary power-for example, a machine frame with a voltage potential that is
above ground potential can cause a serious or fatal electrical shock.
• Explosive -for example, a damaged CRT face or bulging capacitors can result in serious injury.
• Use of chemicals, cleaning solutions, or solvents other than those specified by IBM.
Checklist
IJ
Enter the machine serial number.
Check
IJ
IJ
Check that machine power is off and the mainline power cable is disconnected before you start this
procedure.
Check that the power cable is not frayed or damaged.
4·2
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Safety Inspection Guide
Inside the Machine
o
o
o
o
Check for any non-IBM alterations: If there are any, has R009, Non-IBM Alteration/Attachment
Survey been completed?
Check for broken or loose parts or assemblies.
Check all retai ni ng screws, such as:
Those that secure the planar board to the frame housing. See Figure 4-1 on page 4-4.
Those that secure the power supply. See Figure 4-1 on page 4-4.
Check that the yellow/green ground wire on the AC line filter is connected to the machine frame.
See part 2 of Figure 3-8 on page 3-12.
Check for Machine Labels:
o
o
Verify that labels are installed as indicated in Figure 4-1 on page 4-4.
Verify that the voltage label matches the voltage stamp on the top of the power supply.
Power Plug Ground Check
o
With a CE meter set to the RX1 range, check continuity between the ground pin on the power plug
and the machine frame. The reading should be 0 ohm.
Test Verification
Run either of the following tests:
o
o
Test All 81 (CSU). See "Alt 1 IML Description" on page 1-22.
Alt 2 IML. See "Alt 2 IML (Test 82) Procedure" on page 1-24.
Investigate any failure before releasing the machine for customer use.
Chapter 4. Safety Inspection Guide
4-3
Safety Inspection Guide
Safety Label
Label Safety
Label Voltage
Note: See pages 5-10 through 5-13 (Parts Section) to obtain the part
numbers for the safety labels installed in this control unit.
Figure
4-4
4-1. 3174 Safety Label Locations
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
5-1
How To Use This Parts Catalog
• SIMILAR ASSEMBLIES: If two assemblies
contain a majority of identical parts, they are
broken down on the same list. Common parts are
shown by one index number. Parts peculiar to one
or the other of the assemblies are listed separately
and identified by description.
• AR: (As Required) in the Units column indicates
that the quantity is not the same for all machines.
• NP: (Non-Procurable) in the Units column indicates that the part is non-procurable and that the
individual parts or the next higher assembly
should be ordered.
• NR: (Not Recommended) in the Units column
indicates that the part is procurable but not recommended for field replacement, and that the next
higher assembly should be ordered.
• R: (Restricted) in the Units column indicates
that the part has a restricted availability.
• INDENTURE: The indenture is marked by a
series of dots located before the parts description.
The indenture indicates the relationship of a part
to the next higher assembly. For example:
Indenture
Relationship of Parts
(No dot)
MAIN ASSEMBLY
(One dot)
• Detail parts of a main assembly
(One dot)
• Subassembly of the main
assembly
(Two dot)
•• Detai I part of a one-dot
subassembly
(Two dot)
•• Subassembly of a one-dot
subassembly
(Three dot)
• • • Detail part of a two-dot
subassembly
Assembly n: EXAMPLE ASSEMBLY
AsmIndex
Part
Number
n-
Units
1
1
-
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
5373637
5356429
1847630
1847602
5373639
5356429
1
2
R
NR
AR
2
NP
416629
2
Description
CoverAsm.Rea~Red
Cover Asm.Rear-White
For Next Higher Assembly,See 1-2
• Seal,Top
• Clip,Retaining
• Fi nger Stock Asm
• • Channel, Fi nger Stock
• Seal,Bottom
• Clip,Retaining
• Cover,Rear,Without Paint
• Screw, Panel
I
5-2
3174 Establishment Controller, Models 81R,82R,91R and 92R
Assemblies
Cable Assemblies With Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Final Assembly- 3174 Models 81 R,82R,91 Rand 92R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Mechanical Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
5-3
Visual Index I.Final Assembly- 3174 Models 81 R,82R,91R and 92R
Mechanical Subassembly
Assembly 2
Page 5-10
Final Assembly- 3174
Models 81R, 82R, 91R, 92R
Assembly 1
Page 5-6
Cable Assemblies With
Component Parts
Assembly 3
Page 5-12
5-4
3174 Establishment Controller, Models 81R,82R,91R and 92R
Catalog Section
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
5-5
Assembly 1: Final Assembly- 3174 Models 81 R,82R,91R and 92R
50
58
VIEWe
,
21
I
SEE ASM. 2
17
DETAIL e
5-6
3174 Establishment Controller, Models 81 R,82R,91 Rand 92R
VIEW
CI
AsmIndex
Part
Number
Units
1-1
-2
-2
-2
-2
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-4
6168584
73X4030
73X4031
25F8530
25F8381
73X4016
73X4017
73X4018
73X4019
73X4020
73X4021
73X4022
73X4039
855285
NP
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-5
-5A
855284
1359009
1
1
-5B
-5C
-50
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
5953429
83X9765
65X2932
73X4032
73X4033
73X4034
73X4035
73X4036
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-6A
-7
-7
-7
-7
-7
-7
-7
83X9764
73X4013
5267922
5267924
5267926
5267927
5267925
5267923
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-8
-9
-10
73X4013
73X3979
61X4618
1
1
1
-10
72X6058
1
-11
-11A
1621171
1622344
4
4
Description
Final Assembly- 3174
• Label,Hex
• Nameplate-Model 81 R
• Nameplate-Model 82R
• Nameplate-Model 91 R
• Nameplate-Model 92R
• Label,Serial No.
• Label,Serial No.
• Label,Serial No.
• Label,Serial No.
• Label,Serial No.
• Label,Serial No.
• Label,Serial No.
• Label,Serial No.
• Plate,lmport/ExportUsed On Units Shipped To The UK
• Plate,Mfg Export
• Label,Mfg Export-Used On Units
Shipped From The Netherlands
• Label,PTI-Australia Only
• Label,Safety-Sweden Only
• Label,OBD-Japan Only
• Label,Voltage-USA,Canada
• Label,Voltage- 100V AFE
• Label,Voltage- 200V AFE
• Label,Voltage- 100V EMEA
• Label,Voltage- 200V EMEA
Order Labels Separate by Country
• Label,PTT-Germany Only
• Label,Use Only Cable-English
• Label,Use Only Cable-Canada/French
• Label,Use Only Cable-Spanish
• Label,Use Only Cable-Portuguese
• Label,Use Only Cable-Japanese
• Label,Use Only Cable-Italian
• Label,Use Only Cable-German
Order Labels Separate by Country
• Label,BNC
• Label,Used On Units Shipped To The UK
• Diskette Drive Asm-1.2 Meg-Models 81 R
and 82R only
• Diskette Drive Asm-2.4 Meg-Models 91 R
and 92R only
• Screw,Pan HD-M3 X 8 Long
• Washer, Lock Star- 3.2 10 X 600 X .4T
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
5-7
Assembly 1: (continued)
50
58
VIEW
e
21
I
I
SEE ASM. 2
17
DETAIL _
5-8
3174 Establishment Controller, Models 81R,82R,91R and 92R
VIEW
ct
Asm-
Part
Number
Units
1-12
-13
-13
-14
6168801
83X9668
25F7207
1621150
1
1
1
4
•
•
•
•
-14
1621155
4
•
-14A
-15
-16
-17
-18
-18
-18
-18
-18
-18
-18
1622302
2596291
1624877
73X4060
73X4023
73X4025
73X4029
73X4024
73X4028
73X4027
73X4026
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
•
Index
-18A
-19
-20
-21
1621832
NP
2
NP
Description
Guard,Fan
Fan Asm-Old Style
Fan Asm-New Style
Screw,Slot Pan HD-M3 X 35mm Long
Used on Old Style Fan Asms
Screw,Pan HD-M3 X 40 Long
Used on New Style Fan Asms
Washer,Flat- 3.2 ID X 7 OD X .5 Thk
Clip,Cable
Screw,Pan HD-M4 X 20 Long
Clip,Nut
OverlaY,Ops-English
OverlaY,Ops-Canada/French
Overlay,Ops-Spanish
OverlaY,Ops-Portuguese
OverlaY,Ops-Japanese
OverlaY,Ops-ltalian
Overlay,Ops-German
Order Ops Overlays Separate by Country
Memory Card,2 Meg-Models 91 Rand
92R Only
• Planar Asm
• Screw,Thd Form Hex Wshr HD-M4 X 5 Long
• Mechanical Subassembly
For Detail Breakdown,See Asm 2
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
5-9
Assembly 2: Mechanical Subassembly
12
18
17
tI
//1
1
~/
/
21
24
~
l.-1
25
DETAIL
5-10
3174 Establishment Controller, Models 81R,82R,91R and 92R
e
AsmIndex
Part
Number
2-
Units
NP
Description
Mechanical Subassembly
For Next Higher Assembly,See 1-21
-1
-1A
-1B
-2
-3
73X4045
25F7204
1621832
73X4051
73X4042
1
1
3
1
1
•
•
•
•
•
-4
-5
-5
-6
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-18
-19
1621832
73X4068
25F7458
73X4044
25F8329
1621832
73X4052
73X4048
73X4015
73X4014
73X4043
1621832
83X9651
73X4142
73X4700
1621832
1622346
39F6213
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-19
39F6214
1
-20
-21
-22
-23
1621173
83X9652
73X3759
26F0093
1
4
1
1
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
5606690
1622675
83X9500
73X4049
73X4041
1622681
73X4045
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
Cover,Top
Shield
Screw,Thd Form Hex Wshr HO-M4 X 5 Long
Holder
Bracket,Connection-Models 81 R
and 82R Only
Screw,Thd Form Hex Wshr HO-M4 X 5 Long
Cable Asm,Oiskette-Models 81R and 82R
Cable Asm,Oiskette-Models 91R and 92R
Plenum-Models 81 Rand 82R
Plenum-Models 91 Rand 92R
Screw, Thd Form Hex Wshr HO-M4 X 5 Long
Spacer,Block
Cover,Front
Label,Voltage
Label,Safety
Cover,Power
Screw,Thd Form Hex Wshr HO-M4 X 5 Long
•
•
•
•
•
•
Grommet
Label,Safety
Label,Ground
Screw,Thd Form Hex Wshr HO-M4 X 5 Long
Washer,Lock Star- 4.3 10 X 8 00 X .5T
Card Asm,Power 50/60 Hz 100V
Replace Fuse on Card with SB/T 2.5A
125V WT Only
• Card Asm,Power 50/60 Hz 200V
Replace Fuse on Card with SBIl 1.25A
250V WT Only
• Screw,Pan HO-M3 X 12 Long
• Support
• Cable Asm,Actuator
• Panel Asm,Ops
When Ordering Ops Panel,Order
Overlay Separately By Country
• • Lever-On/Off
• • Screw,Self Tap Hex Wshr HO-M3.5 X 8 Long
•
•
•
•
•
• Card Asm,Ops
• Panel,Ops
Chassis
Screw,Self Tap Hex Wshr HO- 48-2 X 10 Lg
Cover,Base
Chapter 5. Parts Catalog
5-11
!Assembly 3: Cable Assemblies With Component Parts
A,B,C,D
Asm-
Part
Number
Units
3-A
1838484
1
-8
1838587
1
-C
6952299
1
-0
6952301
1
-E
7842140
1
-F
7842142
1
-G
-G
-J
-J
39F7858
6168156
39F7858
6423154
25F8490
25F8491
1
1
1
1
1
1
-J
6423327
1
Index
-H
-H
j5-12
RECEPTACLE
E,F
Description
Attachment Cord,Power(10A/125V)
4.3m Unshielded-USA(Hospital Shield),
See Figure A
Attachment Cord,Power(10A/125V)
1.8m Unshielded-USA(Hospital Shield),
See Figure 8
Attachment Cord,Power(10A/125V)
4.3m Unshielded-AFE/USA.EMEA,
See Figure C
Attachment Cord,Power(10A/125V)
1.8m Unshielded-USA,See Figure 0
Attachment Cord,Power(10A/125V)
Twist Lock, 1.8m UnshieldedUSA,See Figure E
Attachment Cord,Power(10A/125V)
Twist Lock, 1.8m UnshieldedUSA/Canada,See Figure F
Cable Asm-External,X.21 - 6m
Cable Asm-External,X.21 - 12m
Cable Asm-External,EIA - 6m
Cable Asm-External,EIA - 12m
Cable Asm-External,V.35 - 6m,USA and WT
Cable Asm-External,V.35 - 6m France and
Switzerland
Cable Asm-External,V.35 - 12m,USA and WT
3174 Establishment Controller, Models 81R,82R,91R and 92R
Part Number Index
Part
Number
855284
855285
1359009
1621150
1621155
1621171
1621173
1621832
1622302
1622344
1622346
1622675
1622681
1624877
1838484
1838587
25F7204
25F7207
25F7458
25F8329
25F8381
25F8490
, 25F8491
25F8530
2596291
26F0093
39F6213
39F6214
39F7858
5267922
5267923
5267924
5267925
5267926
5267927
5606690
5953429
61X4618
6168156
6168584
6168801
6423154
6423327
65X2932
6952299
, 6952301
72X6058
73X3759
73X3979
AsmIndex
1-5
1-4
1-5A
1-14
1-14
1-11
2-20
1-20
2-18
2-4
2-7
2-13
2-17
1-14A
1-11A
2-18
2-25
2-29
1-16
3-A
3-8
2-1A
1-13
2-5
2-6
1-2
3-J
3-J
1-2
1-15
2-23
2-19
2-19
3-G
3-H
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
2-24
1-58
1-10
3-G
1-1
1-12
3-H
3-J
1-5D
3-C
3-D
1-10
2-22
1-9
Page
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-9
5-9
5-7
5-11
5-9
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-9
5-7
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-9
5-12
5-12
5-11
5-9
5-11
5-11
5-7
5-12
5-12
5-7
5-9
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-11
5-7
5-7
5-12
5-7
5-9
5-12
5-12
5-7
5-12
5-12
5-7
5-11
5-7
Part
Number
73X4013
73X4014
73X4015
73X4016
73X4017
73X4018
73X4019
73X4020
73X4021
73X4022
73X4023
73X4024
73X4025
73X4026
73X4027
73X4028
73X4029
73X4030
73X4031
73X4032
73X4033
73X4034
73X4035
73X4036
73X4039
73X4041
73X4042
73X4043
73X4044
73X4045
73X4048
73X4049
73X4051
73X4052
73X4060
73X4068
73X4142
73X4700
7842140
7842142
83X9500
83X9651
83X9652
83X9668
83X9764
83X9765
AsmIndex
1-7
1-8
2-11
2-10
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-18
1 -18
1-18
1-18
1-2
1-2
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-3
2-28
2-3
2-12
2-6
2-1
2-30
2-9
2-27
2-2
2-8
1-17
2-5
2-15
2-16
3-E
3-F
2-26
2-14
2-21
1-13
1-6A
1-5C
Page
5-7
5-7
5-11
5-11
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-9
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-9
5-7
5-7
Part Number Index
5-13
5-14
3174 Establishment Controller, Models 81R,82R,91R and 92R
IBM Cabling System
Appendix A. IBM Cabling System
IBM Cabling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Terminal Multiplexer Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Model 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Model Interchangeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3299 Cabl i ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Signal Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A. IBM Cabling System
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-4
A-6
A·1
IBM Cabling System
IBM Cabling System
The IBM Cabling System allows customers to interconnect devices within a single building or a group of
buildings located close together. This cabling system uses a star wiring arrangement, which means that
individual cables run from a concentration point to each user's work area. Figure 8-1 shows an example of
a typical cabling system installation.
Note: This appendix is not intended to give full details on the IBM Cabling System. It is here as an aid in
problem determination for the 3174 Establishment Controller. For further details, see to the IBM
Cabling System Planning and Installation Guide, GA27-3361.
Rack
Terminal
Terminal
IBM 3299
Terminal
Multiplexer
Figure
A-2
Power Cord
Coaxial
Cable to
a 3174
Subsystem
Control
Unit
A-1. IBM Cabling System
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
IBM Cabling System
3299 Terminal Multiplexer Reference Information
This section contains information about 3299 Terminal Multiplexers Models 1,2, and, 3 and IBM Cabling
System (ICS) cables that can be used with the 3299. This information is not intended to provide all the
details about 3299s and the IBM Cabling System. It is here as an aid in problem determination for the 3174
Establishment Controller.
The 3299 Terminal Multiplexer attaches to port 0 on the 3174 terminal adapter. The input signals from the
terminal adapter contain addressing to select one of eight possible 3299 output driver/receiver ports. The
distance 3299s are located from the controller depends on the cable media being used and whether the
particular 3299 requi res a balun. See Table A-1.
Table
A-1. 3299 Attached Terminal Cable Lengths
Cable Media
Baluns
Maximum Distance from 3299
Coaxial Cable
None
required
1525 Meters (5000 Feet)
IBM Cabling System Type 1 or 2
Cable
0
1525 Meters (5000 Feet)
IBM Cabling System Type 1 or 2
Cable
1
1000 Meters (3280 Feet)
IBM Cabling System Type 1 or 2
Cable
2
610 Meters (2000 Feet)
IBM Cabling System Type 3 Cable
1
30-274 Meters (100-900 Feet)
IBM Cabling System Type 3 Cable
2
30 - 274 Meters (100 - 900 Feet)
Note: Terminals with the dual-purpose connector (OPC) have the driver/receiver circuitry that does not
require the use of baluns. The OPC connector on these terminals accept coaxial cable and IBM
Cabling System Type 1 and Type 2 cables.
3299 Model 1
The 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Model 1 is packaged in a single box that contains circuitry to multiplex the
data streams of eight terminals onto a single coaxial or twisted pair cable from the 3174. It also increases
the distance that terminals can be located from the 3174 as shown in Table A-1.
3299 Model 2
The 3299 Model 2 is a modified version of the 3299 Model 1. It provides the capability of being attached to
the IBM Cabling System directly either with coaxial cable or IBM data grade twisted pair cables.
Telephone twisted-pair cables (type 3 specified) can also be used although they require an IBM/ROLM
balun. A wrap test can be performed on the 3299 Model 2 that is attached to a 3174. The microcode to
drive this test resides in the 3174.
Appendix A. IBM Cabling System
A-3
IBM Cabling System
3299 Model 3
, The 3299 Model 3 is identical in function to the 3299 Model 2. The primary difference is that it connects
directly to the IBM Cabling System wiring type 3 specified cable (telephone twisted pair). The eight output
ports on the Model 3 are RJ11 type connectors which accept only telephone type-twisted pair (TTP). The
connection to the 3174 is through coaxial cable or IBM Cabling System using a dual purpose connector
(DPC). This connector accepts either a BNC-style connector or an IBM Cabling System connector. A wrap
test can be performed on the 3299 Model 3 that is attached to a 3174. The microcode to drive this test
resides in the 3174.
Note: Only IBM Cabling System type 3 cable is supported from the 3299 Model 3 to a terminal. Flat
telephone wire and stubs (wires that are not terminated) are not supported.
3299 Model Interchangeability
The 3299 is a service exchange center product. Fault isolation and resolution are customer
responsibilities. To improve availability it is recommended to the customer that a minimum number of
spare 3299s should be purchased, depending on the number of 3299s installed. When a customer is
exchanging 3299s during problem determination, the following rules should be followed:
• A 3299 Model 1 can be replaced with a Model 1 or a Model 2
• A 3299 Model 2 can be replaced only with a Model 2.
Note: If coaxial cable is the only cable media being used to connect the terminals to the 3299, then a
3299 Model 2 can be replaced with a Model 1.
• A 3299 Model 3 can only be replaced with a Model 3.
3299 Cabling
Figure A-2 on page A-5 shows the possible subsystem cabling for the 3299 Models 1,2, and 3 with the
different type of cabling media that is supported with and without baluns.
A-4
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
IBM Cabling System
---------,
3174
Terminal
Adapter
OR-OR
00
I
Coax
TP
~I
OR
3299-1
IN
---------
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
OR
I
Coax
TP
I
OR
OR
I
3299-2
Coax
IN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TP
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Coax
TP
I
OR
3299-3
TIP
IN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(Note 1)
B = Balun
TP = Twisted Pair, IBM Cabling System Type 1, 2
TIP = Telephone Twisted Pair, IBM Cabling System Type 3
Note: 1
Figure
Terminals with the new dual-purpose connector (DPC)
have drive receivers that do not require the use of baluns.
A-2. 3299 Cabling
Appendix A. IBM Cabling System
A-5
IBM Cabling System
Device Signal Cable Connectors
With the availability of different types of cable media and cable media connectors, it is important to identify
which type of connectors are being used.
Older 3270 products, such as Model 1 3299s use a standard BNC jack and accept standard BNC connectors
that are used with coaxial cabling or the coax-to-twisted-pair balun. Later 3270 products, such as the 3174,
and some new display products, use the dual-purpose connector (OPC) jack, which is designed to accept
both the coaxial BNC connector and the dual-purpose connector.
The products that use the OPC have two sets of cable media matching circuitry to support the attachment of
coaxial cable or IBM Cabling System cable media. The connector on the cable mechanically connects the
proper impedance matching circuit elements to the product OPC jack.
The BNC and OPC jacks are not easily distinguished; however, there are slight differences. The inner
center conductor insulator on the OPC jack has an additional conductor located in the center. The OPC
cable connector is identified by an insulator tube that extends approximately 5 millimeters (3/16 inch)
beyond the body of the connector. See Figure A-3.
Because of this insulator the OPC connector cannot be connected to a BNC jack; however, a BNC connector
can be connected to a OPC jack.
When swapping device cables it is very important to swap a cable only with another cable that has an
identical connector on the end of the cable.
--'Ob]
BNC
OPC
Figure
A-6
A-3. BNC and DPC Connectors
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Feature
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
X.25 Feature
X.25 Elements
Physical Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packet Level
Logical Link Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packet Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Request (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Call (SVC)
.................................................... .
Call Accepted (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Connected (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Request (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Indication (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Confirmation (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Request (PVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Indication (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Confi rmation (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Request (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Indication (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Confi rmation (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Not Ready (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
............................................... .
Receiver Ready (PVC/SVC)
Diagnostic (PVC/SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switched Vi rtual Ci rcuit (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........................................................ .
Key Functions
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Ready (SVC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnection (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cause and Diagnostic Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exceptional Case Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 SVC States and Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At Dial-Originating Station: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At Other Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing Call in Progress
.................................................
Incoming Call in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.....................................................
Data Ready (In Use)
Disconnect in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...............................................................
Local
X.25 Communication Reminder Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-1
A.~~
r-ealure
Extension Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Key and X.25 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVC Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVC Keys
............................................................
LOCAL Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMM Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of States and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Virtual Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switched Virtual Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X.25 Cause and Diagnostic Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cause Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Indication Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Indication Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Code Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Codes from DCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Codes from DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
8-17
8-17
8-19
8-20
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-26
8-27
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-30
X.2:) l-ealUre
X.25 Feature
The Type 1 Communication and Concurrent Communication Adapter in the 3174 Establishment Controller
enable the 3174 to communicate with host systems through an X.25 network. IBM-defined SNA protocols
are used. The SNA protocols used by the 3174 are identical with existing 3274 SNA attachments. They are
not detailed here. These SNA protocols are described in the 3174 Functional Description, GA23-0218, and
X.25 Operations, GA23-0204.
The International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT) recommendation is that X.25
define an interface between customer data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating
equipment (DCE) to attach DTEs to packet switched data networks (PSDNs).
The definition includes:
Physical Level:
The mechanical, electrical, functional, and procedural characteristics to activate,
maintain, and deactivate physical communication links between DTEs and DCEs.
Link Level:
The link access procedure for interchange of data across communication links between
DTEs and DCEs.
Packet Level:
The packet formats and logical protocols for the exchange of control information and user
data between DTEs and DCEs.
To use the X.25 function, the 3174 must have a 3278, 3279, or similar display station attached.
X.25 Elements
Physical Level
• X.21 leased circuit
• X.21 bis (V.24 or V.35) leased circuit
• CCITT
• Transmission is NRZ (Non-Return to Zero) with clocking externally supplied
• Up to 48 000 bps for 3174 Models 81R and 91R
Link Level
• Link Access Procedure Balanced (LAPB)
• Modulo 8 Link Level Sequence Numbering
Packet Level
•
•
•
•
•
Single virtual circuit (switched or permanent)
Modulo 8 or 128 packet-level sequence numbering
Data packet sizes of 64, 128, 256, or 512 bytes
Packet window sizes of 1 to 7 for modulo 8
Packet window sizes of 1 to 11 for modulo 128
Logical Link Control
One of the following:
• Qualified Logical Link Control (QLLC)
• Physical Services Header (PSH).
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-3
Timers
The timer values listed in Table 8-1 are supplied. These values are derived from the Type 1
communication adapter timers and have an accuracy of the stated values plus or minus 20%.
Table
8-1. X.25 Timer Values
Timer
Value (In Seconds)
5NN
Receive timeout
30
53220
Packet ti meout
200
53221
Transmit failure (write
timeout)
36
501 04
Open timeout
25.6
50602
Tp(T1 )/Np(N2)
Customer-specified values
(configuration responses 450
and 451)
8-4
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Network
This section describes X.25 virtual circuits and logical channels.
Virtual Circuits
A permanent virtual circuit (PVC) may be thought of as a point-to-point SDLC leased line. A switched
virtual circuit (SVC) may be thought of as a point-to-point switched line.
Logical Channels
Each virtual circuit is assigned a logical channel group number (0 -15) and a logical channel number
(1 - 255) by the packet switched data network (PSDN). These two numbers make up the logical channel
identifier (LCID). This LCID may be entered while the 3174 is being configured.
The following logical-channel types may exist:
Permanent channel
Outgoing channel
Incoming channel
Two-way channel
-
Used
Used
Used
Used
for
for
for
for
a PVC dedicated to data transfer between a 3174 and a specific host DTE.
an SVC where only the 3174 can initiate a call.
an SVC where only a remote DTE can initiate a call.
an SVC where either the 3174 or the remote DTE can initiate a call.
Packet Types
The following X.25 packet types are supported by the 3174. The cause and diagnostic codes mentioned in
the descriptions are defined later in this appendix.
Call Request (SVC)
The Call Request packet is transmitted by the 3174 when an X.25 dial operation is performed by the
operator. This packet contains the called number and optional information to match the user's
subscription. The optional information is based on the options selected while configuring the 3174 or on
operator input.
Incoming Call (SVC)
The Incoming Call packet is received by the 3174 as a result of a remote DTE transmitting a Call Request
Packet. The 3174 examines the data in the packet (based on options selected during configuration) to
ensure that it conforms to the information configured or as specified by the display operator via a dial
operation.
Call Accepted (SVC)
The Call Accepted packet is sent by the 3174 after an Incoming Call packet has been received that
conforms to the network facilities specified.
Call Connected (SVC)
The Call Connected packet is received by the 3174 as confirmation that the remote DTE has accepted the
3174's Call Request. The circuit is now in the data-ready state, and SNA protocols may begin.
Appendix 8. X.25 Feature
8-5
Clear Request (SVC)
The Clear Request packet is sent by the 3174 as a result of an X.2S disconnect operation by the operator or
the network (normal circuit termination), or as a result of certain errors detected by the 3174 or the
network. Cause and diagnostic codes are included. If caused by a 3174-detected error, the codes are
logged and displayed by the operator.
Clear Indication (SVC)
The Clear Indication packet is received by the 3174 as a result of a normal clearing sequence, or as a result
of problems detected by the network or the remote DTE. The circuit is stopped, a Clear Confirmation
packet is sent, and nonzero cause and diagnostic codes are logged and displayed to the operator.
Clear Confirmation (SVC)
The Clear Confirmation Packet is sent by the 3174 to acknowledge the receipt of a Clear Indication packet,
or may be received by the 3174 in a network response to Clear Request packet.
Reset Request (PVC)
The Reset Request packet is sent when the 3174 detects certain X.2S errors. Cause and Diagnostic codes
are included and logged. The 3174 then attempts to reopen the circuit. The Reset Request packet is not
sent during normal PVC operation wherein the 3174 remains connected to the circuit/link until powered off.
A Reset Request packet is sent as part of a LOCAL key operation when the circuit is connected, or upon
detection of certain X.2S network error conditions. The SNA layers must be reactivated via a QSM (SNRM),
ACTPU, ACTLU sequence.
Reset Indication (PVC/SVC)
The Reset Indication packet is received by the 3174 as a result of problems detected by the network or the
remote DTE. The circuit is stopped, and the error condition is logged with cause and diagnostic codes.
The SNA layers must be reactivated via a QSM (SNRM), ACTPU, ACTLU sequence.
Reset Confirmation (PVC/SVC)
The Reset Confirmation packet is transmitted by the 3174 to acknowledge receipt of a Reset Indication
packet, or the Reset Confirmation packet may be received by the 3174 in confirmation of a Reset Request
packet.
Restart Request (PVC/SVC)
The Restart Request packet is sent when the 3274 is closing the link because it has detected certain X.2S
errors, or when a LOCAL key has been accepted. The Restart Request packet is also sent when an
open-link operation is performed. Open-link operations are performed when:
• A 3174 IML is performed.
• Local mode has been entered and the COMM key is pressed.
• The link has been closed because of an error condition.
In this event, the 3174 immediately attempts to open the link. Cause and diagnostic codes are included and
logged. When the open-link operation occurs because of error conditions, the codes and the
Communication Reminder indicator are displayed.
8-6
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
A.~::»
r-ealUre
Restart Indication (PVC/SVC)
When the Restart Indication packet is received, the 3174 responds with a Restart Confirmation packet, shuts
down the link, notifies the operator by displaying an indicator with cause and diagnostic codes, and logs
the error.
Restart Confirmation (PVC/SVC)
When the 3174 has sent a Restart Request packet as a result of attempting to initialize packet level
operation, receipt of a Restart Confirmation packet Signals the completion of initialization. The 3174 sends
a Restart Confirmation packet whenever a Restart Indication packet is received from the DTE.
Data (PVC/SVC)
The Data packet is used to transmit and receive data once a circuit has been established.
Receiver Not Ready (PVC/SVC)
When the 3174 receives a Receiver Not Ready packet, the 3174 stops transmission until a Receiver Ready
is received. The 3174 does not send a Receiver Not Ready packet.
Receiver Ready (PVC/SVC)
The Receiver Ready packet is sent by the 3174 in response to any packet that is received unless an
outgoing data packet is ready for transmission. Receipt of a Receiver Ready packet indicates that
transmission by the 3174 may continue.
Diagnostic (PVC/SVC)
The Diagnostic packet contains diagnostic information and is received when a Reset, Clear, or Restart
packet is not appropriate. The cause and diagnostic information is logged, and no further action is taken.
Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC)
The X.25 SVC capability of the 3174 Establishment Controller permits the operator of an attached 3178,
3278,3279, or similar display station to connect the 3174 and its attached terminals to a remote host system
through an X.25 packet switched network. Note that this capability is not supported on distributed function
terminals, such as the 3290 Information Panel.
The functions necessary to connect the 3174 to the remote host are invoked by operator actions at the
keyboard (and incoming calls). The status of the 3174 with respect to the network is conveyed to the
operator with indicators in the operator information area of the display screen.
To support X.25 SVC functions, additional key functions and indicators are provided at the display. These
key functions are a subset of the X.21 Switched feature. The indicators (symbols in the operator
information area) are the same as those used in the X.21 Switched feature except that the indicators
containing call progress signals in,the X.21 feature are redefined and expanded to contain cause and
diagnostic codes.
Note: Operator information area indicators are defined in the attached display station's problem
determination guide.
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-7
X.25 Feature
Key Functions
•
•
•
Extension Key
DISC (disconnect) key
COMM (communication) key
•
•
•
DIAL key
LOCAL key
LOAD MATRIX key
The device attached to port 0 normally has access to the full complement of X.25 Switched function keys.
The LOAD MATRIX key function is assigned to port 0 only. The other keys may optionally be assigned to all
ports, or certain keys may be deleted, depending on how the 3174 was configured.
See Figure C-4 for details.
Indicators
The following indicators are displayed in the Reminder Area of the operator information area of the display
screen:
•.
•
•
•
Call Ready
Dial In (other terminals, same controller)
Incoming Call in progress
Local (Z 599)
•
•
•
•
Dial In (dialing terminal)
Outgoing Call in progress
Disconnect in progress
X.25 Communication Reminder.
The following indicator is displayed in the Do Not Enter area:
• Operator Communication Check.
The following indicator is displayed in the Readiness and System Connection area:
• In Use (N).
The following indicator is displayed in the Shifts and Modes area:
•
Extension Mode.
X.25 States
• Call Ready - Circuit is in the disconnected state. It is possible to attempt a connection.
• Local- Link and circuit are disconnected. It is impossible to perform a connecting operation.
• In-Use - Circuit is connected and ready for data.
• Incoming Call or Outgoing Call - Connection operation is in progress.
• Disconnection in progress - Disconnection operation is in progress.
• Error - Error states are displayed by the Machine Check and Communication Check indicators.
Normal Operating Procedure
All the X.25 SVC operations are performed using the display station keyboard, screen, and the operation
information area of the screen. The indicators that are displayed in the operator information area are
defined in the attached display station problem determination guide.
Note: Because there are not enough key positions to execute each X.25 Switched operation by a single
keystroke, a key called the Extension key is defined. To execute any of the X.25 function keys (and
the LOAD MATRIX key), the sequence is:
1. Press and hold the AL T key.
2. Press the Extension key (> ).
8-8
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Feature
3. Release the ALT and Ex~ension keys.
4. Press the desired X.25 function key.
Except for this section, pressing the ALT and Extension keys is not mentioned in this manual. Thus,
"press the DIAL key" means press the ALT and Extension keys and press the DIAL key.
When the X.25 function is used, the LOAD MATRIX KEY function is moved from position 38 to position 15.
The X.25 function keys and positions are:
•
•
•
•
•
DIAL key (position 4)
LOCAL key (position 5)
COMM (Communication) key (position 6)
DISC (Disconnect) key (position 8)
LOAD MATRIX KEY (Load Host Print Matrix; port 0 only) (position 15).
Key layout is defined later in this appendix.
Indicators to show X.25 states are displayed in the Reminder area of the operator information area. The
Input Inhibited indicator (X) is displayed per normal 3174 function. The In Use indicator (N) is displayed in
location 7 of the Readiness and System Connection Area.
X.25 state indicators disappear while a Communication Check Reminder indicator is displayed.
The Operator Communication Check indicator has a higher priority than the Communication Check
indicator and a lower priority than the Machine Check indicator.
Call Ready (SVC only)
• After power is on and the link is operational, the Call Ready indicator is displayed.
• The DIAL key, LOCAL key, or an Incoming Call is accepted when the Call Ready indicator is displayed ..
When the DIAL key is pressed in call ready state, the Dial indicator replaces the Call Ready indicator. The
DIAL key initiates keyboard reset and clear functions simultaneously. The reset function restores the
keyboard, repositions the cursor to home, goes to the base character set, and restores all input-inhibit
conditions except:
•
•
•
•
•
Wait
Device busy
Device very busy
Device not functional
Security key.
If the keyboard is not reset, the DIAL key performs no function, and extension mode is exited.
The dial screen is displayed. (See "Dial Mode Screen" on page 8-20 for a definition of the dial screen.)
The appropriate information is entered by the operator.
After the information is keyed in, the ENTER key is pressed. If the data is successfully validated by the
3174, the data entered by the operator is stored, a Call Request packet is assembled and transmitted by the
3174, and the Outgoing Call in Progress indicator replaces the dial indicator.
If the ENTER key has not been pressed, or if the entered data was not valid, the information stored by the
last successful DIAL/ENTER key operation may be retrieved by preSSing the DIAL key again. When dial
mode has been entered by a display station, an attempted entry of dial mode at any other display station is
inhibited and the Operator Communication Check indicator is displayed.
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-9
X.25 Feature
When in dial mode, the DISC key on other terminals operates normally.
Dial mode operations are shown in Figure 8-1.
Pressing the CLEAR key whi!e in dial mode causes the input fields on the screen to be restored from the
previously stored values. Once there is no connection with a host application, no AID-generating
operation is attempted.
When the online test 0 (/0) is directed to a terminal in dial mode, dial mode is reset, call-ready mode is set,
the terminal enters test mode, and the test is executed.
Action Taken
Symbol
Dialing Terminal
DIAL key
--z-#
Accepted. Display Dial
screen with saved parameters
Rejected.
LOCAL key
~599
Accepted. (See Note.)
Rejected.
COMM key
--z-#
Ignored.
Ignored.
Accepted. (See Note.)
Accepted.
(See Note)
?
?
DISC key
TEST key
ENTER key
TEST
Accepted. Abort Dial In.
-+z.. (if ok)
>C::!: #? or -+z..
Validate input. If OK,
accept ENTER key, update
parameters, initiate outgoing call. (See Note.)
(if not ok)
CLEAR key
Accepted. Restore Dial-In.
PA,PF,
ATTN,
SYS REO keys
Rejected.
Symbol
TEST or - - z - # #
Other Terminals
Accepted.
Rejected.
--z-##
Accepted.
Clear screen.
Rejected.
Note: This indicator is broadcast to all powered terminals.
Figure
8-1. Controller/Terminal Responses in Dial-In State
Data Ready
When the circuit is connected, the Incoming Call or Outgoing Call in Progress indicator is reset and the In
Use indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
Disconnection (SVC)
The DISC key is pressed whenever the operator wants to disconnect the circuit. If there are SNA sessions
active (bound), the 3174 may have been configured so that the first disconnect sequence results in the
display of the Operator Communication Check indicator. This serves as a reminder that there are sessions
active.
If the DISC key sequence is reinitiated with no intervening RESET key action, the 3174 initiate$ a
disconnection from the circuit by sending the appropriate Clear Request packet. If the RESET key is used
to reset the input-inhibited condition, the entire sequence is reset and the next DISC key operation is also
inhibited. DISC keys pressed when no sessions are act!ve initiate an immediate disconnection.
A configuration option ie provided that allows the DISC key to immediately initiate a disconnection
regardless of the status of the LU sessions.
8-10
3174 Models ~1R through ~2~ Maintenance Information
X.25 Feature
Also, any Clear Indication packet received by the 3174 initiates a circuit disconnection and causes the 3174
to send a Clear Confirmation packet. The cause and diagnostic codes from the Clear Indication packet are
displayed in the operator information area.
The disconnect-in-progress state is entered when the DISC key operation is accepted, when a QDISC
packet is received, or when the station is closed because of detected SNA-Ievel errors.
The Call Ready indicator replaces the Disconnect in Progress indicator when the line is successfully
disconnected. If not in dial mode, the screen is unchanged. If in dial mode, the dialing terminal's screen is
cleared and disconnect-in-progress state is entered. Sessions are reset if they exist, and all
session-related indicators, including Online, Ownership, System, and Wait are reset.
The In Use indicator is turned off when disconnection is completed. A new Call Request packet is required
to reestablish the connection.
Cause and Diagnostic Indicators
Cause and Diagnostic indicators are displayed in the operator information area to aid in user problem
determination for abnormal disconnection. They are displayed with the Call Ready indicator when cause
and/or diagnostic codes are received by or transmitted from the 3174 because of an error condition. They
are not displayed when the 3174 operator causes a normal disconnect via the DISC key function. Cause
and diagnostic codes are also displayed with the X.25 Communication Reminder indicator and indicate the
cause and diagnostic codes from a Restart/Reset/Clear packet transmitted or received from the 3174.
Note: These codes are CCITT-recommended and IBM-architected. However, these codes may not apply,
or be common, to all networks.
Incoming Call
Incoming Call Request packets are accepted in call-ready state, and the Incoming Call in Progress
indicator is displayed. This indicator is reset when the circuit is connected.
Local Mode
In local mode, incoming calls and all outgoing requests are rejected. The 3174 is disconnected from the
link.
The LOCAL key is accepted in the call-ready state and the Local Mode indicator is displayed on all the
display station screens.
The COMM key is pressed to reset local mode. The call-ready state is entered, and the link is initialized.
Exceptional Case Handling
The operator should take action as follows:
1. Call Ready indicator with C&D codes or X.25 Communication Reminder.
For a dial request, this indicator means the request has failed with the network reason specified by the
C&D codes. In all cases, the operator should consult the appropriate manual for a recommended
recovery action for each C&D code.
2. Communication Reminder indicator while in X.25 SVC mode.
An operator can retry the call, if appropriate, and can determine the state of the connection by the In
Use indicator. If the In Use indicator is not displayed, the COMM key can be used to reset the
Communication Reminder indicator. The X.25 keys that are allowed in a particular X.25 state (that is,
do not result in display of the Operator Communication Check indicator) reset the Communication
Appendix 8. X.25 Feature
8-11
X.2S Feature
Reminder indicator. If the error persists, the problem determination manual procedures identified by
the particular status code should be followed. See the 3174 Status Codes.
3. Machine Check.
This means an error was detected in the 3174 subsystem. The same action as for the base 3174 should be
followed.
No unique machine-check numbers are generated.
X.2S SVC States and Key Operation
This section defines how to treat a key when it is pressed in X.25 SVC-specific states. Figure 8-2
summarizes these key operations.
In this section, keys other than the following are called "other" keys:
•
•
•
•
DIAL, LOCAL, DISC, and COMM keys
AID keys (The ATTN key is treated in the same way as the AID keys in this section.)
TEST key
SYS REQ key (The SYS REQ key is treated as in the base machine.)
Operation
Status
ENTER Key Pressed
(Dial In complete)
DIAL Key Pressed
Call Ready
Accepted. 1
--z- # ?or--z- # .
Accepted.
-+z.
Accepted.
Accepted.
---z-
1
Call Ready
with CaD Codes
Accepted.
? or--z- • •
--z-
DISC Key Pressed
Ignored.
2
•
-+z.
Outgoing Call
in Process
Rejected.
)C ~
---z-
Incoming Call
in Process
Rejected.
Accepted.
)C ~---z-~
--z- -+z.
)C --z- .",
)c*--z-
Accepted.
~ ~--z--+z.
Rejected.
Rejected.
Ignored.
)C ~ --z.. --z..
)C ~ --z.. ---z-
--z..
Rejected.
Rejected.
)C ~ --z.. ~ 599
)C
Rejected.
)C ~ ---z- ~ 599
Data Ready
Disconnect
in Process
Local
X.25
Communication
Reminder
Rejected.
Rejected.
Rejected.
)C~---z-
~
Rejected.
)C:J;:--z.. ~ XCCDD
---zAccepted.
Rejected.
*---z- ~
---z-
---z-
599
Rejected.
Rejected.
)C
)C
1
'= --z.. ~ XCCDD
2See Figure C-2 for indicators displayed by Dialing terminal and Other terminals.
Reset cause and diagnostic (C&D) codes.
Figure
8-2 (Part 1 of 3). Key Operations during X.25 States
8-12
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
*
-z- ~ XCCDD
X.2S Feature
Operation
3
Status
LOCAL Key Pressed
AID Key Pressed
COMM Key Pressed
Call Ready
Accepted.
~ 599
Rejected.
Ignored.
K-f-z...
-z...
Call Ready
with C&D Codes
Accepted.
~ 599
Rejected.
)C-f~ XCCDD
Accepted.
Outgoing Call
in Process
)CRe~cted.
-z...-+z.
Rejected.
Ignored.
~-f -+z.
--z-
Incoming Call
in Process
Rejected.
Rejected.
Ignored.
)C :J.: -z... 4---z..
~- f 4---z..
-z...
Data Ready
Rejected.
Same as base machine.
Ignored.
Rejected.
Rejected.
Ignored.
)C :J.: --z- -z...
)C-f
--z-
Ignored.
~ 599
Rejected.
Disconnect
in Process
Local
X.25
Communication
Reminder
)C:J.:-z...
4
-z...
)C-f
)C-f
~599
Accepted.
~ 506
*
Accepted.
Rejected.
Rejected.
~ 599
)C-f ~XCCDD
)C
-z... ~ XCCDD
3
4Reset Operator Communication Check indicator
Reset C&D codes.
Figure
B-2 (Part 2 of 3). Key Operations during X.25 States
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-13
X.25 Feature
Operation
Status
Print 10
Extension
TEST Key PA Key
Key
Pressed Pressed Pressed
PF Key
Pressed
SYS REO
DATA Key
ATTN Key Key
Pressed
Pressed Pressed
Abort
Print 10.
Abort
Print 10.
Abort
Print 10.
Abort
Print 10.
Abort
Print 10.
Abort
Print 10.
~
TEST
M?+
M?+
M-f
Accepted.
LOCAL Key CLEAR Key
Pressed
Pressed
Not Aborted
Not Aborted
Data Key =
Numeric:
Printer Status Accepted.
Abort
Print 10.
M?+
o-cl_
Alpha:
Printer Status
o-cALPHA_
Dead-key
operation
in process
Abort
Dead key.
Abort
Dead key.
See Note
See Note
~
TEST
M:J:+?
M:J:+?
See Note
a,e,i,o,u
Accepted.
Not a,e,i,o,u
Accepted.
Accepted.
M:J:+?
Accepted.
M:J:+?
M:J:--z...
Accepted.
See Note
X.25
Communication
Reminder
Accepted. Enter Test
mode.
~
TEST
M-f
~
XCCDD
Accepted.
~ = Extension
See Figure C-2 for Indicators displayed by Dialing terminal and Other terminals.
Note: Accent symbols shown (') may be any valid accent symbols, for example,
I
,
•
A
Operation
Extension
Key
Pressed
Extension
Exit
Extension
mode.
Dial
Accepted.
Status
~
Test
)C -f TEST
~
TEST Key
Pressed
PA,PF,ATTN
or SYS REO
Key Pressed
DATA Keys,
LOCAL Key,
or CLEAR Key
Pressed
Exit
Extension
mode.
Exit
Extension
mode.
Exit
Extension
mode.
)C?~
)C?~
)C ? ~
Abort 5
Dialln.
Rejected.5
Accepted.5
--z... _ ? or --z... __
--z... _ ? or --z...
TEST
Exit Test
mode.
)C-f
Accepted.
)C -f TEST
= Extension
See Figure C-2 for indicators displayed by Dialing terminal and Other terminals.
Figure
8-2 (Part 3 of 3). Key Operations during X.25 States
8-14
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
TEST
--
X.2S Feature
Indicators
Call Ready
While the Call Ready indicator is displayed:
• DIAL, LOCAL, TEST, and "other" keys are accepted.
• DISC and COMM keys are ignored.
• AID keys are rejected with 'X - l' indicator.
If the C&D codes are displayed with the Call Ready indicator:
• DISC and COMM keys clear the C&D codes, and all the "other" keys are treated in the same way as
above.
Dial In
While the Dial In indicator is displayed:
At Dial-Originating Station:
• DIAL, LOCAL, DISC, TEST, ENTER, and "other" keys are accepted
• COMM key is ignored.
• Aid keys (except ENTER and CLEAR) are rejected with 'X - l' indicator.
At Other Stations
•
•
•
•
•
DIAL and LOCAL keys are rejected with Operator Communication Check Indicator.
DISC key is ignored.
COMM key is ignored.
TEST key and "other" keys are accepted.
AID keys are rejected with 'X -' indicator.
Outgoing Call in Progress
While Outgoing Call in Progress indicator is displayed:
•
•
•
•
DISC, TEST, and "other" keys are accepted.
DIAL AND LOCAL keys are rejected with Operator Communication Check indicator.
COMM key is ignored.
AID keys are rejected with 'X -1' indicator.
Incoming Call in Progress
While Incoming Call in Progress indicator is displayed:
•
•
•
•
DISC, TEST, and "other" keys are accepted.
DIAL and LOCAL keys are rejected with Operator Communication Check indicator.
COMM key is ignored.
AID keys are rejected with 'X - l' indicator.
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-15
X.2S Feature
Data Ready (In Use)
The In Use indicator is displayed in location 7. No indicator is displayed in the Reminder area when the
virtual circuit connection with the X.25 network has been established.
•
•
•
•
AID, TEST, DISC, and "other" keys are accepted.
DISC and COMM keys are ignored.
DIAL and LOCAL keys are rejected with Operator Communication Check indicator.
AID keys are rejected with "X_f' indicator.
Disconnect in Progress
While the Disconnect in Progress indicator is displayed:
•
•
•
•
TEST and "other" keys are accepted.
DISC and COMM keys are ignored.
DIAL and LOCAL keys are rejected with Operator Communication Check indicator.
AID keys are rejected with "X - f' indicator.
Local
The Communication Reminder indicator with the number of '599' is displayed in local mode and:
• COMM, TEST, and "other" are accepted.
• LOCAL key is ignored.
• DISC and DIAL keys are rejected with Operator Communication Check indicator.
• AID keys are rejected with "X - f' indicator.
X.2S Communication Reminder Indicator
The X.25 Communication Reminder indicator is displayed when the link is closed because of the
transmission or receipt of a restart packet. In SVC applications, it is replaced with the Call Ready indicator
with C&D codes when the link has been successfully opened. While the Communication Reminder
indicator is displayed, all X.25 keys, except LOCAL, are rejected with the Operator Communication Check
indicator displayed. The LOCAL key puts the 3174 in local mode.
In PVC connections, the indicator is displayed until the circuit is successfully reopened.
8-16
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Feature
Extension Key
Extension Mode
Extension mode is defined to create additional key functions for X.2S Switched operation on the keyboards
of 3178, 3278, 3279, and other compatible attached display stations.
1. Extension mode is entered at any time, except during test mode, a machine check, or a no-security-key
condition, by pressing the Extension key.
2. > is displayed in the Shifts and Modes area of the operator information area while in extension mode.
3. Pressing the Extension key while in extension mode resets extension mode.
4. The RESET key operates normally in extension mode but does not reset extension mode.
5. The ALT key is treated as a NOP (ignored).
6. While in extension mode at an authorized display station, if any X.2S key other than LOAD MATRIX,
ALT, or RESET is pressed, the Retry indicator is displayed and extension mode is reset.
7. When online test 0 (/0) is directed to a terminal in extension mode, extension mode is reset, the
terminal enters test mode, and the test is executed.
8. When extension mode is exited, the shift indicators are restored to the state they were in before the
Extension key was pressed.
9. Pressing the Extension key is ignored when the terminal is attached to a 3174 port that is not
configured to support the Extension key function.
Figure 8-3 summarizes extension mode.
Appendix 8. X.25 Feature
8-17
X.2S Feature
Dial and
Device Busy,
Device Very Busy,
or Device Not
Functional
-
M ?
+
-
Any state except:
Extension key
(Screen is not cleared.
Reset keyboard status.)
.'
It
RESET key,
ALT key
(normal
function)
Dial Mode
..I
I Dial
I
+ I-
• No security key
• Test mode
• Machine check
Extension key
I
M?
Extension mode *
I
and Not Device Busy,
and Not Device Very Busy,
and Not Device Not
Functional
X.25 function keys
,
X.25 function
'Indicate '~ in the shift status field of the operator information area.
Figure
8-3. Extension Mode Definition
8-18
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
"Other"
keys
X.2S Feature
Extension Key and X.2S Function Keys
Figure 8-4 defines key positions for the Extension key and the X.25 function keys.
Note: These key functions are available on attached 3278s, 3279s, and similar display stations. They are
not available on distributed function terminals, such as a 3290 Information Panel.
See
Note 2
See
Note 1
See
Note 3
B
1
19
37
2
20
4
3
22
39
38
15
8
7
6
MATRIX
-- - -PF1
- - -PF2
-PF3 PF4 PF5
21
--
5
.~ LOAD
24
23
43
42
41
40
17
18
35
36
53
54
70
71
PF12
33
26
25
16
I
34
51
52
~
55
56
57
58
59
60
68
61
69
I
72
~
74
75
76
Label (decal) on keyface identifies Extension key.
Notes:
1. Each of these labels (decals) is applied by the customer to the display station keyboard. The labels are applied as
shown next to the key that assumes the corresponding X.2S function following the pressing of the Extension key.
2. The DISC key is separated from the other keys by at least one key space to prevent its being pressed in error.
3. The LOAD MATRIX key function is available only at a display station attached to port 0 of the control unit.
Figure
8-4. Extension Key and X.25 Function Keys
Appendix 8. X.25 Feature
8-19
X.2S Feature
Dial Mode Screen
Figure 8-5 shows the layout of the display screen when dial mode is entered. The screen displays the dial
number and the other facility control fields set to the defaults as selected during configuration (or as
overridden by the operator with a previous dial operation).
Any values that require change can be updated by the operator. When the screen contains the correct
values, the ENTER key is pressed to initiate appropriate action by the 3174.
A configuration option is provided either to display HNAD only or to display all fields shown below on the
dial screen. The default is to display HNAD only.
The cursor is initially positioned in the first character location of the HNAD input field.
HNAD
@123
CID
NPKT
NWND
RPOA
CUG
QLLC
TCLS
DPKT
DWND
OOPT
IOPT
I/O
@A1500000@
@1@
@O7@
@1898@
@32@
@1@
@9@
@1@
@O2@
@OOOOOOOO@
@OOOO0000@
@O@
123
789
@
Where: @ @ delineates an entry field, the rest of the screen is protected.
Entry is validated. If the number or value is invalid,
Input Inhibited and Wrong number indicators are displayed
and the cursor is positioned in the first character location of
the invalid field.
Figure
8-5. Dial Mode Screen
The input fields shown in Figure 8-5 are defined as follows:
HNAD
• This 15-character field contains the host network (DTE) address.
• The initial value of this field is set during the configuration procedure (question 423).
Note: A configuration option is provided to inhibit display of the following fields. If this configuration
option is used, the dial mode screen will contain only the HNAD field. Display HNAD field only is the
default for the configuration option.
8-20
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Feature
CID
•
•
•
•
This field contains the CID (connection identifier or network password).
Input is validated to be 0 - 9, A - F, blank, or nulls.
For security, this is a nondisplay field.
The value of this field may be preset during the configuration procedure (question 452).
NPKT
• This field contains the packet size to be negotiated toward.
• The value of this field is preset during the configuration procedure (question 430).
NWND
• This field contains the window size to be negotiated toward.
• The value of this field is preset during the configuration procedure (question 432).
RPOA
• This field contains the recognized private operating agency (RPOA) facility ID and is used to select the
intermediate network that is to be used between two public networks.
• RPOA may be preset during the configuration procedure (question 442).
CUG
• This field allows the closed user group (CUG) facility to be included in an outgoing Call Request packet.
• CUG may be preset during the configuration procedure (question 441).
QLLC
• This field defines whether QLLC (Qualified Logical Link Control) or PSH (Physical Service Header)
logical link control protocols are used. QLLC is to be used by all "new" IBM products with integrated
X.25 support. PSH support will allow the 3174 to communicate with "old" X.25 equipment, namely, the
equipment attaching to the network via the Network Interface Adapter (NIA) box.
o = PSH
1 = QLLC
• Logical link control may be preset during the configuration procedure (question 403).
TCLS
• This field defines the Throughput Class value which the 3174 is to use in throughput class negotiation.
• TCLS may be preset during the configuration procedure (question 440).
DPKT
• This field contains the default packet size.
• The value of this field is preset during the configuration procedure (question 434).
DWND
• This field contains the default window size.
• The value of this field is preset during the configuration procedure (question 435).
OOPT
• This field allows the operator to override the outgoing call options selected during the configuration
procedure (question 421).
• If the circuit type (question 401) specified during configuration is incoming call only, this field is not
displayed.
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-21
X.2S Feature
10PT
•
This field allows the operator to override the incoming call options (question 420) specified during the
configuration procedure.
• If the circuit type (question 401) specified during configuration is outgoing call only, this field is not
displayed.
1/0
•
•
If the circuit type (question 401) specified during configuration was a two-way call, this input field
allows the operator to indicate whether the information on the dial screen should be used (when the
ENTER key is pressed) to:
1. Initiate an outgoing call (value = 0), or
2. Only store the (changed) values either to allow an incoming call or as future reference for an
outgoing call (value = 1).
If the circuit type (question 401) specified during configuration is incoming call only or outgoing call
only, this field is not displayed.
8-22
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Feature
Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC)
PVC Indicators
An additional indicator is required to convey the network or 3174-supplied cause and diagnostic codes that
accompany reset or restart packets. These codes provide the reason for the link's being closed. This
indicator is called the X.25 Communication Reminder. When a PVC circuit has been connected, the In Use
indicator is displayed in the operator information area.
Note: The operator information area cause codes and diagnostic codes are described under "X.25 Cause
and Diagnostic Codes" on page 8-26.
PVC Keys
Only two of the keys defined earlier in this appendix, "X.25 SVC States and Key Operations," are provided
for PVC connections. They are the LOCAL and COMM keys. Optionally, the function of these keys may be
deleted from the 3174 via configuration.
LOCAL Key
The LOCAL key allows a display operator to disconnect the 3174 from the X.25 link. When the LOCAL key is
pressed, the 3174 determines whether any SNA sessions are active. The 3174 may have been configured
so that, if there are no sessions active, the 3174 will immediately initiate a close-link sequence. If there are
SNA sessions active, the Operator Communication Check and Input Inhibited indicators are displayed. If
the LOCAL key is pressed a second time without the RESET key being pressed, the close-link sequence is
initiated. If the RESET key is pressed to restore the keyboard, two consecutive LOCAL key sequences are
required. A configuration option is provided that allows the first pressing of the LOCAL key always to
perform the close-link sequence. The initiation of a close-link sequence displays the Local indicator.
COMM Key
Pressing the COMM key when in local mode causes the 3174 to display status code 506 (may be displayed
for only a split second and not be seen by the operator) and try to reopen the link and circuit. When not in
local mode, the COMM key is ignored.
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-23
X.2S Feature
Summary of States and Indicators
Primary Virtual Circuit
Figure 8-6 provides a summary of PVC states and indicators.
•
(States Transitions)
Indicators
Adopter
(A)
IML
Link
Open
Adopter
Open
ClosAd
None
-.
SNA
SNRMd
Circuit
Open
(8)
(C)
CRI506-01
CRI 506-01
-..
(0) SNRM
..
CRI 505-01 -
-...
I
-.. MCI 331-01
331-02
331-03
-...
CRI
X25CRI
(E)
X25CRI XCCDD or
...
-
CRI nnn
(F)
CRI nnn or
CRI 599-01
X25CRI XCCDD
(G)
•
MCI 331-01, 02, 03, 381-20
Communication Reminder indicator (nnn)
X.25 Communication Reminder indicator
MCI
SNRM
Figure
8-6. PVC States and Indicators
8-24
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Machine Check indicator
Set Norma I Response Mode
X.2S Feature
Switched Virtual Circuit
Figure 8-7 provides a summary of SVC states and indicators.
•
(States Transitions)
Indicators
Adapter
Closed
(A)
IML
Link
Open
Adapter
Open
None
-
(C)
(8)
CRI506-01
Call Ready
Circuit
Open
SNA
SNRMd
--
..
(0) SNRM
CR1505-01 •
...
(E)
.-
I
-... MCI 331-01
331-02
331-03
-...
CRI
X25CRI
MCI
Figure
...
Call Ready (XCCDD) or
(F)
X25CRI XCCDD
or CRI 599-01
or CRI nnn
(G)
MCI 331-01,02,03,381-20
Communication Reminder indicator (nnn)
X.25 Communication Reminder indicator
Machine Check indicator
Call Ready
SNRM
'"
CRI nnn
'II",
..
..
...
Call Ready indicator with C&D codes (XCCDD) when
C&D codes are not 0
Set Normal Response Mode
B-7. SVC States and Indicators
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-25
X.2S Feature
X.25 Cause and Diagnostic Codes
This section defines the following X.2S cause and diagnostic codes.
Note: Networks may use their own values for the cause and diagnostic codes. The ones shown in the
figures in this section are taken from the November 1980 CCITT recommendation for X.2S networks.
Cause Codes
Clear Indication Packet
Table 8-2 lists the cause codes received from data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) for a Clear
Indication packet.
Table
8-2. Cause Codes Received from a OCE (Clear
Packet)
Hex Code
Meaning
00
OTE-originated 1
01
Number busy
09
Out of order
11
Remote procedure error
19
Reverse-charging acceptance not
subscribed
21
Incompatible destination
29
Fast-select acceptance not subscribed
03
Invalid facility request
OB
Access barred
13
Local procedure error
05
Network congestion
00
Not obtainable
15
RPOA out of order
lWhen the cause code is X'OO', the diagnostic code field has been passed through the network from the
remote DTE's original Clear Request. The diagnostic code is then as listed in Table 8-6 on page 8-29
provided the remote DTE is an IBM (SNA) DTE.
8-26
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Feature
Reset Indication Packet
Table 8-3 lists the cause codes received from data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) for a Reset
Indication packet.
Table
B-3. Cause Codes Received from a DCE (Reset
Packet)
Hex Code
Meaning
00
DTE-originated!
01
Out of order 2
03
Remote procedure error
05
Local procedure error
07
Network congestion
09
Remote DTE operational 2
OF
Network OperationaF
11
Incompatible destination
lWhen the cause code is X'OO', the diagnostic code field has been passed through the network from the
remote DTE's original Clear Request, Reset Request, or Restart Request packet. The diagnostic code is
then as listed in Table 8-6 on page 8-29, provided the remote DTE is an IBM (SNA) DTE.
2Applicable to permanent virtual circuits only.
Restart Indication Packet
Table 8-4 lists the cause codes received from data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) for a Restart
Indication packet.
Table
B-4. Cause Codes Received from a DCE (Restart
Packet)
Hex Code
Meaning
01
03
07
Local procedure error
Network congestion
Network operational
Appendix B. X.25 Feature
8-27
X.2S Feature
Diagnostic Code Modifiers
Table 8-5 lists the diagnostic code modifiers.
Table
8-5. Diagnostic Code Modifiers
Hex Code
Meaning
00
No additional information provided. See diagnostic code.
01
Calling DTE address is expected, but none is included.
02
Calling DTE address does not match configured value.
03
Facilities other than RPOA are included when configuring indicates that none is expected.
04
Reserved.
05 *
Packet facility is included but is not configured.
06
Incoming CUG does not match configured value.
07
Call requests reverse charging, but the function is not configured.
08
Call requests reverse charging not requested, but the function is not configured.
09 *
Call included window size facility, but the window size facility is not configured.
10
CID is to be validated, but none is included in the Call Request packet.
11
CID is included but does not match the configured value.
12
Protocol ID is not included.
13
Protocol ID is incorrect.
14
CUG facility is configured but is not included in the Call Request packet.
15
Throughput class facility is configured but not included.
16
Reserved.
17
Reverse-charge facility is configured but not included.
* Configured
B-28
=
Either configured value or value entered from the Dial screen.
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Diagnostic Codes from DCE
Table 8-6 lists the diagnostic code fields received from data circuit-terminating equipment (DeE).
Table
8-6. Diagnostic Code Fields Received from a DCE
Hex Code
Meaning
00
01
02
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
18
1C
1D
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
28
2C
30
31
32
33
34
40
41
42
43
44
50
51
52
No additional information
Invalid P{S)
Invalid P(R)
Packet type invalid - general
R1
For state:
R2
133
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
D1
D2
D3
Packet not allowed - general
Unidentifiable
Call on one-way logical channel
Invalid packet type on PVC
Packet on unassigned logical channel
Reject not subscribed to
Packet too short
Packet too long
Invalid GFI
Restart with nonzero GFI
Packet type incompatible with facility
Unauthorized interrupt confirmation
Unauthorized interrupt
Timer expired - general
Incoming call
Clear indication
Reset indication
Restart indication
Call setup problem - general
Faci Iity code not allowed
Facility parameter not allowed
Invalid called - address
Invalid calling - address
Call clearing problem - general
Nonzero address lengths field
Nonzero facility lengths field
Appendix 8. X.25 Feature
8-29
Diagnostic Codes from OlE
Table B-7 lists the diagnostic code fields generated by IBM (SNA) data terminal equipment (DTE).
Table
B-7 (Page 1 of 2). Diagnostic Code Fields Generated by IBM
(SNA) DTE
Hex Code
Meaning
00
Normal initialization or termination
Invalid LLC type
Invalid Packet type - general
For state:
R1
R2
R3
P1
P2
P3
P4
OC
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
10
20
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
34
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
69
AO
A1
A2
A3
A4
AS
A6
A7
8-30
P5
P6
P7
01
02
03
DCE timer expired - general
Incoming call
Clear indication
Reset indication
Restart indication
DTE timer expired - general
Call request
Clear request
Reset request
Restart request
QLLC error - general
Undefined C-field
Unexpected C-field
Missing I-field
Undefined I-field
I-field too long
QFRMR received
Invalid QLLC header
Data received in non-data state
Timeout condition
PSH error - general
Sequence error
PS header too short
PSH format invalid
Command undefined
Invalid PSH protocol
Data received in non-data state
Timeout condition
Packet not allowed
Invalid M-bit packet sequence
Invalid packet type received
Invalid packet on PVC
Unassigned logical channel number
Diagnostic packet received
Packet too short
Packet too long
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.2S Feature
Table
B-7 (Page 2 of 2). Diagnostic Code Fields Generated by IBM
(SNA) DTE
Hex Code
Meaning
A8
A9
Invalid GFI
Not identifiable
Not supported
Invalid P(S)
Invalid P(R)
Invalid D bit received
Invalid Q bit received
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
C1
C2
C3
C4
CS
DO
D1
D2
EO
E1
E2
3174-specific codes (see Note)
Termination pending
Channel inoperative
Unauthorized interrupt confirmation
Unauthorized interrupt request
PVC resource not available
Resources - general
Buffers depleted
PIU too long
Local procedure error - general
Packet received with LC not equal to a
Restart or Diagnostic packet received with LC not equal to
a
E3
E4
ES
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
Fa
Incoming call received on wrong LC
Facility not subscribed
Invalid packet for LC equal to a
Facility parameters not supported
Facility not supported
Unexpected calling DTE
Invalid D bit received
Reset indication on virtual call
Invalid protocol identifier
Connection identifier mismatch
Remote procedure error-general
Note: The 3174 uses this list of diagnostic codes regardless of the type of circuit.
Appendix B. X.2S Feature
8-31
X.2S Feature
8-32
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.21 Feature
Appendix
c.
X.21 Feature
21 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
X.21 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
X.21 Switched Microcode Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Function Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Call Coli ision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Call Progress (CP) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Data Link Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Call Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Incoming Call in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-6
Dialing '" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .". . . .. C-6
Di rect Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Outgoing Call in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Status and Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Call Progress Signal Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
X.21 Error Completion Modifier Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Appendix C. X.21 Feature
C-1
X.21 Feature
21 Feature
1
The Type 2 Communication and Concurrent Communication Adapter in the 3174 Establishment Controller
enable the 3174 to be attached to a OCE that operates as specified in CCITT Recommendation X.21 at
speeds of 2400, 4800, 9600, 48 000, and 64 OOObps.
To use the X.21 Switched feature, the 3174 must have either a 3278,3279, or similar display station
attached.
X.21 Functional Description
The 3174 supports the following X.21 functions:
• SOLC microcode to support X.21 Switched protocol
• Data link control, which is an interface to the SOLC microcode
• X.21 Switched adapter (Type 2 Communication Adapter).
The data link control issues function requests to the microcode and handles completion codes from the
microcode. Figure C-1 on page C-3 outlines the data link control function.
C-2
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.21 Feature
Press
LOCAL
key
POR
Uncontrolled
Not Ready
~---[I]~
DEC
Clear
Comp
Informed
HALT or
CLOSE
Comp
Received
BEL
r:i'n1 Character
Informed
Open
Monitor
L!Q)
Any State
Disconnect
In Process
Informed
Open
Incoming
Call Comp
Press
DISC key
or Received
Disc
Command
Figure
Received
CP Signal
Outgoing Call
with Call
Progress Signal
~ Nnn
Any State
Informed Open Out
going Call Comp
C-1. Data Link Control Function
Appendix C. X.21 Feature
C-3
X.21 Feature
X.21 Switched Microcode Function
Function Requests
1. OPEN for outgoing call.
By this request, the HPCA and the X.21 hardware are reset and enabled and, after passing through the
ready state, proceed with the outgoing call establishment.
The microcode signals the X.21 hardware to enter the call-request state and awaits the reception of an
IA5 plus (+) character from the network.
When the request contains selection signals, the microcode/X.21 hardware sends two IA5 sync
characters and the selection signals (including 'dial digits') that were set up by the data link control in
the selection signal buffer.
The X.21 hardware monitors the network interface; if 'call progress' signals and/or called line
identification are received, they are passed on to the microcode. After translation, the microcode will
pass the first 'call progress' signal (normally two digits) or line 10 to the data link control's buffer and
posts an intermediate completion status.
When the microcode detects that the network is ready for data, the microcode will enter the
data-transfer phase after housekeeping and preparing the X.21 hardware and microcode to receive the
first SDLC frame. The data link control is notified that the Open is completed.
The process is similar when outgoing call is direct. A direct call by the data link control identifies a
direct call by specifying no dial digits. When the IA5 plus (+) character is received, signifying select
from the network, the microcode enters the DTE waiting state for the reception of 'call progress'
signals, called line identification, or the indication that the network is ready for data.
2. OPEN for incoming call.
When the data link control issues the X.21 Open function request for an incoming call, the action of the
microcode/X.21 hardware differs slightly from that for an outgoing call.
• The microcode/X.21 hardware determines that the network is ready, then enters the ready state to
wait for an interrupt from the X.21 hardware signifying activity on the network.
• Receipt of one IA5 BEL character identifies the incoming call state. The microcode posts an
intermediate completion status (BEL RCVD) and, when it regains control, prompts the X.21
hardware to turn on the control lead that signifies the call-accepted state.
• The microcode now waits for an interrupt to indicate either that the calling line identification has
been received or that the network is ready for data. If line identification is received, the microcode
moves it to the data link control's buffer, and the completion status is passed on in the same way
as for an outgoing call.
When the ready-for-data condition is detected, the data-transfer phase is entered after the microcode
completes appropriate housekeeping and prepares the X.21 hardware for the first SDLC frame. A
normal completion to the Open function request is posted by the microcode.
3. OPEN for monitori ng
The microcode checks the X.21 interface periodically. If the DCE's status coincides with the condition
specified by the data link control, that is, DCE ready or DCE not ready,the microcode reports normal
completion.
C-4
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.21 Feature
4. CLOSE
If the clearing sequence is already completed, the microcode merely executes the final housekeeping
requirements; otherwise, the microcode starts a clearing sequence. When the clearing sequence ends
properly, and no comparator error is indicated by the X.21 hardware, a normal completion is posted.
When the clearing sequence does not end properly within its time limit, or if a comparator error exists,
appropriate error status is posted. The HPCA and the X.21 hardware are always reset prior to posting
any completion code to the Close FA. The microcode/X.21 hardware will be in the controlled not-ready
state when this FR ends.
5. HALT
The data link control aborts an Open function request by issuing a HALT request. The microcode
executes a clearing sequence to the network.
Call Collision
A call-collision condition can exist when a call request is made to the network at the same time the network
is making an incoming call. The network will resolve the collision in favor of the call request.
Note: The X.21 recommendation does not permit deliberate call collisions; that is, the DTE entering the
call-request state after becoming aware of the incoming-call state.
Therefore, the data link control avoids deliberate situations by issuing the proper sequence of
function requests; for example, by issuing a HALT request to the Open for Incoming request before
issuing the Open for Outgoing request.
Call Progress (CP) Signals
The only time the microcode is affected by a particular 'call progress' (CP) signal is if the first digit of a
.
received CP signal is an IA5 0, 2, or 6.
The IA5 0 identifies the call-wait class (terminal called or waiting connection). The action of the microcode
upon detecting the (IA5 0) is to initiate a 60-second timeout, instead of the 2-second timeout, while waiting
for the network to become ready for data. Upon detecting the IA5 2 or 6 (short-term condition when
clearing), the microcode prepares for the retry by initiating a clearing sequence. CP signals already
received will be moved to the data link control's buffer.
When reacting to an IA5 "0" CP, the microcode will post the intermediate completion status, indicating that
CP signals are available in the buffer. When reacting to the IA5 "2" or "6" CP, the retry intermediate status
is posted, indicating the retry is due to receipt of a retry type CP signal.
Appendix C. X.21 Feature
C-S
X.21 Feature
Data Link Control Function
Call Ready
The Call Ready indicator is displayed in the operator information area of the 3278 or 3279, and the use of
either the DIAL key or the LOCAL key is accepted, as is an incoming call.
This state is the X.21 ready state and is entered by the Open for Incoming request to the microcode under
the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Immediately after the 3174 is powered on by the uncontrolled-not-ready state.
When the COMM key is pressed while operating in the local mode.
When the dial-in mode is ended by the DISC key.
After the line is disconnected normally by the DISC key on the DISC command.
When the Open Outgoing request is rejected by CP signals.
After the line is disconnected by an error, or after the X.21 open request is completed erroneously,
except if condition 7 exists. The Call Ready indicator, however, is overridden by the communication
error reminder. This reminder can be reset by the COMM key, and the Call Ready indicator will
appear.
7. If the DCE is not ready, the communication error reminder is display.ed, and the Open Monitor request
is issued. When this request is completed, the Call Ready indicator is displayed in the operator
information area.
Incoming Call in Progress
When an incoming call comes to the 3174 while in the X.21 ready state, the microcode returns the
intermediate completion code with 'BEL RCVD'. The data link control displays the Incoming Call in
Progress indicator and returns control to the microcode. When the Ready for Data is sent from the DCE,
the microcode returns a normal completion code. The data link control turns off the Incoming Call in
Progress indicator, turns on the In Use indicator, and prepares for normal data exchange.
Dialing
When the DIAL key is pressed in the call-ready ·state, the data link control issues the HALT request to the
microcode to inhibit an incoming call, clears the screen, and puts the cursor at the home position. The
Wait indicator is displayed until the HALT request is completed. Then the Dial In indicator is displayed.
The operator enters dial digits, or any facility request allowed by the network, and presses the ENTER key.
The data link control issues an Open for Outgoing request to the microcode with parameters that include
selection signals entered by the operator, and displays the Outgoing Call in Progress indicator.
Direct Call
When the DIRECT key is pressed in the call-ready state, the data link control issues the HALT request and
the Open for Outgoing request, with no selection signal, and displays the Outgoing Call in Progress
indicator.
C-6
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
"'
.... ...........
~
Outgoing Call in Progress
The microcode processes the Open-for-Outgoing request, as described under "X.21 Switched Microcode
Function" on page C-4, and returns a normal completion code to the data link control when the X.21 'ready
for data' signal is sent from the DCE. The data link control turns off the Outgoing Call in Progress indicator,
turns on the In Use indicator, and prepares for normal data exchange.
Local Mode
When the LOCAL key is pressed in the call-ready state, the data link control issues the HALT request and
displays the Local Mode indicator.
The local mode is the X.21 controlled-not-ready state and inhibits incoming and outgoing calls.
When the COMM key is pressed in local mode, the data link control issues an Open for Incoming request to
the microcode and displays the Call Ready indicator.
Disconnection
When the DISC key is pressed in the ready-for-data state or outgoinglincoming call-in-progress state, the
data Ii nk control issues a CLOSE request in the ready-for-data state, or issues a HALT request in the
outgoinglincoming call in progress state to the microcode, and displays the Disconnect in Progress
indicator. When the close completion code is returned from the microcode, the data link control turns off
the In Use indicator. The data link control issues an Open for Incoming request to the microcode, enters the
call ready state, and displays the Call Ready indicator. When the halt-completion code is returned, the data
link control issues an Open for Incoming request to the microcode, enters the call-ready state, and displays
the Call-Ready indicator.
The line is also disconnected automatically by a timeout condition or by the SDLC DISC command.
Appendix C. X.21 Feature
C-7
Status and Key Operation
Figure C-2 and Figure C-3 on page C-9 show how keys are treated when pressed in the X.21 Switched
states and when in the dial-in mode.
Operation
AID Key
Pressed
Status
DIAL Key
Pressed
DIRECT Key
Pressed
DISC Key
Pressed
LOCAL Key
Pressed
COMM Key
Pressed
Call Ready
Accept
Accept
Ignore
Accept
Ignore
Accept*
Accept
Accept*
Accept
)c*--z-
Ignore
--+L
--+L
)c*-z-
Ignore
--+L
--+L
)c'=-z-
Ignore
+-z...
+-z..
+-z...
Same as
the base
machine
--+L
Call Ready with
Call Progress Signal
Accept
Outgoing Call In .
Process
)c*-z-
Outgoing Call In
Process with Call
Progress Signal
Accept*
--+L
--+L
Accept
)c*-z--+L
Incoming Call In
Process
)c*-z+-z...
+-z..
Data Ready
>c:;J;:-z-
>C:;J;:--z-
Accept
>C:;J;:--z-
Ignore
Disconnect In
Process
>C:;J;:-z-
>C:;J;:--z-
Ignore
>C:;J;:-z-
Ignore
Local
>C:;J;:-z-
>C:;J;:--z-
>c'=-z-
Ignore
Accept
Accept
-z-
* Reset Call Progress Signals
Note:
In each box under "Operation," the upper row
shows an indicator from column 8 and the lower row
shows an indicator from column 20.
Note: In each box under "Operation," the upper row shows an
indicator from column 8 and the lower row shows an indicator from
column 20.
Figure
C-8
C-2. Key Operation (during X.21 Switched States)
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
X.21 Feature
Key Pressed
Reaction
Dial-Originating
Terminal
DIAL
Other Terminal
Clear Screen
-z....#?
DIRECT
LOCAL
~
COMM
599
M*-z....
-z....# #
Ignore
Ignore
-z....#?
-z....##
M-f
M-f
DISC
AID
CLEAR
TEST
-z....#?
-z....##
Clear Screen
Clear Screen
-z....#?
-z....# #
Test
Test
Abort Dial
-z....# #
M-f
ENTER
-z....##
* Clear only the dial-in area
Note: In each box under "Reaction," the upper row shows an indicator
from column 8 and the lower row shows an indicator from column 20.
Figure
C-3. Key Operation in Dial-In Mode
Appendix C. X.21 Feature
e-g
X.21 Feature
Call Progress Signal Code
The 'call progress' (CP) signal is sent by the network to advise a calling terminal/host about the progress of
a call or about the circumstances that have prevented a connection from being established. It is
transmitted by the network after receiving end-of-dialing and is not repeated. The 'call progress' codes and
meanings are shown in Table C-1.
Note: The meaning of the codes is different in each country. Ask a specialist for details about code
meanings.
Table
C-1. Call Progress Signal Code
CPS Code
CPS Meaning
00
01
02
03
20
21
22
23
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
61
71
72
81
Wait
Terminal called
Redirected call
Connect when free
Number busy
Busy
Procedure error
Selection signal transmission error
Access barred
Changed number
Not obtainable 'l..
Out of order
Controlled not ready
Uncontrolled not ready
DCE power off
Invalid facility request
Network fault in local loop
Call information service
Incompatible user class of service
Network congestion
Long-term network congestion
RPOA out of order
Registration/cancellation confirmed.
C-10
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
A..~l
t-ealUre
X.21 Error Completion Modifier Bits
Table C-2 shows the meanings of the error completion modifier bits for an X.21 communication failure.
Table
C-2. X.21 Error Completion Modifier Bits
Byte
Bit
Description
B1
0
Reserved
1
Reserved
2
The T1 (3-second) timer expired indicating that the microcode did not receive
the "proceed to select" state in response to signaling a call request.
3
The T2 (20-second) timer has expired indicating that on an outgoing call,
neither a call progress signal nor "ready for data" is detected after the
selection signals are sent.
4
The T5 or T6 (2-second) timer has expired, indicating that the OTE did not
detect the OCE ready state in response to a OTE clear request or OTE clear
confirmation.
5
The T3A (2-second) timer has expired, indicating that 'ready for data' is not
detected after call progress signals are received and the calling OTE has not
been told to wait 60 seconds. The T3B (60 second) timer has expired after a
call progress signal was received, telling the calling OTE to wait 60 seconds for
the" ready for data" to be signaled (manual answer).
6
The T4 (2-second) timer has occurred during an incoming call when" ready for
data" is not detected after the microcode has signalled call accepted.
7
Reserved
Appendix C. X.21 Feature
C-11
X.21 Feature
C-12
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
List of Abbreviations
CIO. Connection identifier.
A
coax. Coaxial (cable).
A. (1) Ampere. (2) Attention.
comm. Communication.
AC. Alternating current.
cont. Continuous.
ACK. Acknowledge.
cps. Characters per second.
ACTlU. Activate Logical Unit.
CRT. Cathode-ray tube.
ACTPU. Activate Physical Unit.
CSCM. Central Site Change Management.
AEA. Asynchronous Emulation Adapter.
CSU. Customer setup.
AID. Attention identifier.
CTl. Control.
Alt. Alternate.
ctr. Counter.
A/N. Alphanumeric.
CTS.
Clear to Send.
APl. A Programming Language.
CU. Control unit.
ASCII. American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange.
CUG. Closed user group.
ATTN. Attention.
CUT.
B
D
B. Busy.
D. Display.
bps.
dBa. Adjusted decibels.
Bits per second.
Control unit terminal.
BSC. Binary synchronous communication.
DC. Di rect current.
c
OCE.
C. Celsius.
C&O. Cause and diagnostic (codes).
CCITT. International Telegraph and Telephone
Consultative Committee.
CO.
Change direction.
CEo (1) IBM Customer Engineer. (2) Correctable
error. (3) Channel-end.
CECP. Country extended code page.
CEM. Customer Engineering Memorandum
CHIO. Channel input output.
Data-circuit-terminating equipment.
DE. Device-end.
DES. Data Encryption Standard.
OFT. (1) Distributed function terminal. (2) Dia'gnostic
function test.
DISC. Disconnect.
OM.
~OS.
(1) Disconnect mode. (2) Distribution Manager
Disk Operating System.
OPC. Dual-purpose connector.
OPKT. Default packet size.
Osk. Diskette.
List of Abbreviations
X-1
DSL. (1) Downstream load. (2) Data set label.
DSR.
Data set ready.
DTE.
Data terminal equipment.
DTR.
Data terminal ready.
HPCA. High-performance communication adapter.
I. Information (format).
ID. Identification, identifier.
DWND. Default window size.
IML. Initial microcode load.
E
in. Inch (or inches).
EB. End bracket.
Ind. Indicator.
EBCDIC. Extended binary-coded decimal interchange
code.
1/0.
Input/output.
10PT.
Incoming call option.
EC. Engineering change.
IR. Intervention Required.
EIA. Electronic Industries Association.
ERP. Error recovery procedures.
K
ESC. Escape.
k. 1000.
K. 1024.
F
F. Fahrenheit.
L
FCC. Federal Communications Commission.
L. Left.
FCS. Frame checking sequence.
LAPB. Link access procedure balanced.
FF. Forms feed.
LC. Logical channel.
FM. (1) Frequency modulation. (2) Function
management. (3) Field mark.
LCID. Logical channel identifier.
LED. Light-emitting diode.
FMD. (1) Function management data. (2) Field macro
diagram.
LLC. Logical link control.
FP. Faceplate.
LT. Logical terminal.
FRMR. Frame reject response.
LU.
FRU. Field-replaceable unit.
M
G
m. Meter (or meters).
GFI. General format identifier.
MAC. (1) Medium access control. (2) Message
authentication code.
H
MAP. Maintenance analysis procedure.
H. Height.
max. Maximum.
hex. Hexadecimal.
MB. Megabyte; 1 048 576 bytes.
HNAD. Host network (DTE) address.
MB. Optical fiber mounting bracket.
X-2
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Logical unit.
MDT. Modified data tag.
PS. Programmed symbols.
MHS. Magnetic hand scanner.
PSDN. Packet switched data network.
MLT. Multiple logical terminals.
PSH. Physical services header.
mm. Millimeter (or millimeters).
PT. Program Tab.
MMIO. Memory-mapped input output.
PU. Physical unit
modem. Modulator-demodulator.
PUID. Physical unit identification.
MSR. Magnetic stripe reader.
PVC. Permanent virtual circuit.
MVS. Multiple virtual storage.
Q
N
QFRMR. Qualified frame reject response.
NCP. Network Control Program.
QLLC. Qualified logical link control.
NIA. Network Interface Adapter.
QSM. Qualified set mode.
NMVT. Network Management Vector Transport.
R
No. Number.
rei. Relative.
NOP. No operation.
Req. Request.
NPKT. Negotiated packet size.
RNR. Request not ready, receive not ready.
NRZ. Nonreturn to zero.
ROS. Read-only storage.
NTT. Nippon Telephone and Telegraph.
RPOA.
Recognized private operating agency.
NUM. Numeric.
RPQ. Request for price quotation.
NWND. Negotiated window size.
RR. Request ready, receive ready.
o
RTM. Response Time Monitor.
OOPT. Outgoing call option.
RTS. Request to send.
p
RU. Request/response unit.
PA. (1) Program access. (2) Program attention.
s
PAM. Printer authorization matrix.
S. Sequenced (format), side.
PC. Personal Computer.
SABME. Set Asynchronous Balance Mode Extended
(command).
pF. Picofarad.
SAP. Service access point.
PF. Program function.
SBA. Set Buffer Address.
PIO. Programmable input output.
SC. Status code.
PIU. Path information unit.
SCS. SNA character string.
POST. Power-On Self Test.
List of Abbreviations
X-3
SOLC. Synchronous Data Link Control.
SNA. Systems Network Architecture.
SNRM. Set Normal Response Mode.
SSCP. System services control point.
SVC. Switched virtual circuit.
SYSGEN. System generation.
u
U. Unprotected.
UA. Unnumbered acknowledgment.
U.S. United States.
v
V. Volt.
T
TA. Terminal adapter.
TCLS. Throughput class negotiation.
TMA. Terminal multiplexer adapter.
TP. Teleprocessing.
X-4
w
WCC. Write control character.
WSF. Write Structured Field.
WT. World Trade.
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Glossary
This glossary includes terms and definitions from the
IBM Dictionary of Computing: Information Processing,
Personal Computing, Telecommunications, Office
Systems, IBM-specific Terms, SC20-1699.
The terms in this glossary are defined here as they
apply to the 3270 Information Display System.
A
access procedure. In a local area network (LAN), the
procedure or protocol that is used to gain access to the
transmission medium.
Note: The medium access procedures specified by the
IEEE 802 standard are CSMA/CD token, bus, and
ring.
acknowledgment. The transmission, by a receiver, of
acknowledge characters as an affirmative response to
a sender.
active. Able to communicate on the network. An
adapter is active if it is able to pass tokens on the
network.
active logical terminal (LT). In MLT, the currently
displayed logical terminal. Synonymous with
foreground logical terminal. Contrast with background
logical terminal.
active monitor. A function in a single adapter on a ring
network that initiates the transmission of tokens and
provides token error recovery facilities. Any active
adapter on the ring has the ability to provide the active
monitor function if the current active monitor fails.
adapter. A general term for a device that provides
some transitional function between two or more
devices.
address. (1) A value that identifies a register, a
particular part of storage, a data source, or a data sink.
The value is represented by one or more characters.
(2) To refer to a device or an item of data by its
address. (3) In word processing, the location,
identified by an address code, of a specific section of
the recording medium or storage. (4) The location in
the storage of a computer where data is stored. (5) In
data communication, the unique code assigned to each
device or work station connected to a network.
AEA port. A communication connector on the
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter (AEA).
alert. (1) In the IBM Token-Ring Network Manager, a
notification appearing on the bottom line of any panel to
indicate an interruption or a potential interruption in the
flow of data around the ring. (2) In NetView, a
notification about a high-priority event that warrants
immediate attention. This data-base record is
generated for certain event types that are defined by
user-constructed filters.
alternate 1 initial microcode load (Alt 1 IML). The
action of loading the Utility microcode.
American National Standard Code for Information
Interchange (ASCII). A standard code, using a coded
character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters (8
bits including parity check), used for information
interchange among data processing systems, data
communication systems, and associated equipment.
The ASCII set consists of control characters and
graphic characters.
application. The use to which an information
processing system is put, for example, a payroll
application, an airline reservation application, or a
network application.
application program. (1) A program written for or by a
user that applies to the user's work, such as a program
that does inventory control or payroll. (2) A program
used to connect and communicate with stations in a
network, enabling users to perform application-oriented
activities.
asynchronous. (1) Without regular time relationship;
unexpected or unpredictable with respect to the
execution of program instructions. (2) In asynchronous
data transmissions, data characters may be sent or
received at any time; no modem clocking is used to
establish bit timing.
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter (AEA). In the 3174
Establishment Controller, an adapter that enables an
ASCII terminal to communicate with a 3270 host using
the 3270 data stream, an ASCII terminal to
communicate with an ASCII host through the 3174, and
a 3270 terminal to communicate with an ASCII host
using the DEC VT100 data stream or the IBM 3101 data
stream.
attach. To connect a device logically to a 3174
adapter, so that it can communicate over the network.
attachment feature. The circuitry by which a cable
from a local terminal or a modem for a remote terminal
is attached to a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit or a 3791
Controller.
attention (ATTN). An occurrence external to an
operation that could cause an interruption of the
operation.
Glossary
X-S
attention identifier (AID). (1) A code in the inbound
3270 data stream that identifies the source or type of
data that follows. (2) A character in a data stream
indicating that the user has pressed a key, such as
Enter, that requests an action by the system.
attribute. (1) A characteristic. (2) A terminal display
language or transformation definition language (TDL)
keyword that specifies a particular quality for the TDL
object with which it is associated.
attribute select keyboard. A keyboard that enables the
operator, when permitted by the program, to change
the character attributes of the keyed-in character.
audible alarm. (1) An alarm that is sounded when
designated events occur that require operator attention
or intervention before system operation can continue.
(2) A special feature that sounds a short, audible tone
automatically when a character is entered from the
keyboard into the next-to-Iast character position on the
screen. The tone can also be sounded under program
control.
B
backbone. In a multiple-ring local area network, a
high-speed link to which the rings are connected by
means of bridges. A backbone may be configured as a
bus or as a ring.
background logical terminal (LT). In ML T, any logical
terminal that is not currently displayed. Contrast with
active logical terminal (LT).
balun. A transformer for connecting balanced (for
instance, twisted-pair) cables to unbalanced (for
instance, coaxial) cable by matching the electrical
characteristics of the cables.
base color. The capability of displaying or printing all
characters in a field, in one of four colors, on a color
terminal by use of combinations of the field protection
and the field intenSify bits of the field attribute.
beacon. Synonym for beacon message.
beacon frame. Synonym for beacon message.
beacon message. A frame or message repeatedly
transmitted by a station on detection of a line break or
outage. Transmission of beacon messages stops when
the fault is bypassed or eliminated. Synonymous with
beacon and beacon frame.
binary synchronous communications (SSC). Data
transmission in which character synchronism is
controlled by timing signals generated at the sending
and receiving stations.
X-6
blink. An extended highlighting attribute value (for
emphasiS) of a field or character.
bracket. In SNA, one or more chains of request units
(RUs) and their responses, which are exchanged
between two LU-LU half-sessions and represent a
transaction between them. A bracket must be
completed before another bracket can be started.
Examples of brackets are data base inquiries/replies,
update transactions, and remote job entry output
sequences to work stations.
bridge. (1) A functional unit that connects two local
area networks (LANs) that use the same logical link
control (LLC) procedure but may use different medium
access control (MAC) procedures. (2) See also
backbone and gateway.
Note: A bridge connects networks or systems of the
same or similar architectures, whereas a
gateway connects networks or systems of
different architectures.
buffer. (1) A routine or storage used to compensate
for a difference in rate of flow of data, or time of
occurrence of events, when transferring data from one
device to another. (2) An isolating circuit used to
prevent a driven circuit from influencing the driving
circuit. (3) To allocate and schedule the use of buffers.
(4) A portion of storage used to hold input or output
temporarily.
buffer address. The address of a location in the buffer.
burst. (1) In data communication, a sequence of
signals counted as one unit in accordance with some
specific criterion or measure. (2) To separate
continuous-form paper into discrete sheets.
bus. A type of network topology where the network
consists of a bidirectional communication path with
defined end pOints.
bypass. To eliminate an attaching device or an access
unit from a ring network by allowing the data to flow in
a path around it.
c
card. In the 3174 Establishment Controller, a unit of
electronic circuitry contained in a plastiC casing (or
cassette) and providing the controller with a
specialized function, for example, a Terminal Adapter
or an Encrypt/Decrypt Adapter.
Central site change management (CSCM). A function
of the 3174 microcode that tracks the microcode for
each controller in a network and, in conjunction with
NetView OM, electronically distributes and retrieves
microcode changes for each controller.
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
central site customizing. The process of tailoring
control unit microcode for each controller in a network,
at the central site.
the term configuration may refer to a hardware
configuration or a software configuration. See also
system configuration.
central site library. One or more Library disks that
contain customizing data and label information for the
controllers in a network.
Connection Menu. A menu on the screen of a display
station attached to the 3174 Establishment Controller,
from which a user can select an available host.
channel-attached. Pertaining to attachment of devices
directly by data channels (1/0 channels) to a computer.
Synonym for local. Contrast with
telecommunication-attached.
connector.
channel-to-channel adapter. A hardware device that
can be used to connect two channels on the same
computing system or on different systems.
character set. (1) A defined collection of characters.
(2) A group of characters used for a specific reason,
for example, the set of characters a printer can print.
(3) The collection of graphic characters required to
support a specific language.
Clear to Send (CTS) flow control. A procedure for a
communicating device to signal its readiness to receive
data by raising the CTS lead on an EIA 2320 interface.
coaxial cable. A cable consisting of one conductor,
usually a small copper tube or wire, within and
insulated from another conductor of larger diameter,
usually copper tubing or copper braid.
code violation. In differential Manchester code
encoding, a bit that does not have a state transition at
the mid-bit point. See differential Manchester code.
command. An instruction that directs a control unit or
device to perform an operation or a set of operations.
communication adapter. (1) A circuit card with
associated software that enables a processor,
controller, or other device to be connected to a
network. (2) See EIA communication adapter, V.35
communication adapter, and X.21 communication
adapter.
completion code. The final return code provided by
the adapter as a result of an issued command.
component. (1) Hardware or software that is part of a
functional unit. (2) A functional part of an operating
system, for example, the scheduler or supervisor.
(3) In systems with VSAM, a named, cataloged
collection of stored records, such as the data
component or index component of a key-sequenced file
or alternate index. (4) In System/38 graphics, the
representation of a data group on a chart. (5) See
terminal component and solid state component.
configuration. The arrangement of a computer system
or network as defined by the nature, number, and chief
characteristics of its functional units. More specifically,
A means of establishing electrical flow.
control block. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, a
specifically formatted block of information provided
from the application program to the Adapter Support
Interface to request an operation.
control character. (1) A character whose occurrence
in a particular context specifies a control function.
(2) A character used to specify that a control unit is to
perform a particular operation.
Control (CTL) disk. A customized diskette or fixed disk
containing the microcode that describes a particular
controller's attached terminals, and its method of
attachment to the host.
Control (CTL) diskette. A customized diskette
containing the microcode that describes a particular
controller's attached terminals, and its method of
attachment to the host.
control function. Synonym for control operation.
controller. A unit that controls input/output operations
for one or more devices.
control operation. An action that affects the recording,
processing, transmission, or interpretation of data; for
example, starting or stopping a process, carriage
return, font change, rewind, and end of transmission.
Synonymous with control function.
control unit. A general term for any device that
provides common functions for other devices or
mechanisms. Synonym for controller.
control unit terminal (CUT). A terminal that relies on
the 3174 to interpret the data stream. Examples are the
3178,3179, 3278 Model 2, and 3279 Model S2A.
control unit terminal (CUT) mode. A host-interactive
mode that enables an IBM 3270 Personal Computer
customized in this mode to run only one session
emulating a 3178, 3179, 3278 Model 2, or 3279 Model
S2A.
conversion. (1) In programming languages, the
transformation between values that represent the same
data item but belong to different data types.
Information may be lost as a result of conversion
because accuracy of data representation varies among
different data types. (2) The process of changing from
one method of data processing to another or from one
Glossary
X-7
data processing system to another. (3) The process of
changing from one form of representation to another,
for example, to change from decimal representation to
binary representation.
country extended code page (CECP). A function of the
3174 microcode that provides for a code page
containing additional code points beyond those
available with Table 5A code pages. CECP is
supported by a universal character set, Character Set
697, which contains 190 characters.
create. In 3174 central site customizing, to create a
library member for a network controller, and store the
customizing data for that library member on a Library
diskette.
cursor. (1) A movable, visible mark used to indicate
the position at which the next operation will occur on a
display surface. (2) A unique symbol that identifies a
character position in a screen display, usually the
character position at which the next character to be
entered from the keyboard will be displayed.
customization. Procedures that tailor the control unit
microcode to fit the various types of display stations
and printers and the method of host attachment that a
particular control unit will handle.
customizing keyboard. A keyboard used to type in the
customizing responses; this keyboard must be a
Typewriter, Data Entry, APL (with APL off), or Text (with
Text off) keyboard with a QWERTY layout. (On a
QWERTY layout, the first six characters on the left side
of the top row of alphabetic characters are Q, W, E, R,
T, Y.)
binary-digit form, using a defined format. See also data
stream format.
data stream format. InSNA, the format of the data
elements (end-user data) in the request unit (RU). See
also 3270 data stream and SNA character string (SCS).
data terminal equipment (DTE). That part of a data
station that serves as a data source, data sink, or both.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) flow control. A procedure
for a communicating device to Signal its readiness to
receive data by raiSing the DTR lead on an EIA 2320
interface.
data transfer. The movement, or copying, of data from
one location and the storage of the data at another
location.
data transfer mode. Synonym for data transfer phase.
data transfer phase. (1) The phase of a data call
during which data signals can be transferred between
data terminal equipment (DTEs) connected by the
network. (2) Synonymous with data transfer mode.
decrypt. To convert encrypted data into clear data.
Contrast with encrypt.
delimiter. A bit pattern that defines the limits of a
frame or token on a ring network.
destination. Any point or location, such as a node,
station, or a particular terminal, to which information is
to be sent.
device. A mechanical, electrical, or electronic
contrivance with a specific purpose.
D
data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE). In a data
station, the equipment that provides the signal
conversion and coding between the data terminal
equipment (DTE) and the line.
Notes:
1. The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral
part of the DTE or of the intermediate equipment.
2. A DCE may perform other functions that are usually
performed at the network end of the line.
differential Manchester code. A data-encoding method
used by the IBM Token-Ring Network. In this method, a
bit has the value of binary 0 if there is a state transition
(polarity change) at the beginning of the bit boundary.
The bit has the value of binary 1 if there is no
transition. In a properly encoded bit, there must
always be a transition at every midpoint position. If the
transition is absent, a code violation results. Since
only the presence or absence of the state transition
(and not the actual polarity) determines a bit's value,
this method of coding is polarity-independent.
Data Entry keyboard. A keyboard layout designed for
data entry applications.
disk. A direct-access data storage medium, which may
be either flexible (diskette) or hard (fixed disk).
data link. Any physical link, such as a wire or a
telephone circuit, that connects one or more devices or
communication controllers.
diskette. A flexible magnetic disk enclosed in a
protective container.
data stream. (1) All data transmitted through a data
channel in a single read or write operation. (2) A
continuous stream of data elements being transmitted,
or intended for transmission, in character or
X-8
diskette drive. The mechanism used to seek, read,
and write data on diskettes.
display field. (1) An area in the display buffer that
contains a set of characters that can be manipulated or
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
operated upon as a unit. (2) A group of consecutive
characters (in the buffer) that starts with an attribute
character (defining the characteristics of the field) and
contains one or more alphanumeric characters. The
field continues to, but does not include, the next
attri bute character.
display frame. (1) In computer graphics, an area in
storage in which a display image can be recorded.
(2) In computer micrographics, an area on a microform
in which a display image can be recorded.
display station. An input/output device containing a
display screen and an attached keyboard that allows a
user to send information to or receive information from
the system.
distributed function terminal (OFT). A programmable
terminal that can perform operations previously
performed by the control unit. These terminals can
interpret the 3270 data stream themselves. Examples
are the IBM 3270 Personal Computer and the 3290
Information Panel.
distributed function terminal (OFT) mode. A
host-interactive mode that enables an IBM 3270
Information Display System customized in this mode to
run as many as four host sessions. The sessions can
emulate a 3178,3179,3278 Model 2, or 3279 Model
S2A.
downstream. (1) In the direction of data flow or
toward the destination of transmission. (2) From the
processor toward an attached unit or end user.
(3) Contrast with upstream.
emulation. (1) The imitation of all or part of one
system by another, primarily by hardware, so that the
imitating system accepts the same data, executes the
same programs, and achieves the same results as the
imitated computer system. (2) The use of
programming techniques and special machine features
to permit a computing system to execute programs
written for another system. (3) Imitation; for example,
imitation of a computer or device. (4) See terminal
emulation. (5) Contrast with simulation.
encrypt. To scramble data or convert it, before
transmission, to a secret code that masks the meaning
of the data to any unauthorized recipient. Contrast with
decrypt.
event. (1) An occurrence or happening. (2) An
occurrence of significance to a task; for example the
completion of an asynchronous operation, such as an
input/output operation.
extended binary-coded decimal interchange code
(EBCDIC). A coded character set of 256 eight-bit
characters.
extended field attribute. Additional field definition to
the field attribute that controls defining additional
properties; for example, color, highlighting, character
set, and field validation. The extended field attribute is
altered by information passed in the Start Field
Extended and Modify Field orders.
F
field. See display field.
downstream load (OSL). The capability of a distributed
function terminal to receive its control program from
the control unit to which it is attached. A diskette
containing the terminal's control program is loaded into
the control unit.
duplex. Pertaining to communication in which data
can be sent and received at the same time.
Synonymous with full duplex.
E
EIA communication adapter. A communication adapter
conforming to EIA standards that can combine and
send information on two lines at speeds up to 19.2
kbps.
EIA 2320. An electrical interface defined by the
Electronics Industries Association for establishing
connections and controlling data flow between data
terminal equipment and data communication
equipment. The interface has been adapted to allow
communication between DTEs.
field attribute. A control character stored in the
character buffer in the first character position of a field.
For those devices supporting the 3270 data stream, a
field attribute defines protected/unprotected,
alphanumeri,c/numeric, detectable/nondetectable,
display/nondisplay, intensity, and modified data tag
(MDT).
file. A named set of records stored or processed as a
unit.
file adapter. In the 3174, an adapter that provides
input/output support for external storage devices, such
as a diskette drive.
fixed disk. A rigid magnetic disk used in a fixed disk
drive.
fixed disk drive. A disk storage device that reads and
writes on rigid magnetic disks.
flag. (1) An indicator or parameter that shows the
setting of a switch. (2) Any of various types of
indicators used for identification, for example, a
wordmark. (3) A character that signals the occurrence
Glossary
X-9
of some condition, such as the end of a word.
(4) Deprecated term for mark.
flow control. (1) In data communication, control of the
data transfer rate. (2) In SNA, the process of managing
the rate at which data traffic passes between
components of the network. The purpose of flow
control is to optimize the rate of flow of message units
with minimum congestion in the network, that is,
neither to overflow the buffers at the receiver or at
intermediate routing nodes nor to leave the receiver
waiting for more message units. (3) The methods used
to control the flow of information across a network.
foreground logical terminal (LT). Synonym for active
logical terminal (L T).
frame. (1) The portion of a tape, on a line
perpendicular to the reference edge, on which binary
characters can be written or read simultaneously.
(2) A housing for machine elements. (3) The hardware
support structure, covers, and all electrical parts
mounted therein that are packaged as one entity for
shipping. (4) A formatted display. See display frame.
from disk.ette. The diskette that provides the data to be
transferred.
from drive. The drive that provides the data to be
transferred.
full duplex. Synonym for duplex.
G
gateway. (1) A functional unit that connects two
computer networks of different network architectures.
Note: A gateway connects networks or systems of
different architectures. A bridge interconnects
networks or systems with the same or similar
architectures.
get. In 3174 central site customizing, to select the type
of data you want and store it in working copy.
H
half-duplex. In data communication, pertaining to
transmission in only one direction at a time. Contrast
with duplex.
hard error. An error condition on a network that
requires that the network be reconfigured or that the
source of the error be removed before the ring can
resume reliable operation. Contrast with soft error.
hexadecimal. (1) Pertaining to a selection, choice, or
condition that has 16 possible values or states.
(2) Pertaining to a fixed-radix numeration system, With
radix of 16. (3) Pertaining to a numbering system with
X-10
base of 16; valid numbers use the digits 0 through 9
and characters A through F, where A represents 10 and
F represents 15.
host computer. (1) In a computer network, a computer
that provides end users with services such as
computation and data bases and that usually performs
network control functions. (2) The primary or
controlling computer in a multiple-computer
installation. (3) A computer used to prepare programs
for use on another computer or on another data
processing system; for example, a computer used to
compile link edit, or test programs to be used on
another system. (4) Synonym for host processor.
host logical unit (LU). An SNA logical unit (LU) located
in a host processor, for example, an ACF/VTAM
application program.
host processor. (1) A processor that controls all or
part of a user application network. (2) In a network,
the processing unit in which resides the access method
for the network. (3) In an SNA network, the processing
unit that contains a system services control point
(SSCP). (4) A processing unit that executes the access
method for attached communication controllers.
(5) The processing unit required to create and maintain
PSS. (6) Synonymous with host computer.
host system. (1) A data processing system used to
prepare programs and operating environments for use
on another computer or controller. (2) The data
processing system to which a network is connected and
with which the system can communicate. (3) The
controlling or highest-level system in a data
communication configuration; for example, a System/38
is the host system for the work stations connected to it.
IBM Cabling System. A permanently installed wiring
system that eliminates the need to rewire when
terminals are moved from one location to another
within an office complex. It allows transmission of data
at very high speeds and is the foundation for installing
a local area network.
initial microcode load (IML). The action of loading the
operational microcode.
input/output (I/O). (1) Pertaining to a device whose
parts can perform an input process and an output
process at the same time. (2) Pertaining to a
functional unit or channel involved in an input process,
output process, or both, concurrently or not, and to the
data involved in such a process. (3) Pertaining to
input, output, or both.
interface. (1) A shared boundary between two
functional units, defined by functional characteristics,
common physical interconnection characteristics,
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
signal characteristics, and other characteristics as
appropriate. (2) A shared boundary. An interface may
be a hardware component to link two devices or a
portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more
computer programs. (3) Hardware, software, or both,
that links systems, programs, or devices.
J
Jack. A connecting device to which a wire or wires of a
circuit may be attached and that is arranged for
insertion of a plug.
K
keyboard definition. A customizing procedure for
defining a maximum of four modified keyboard layouts
for modifiable keyboards only. Most characters,
symbols, and functions can be relocated, duplicated, or
deleted from almost any keyboard position.
local. Pertaining to a device accessed directly without
use of a telecommunication line. Synonym for
channel-attached. Contrast with remote.
location. With reference to a 3174, a place within the
3174 chassis where a particular card or adapter is
inserted.
logical terminal (LT). In MLT, one of five sessions
available to share one display station.
logical unit (LU). In SNA, a port through which an end
user accesses the SNA network in order to
communicate with another end user and through which
the end user accesses the functions provided by
system services control points (SSCPs). An LU can
support at least two sessions, one with an SSCP and
one with another LU, and may be capable of supporting
many sessions with other logical units.
loop. A closed unidirectional signal path connecting
input/output devices to a network.
L
M
leased line. Synonym for nonswitched line.
main storage. Program-addressable storage from
which instructions and other data can be loaded
directly into registers for subsequent processing.
light pen. A I ight-sensitive pick device that is used by
pointing it at the display surface.
Limited Function Utility (LFU) diskette. A diskette that
contains the microcode to run only a limited number of
utilities. These are: Diagnostics, Copy Files,
Encrypt/Decrypt Master Key, and Identify Customizing
Keyboard. The LimitedFunction Utility diskette is used
mainly in networks that are under central site control.
line speed. (1) The rate at which data is transmitted
from one point to another over a telecommunication
line. (2) The number of binary digits that can be sent
over a telecommunication line in 1 second, expressed
in bits per second (bps).
link. The logical connection between nodes including
the end-to-end link control procedures.
link station. (1) A specific place in a service access
point that enables an adapter to communicate with
another adapter. (2) A protocol machine in a node that
manages the elements of procedure required for the
exchange of data traffic with another communicating
link station.
lobe. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the section of
cable that attaches a device to an access unit. The
cable may consist of several segments.
lobe receptacle. In the IBM Token-Ring Network, an
outlet on an access unit for connecting a lobe.
maintenance analysis procedure (MAP). A
maintenance document that gives an IBM service
representative a step-by-step procedure for tracing a
symptom to the cause of a failure.
mark. A symbol or symbols that indicate the beginning
or the end of a field, a word, an item of data or a set of
data such as a file, record, or block.
medium access control (MAC) procedure. In a local
area network, the part of the protocol that governs
access to the transmission medium independently of
the physical characteristics of the medium, but taking
into account the topological aspects of the network, in
order to enable the exchange of data between data
stations.
Medium Access Control (MAC) frame. Frames that
control the operation of the IBM Token-Ring Network
and any ring station operations that affect the ring.
memory. Program-addressable storage from which
instructions and other data can be loaded directly into
registers for subsequent execution or processing.
Synonymous with main storage.
microcode. (1) One or more microinstructions. (2) A
code, representing the instructions of an instruction
set, that is implemented in a part of storage that is not
program-addressable. (3) To deSign, write, and also to
test one or more microinstructions.
Glossary
X-11
modem (modulator/demodulator). A device that
converts digital data from a computer to an analog
signal that can be transmitted on a telecommunication
line, and converts the analog signal received to data for
the computer.
modified data tag (MDT). A bit in the attribute
character of a display field that, when set, causes that
field to be transferred to the channel during a
read-modified operation. The modified data tag may be
set by a keyboard input to the field, a selector-pen
detection in the field, a card read-in operation, or
program control. The modified data tag may be reset
by a selector-pen detection in the field, program
control, or ERASE INPUT key.
multidrop (network). A network configuration in which
there are one or more intermediate nodes on the path
between a central node and an endpoint node.
multiple logical terminal (MLT). In the 3174, a function
that provides a CUT-attached, fixed-function display
station with the ability to interact with as many as five
host sessions. Each session is processed as though it
were a separate display station.
N
native mode. A 3179 or 3180 operational mode that
uses the full capabilities of those models' display and
keyboard.
NetView. A comprehensive network management
product that is the basis for central control of both
systems for network operations. It supersedes NCCF,
NPDA, NLDM, and NPM.
network. (1) An arrangement of nodes and connecting
branches. Connections are made between data
stations. (2) A configuration of data processing
devices and software connected for information
interchange.
Network Control Program (NCP) node. In SNA
products, a subarea node that contains an ACF/NCP
program but not a system services control pOint
(SSCP).
node. An end point of a link or a junction common to
two or more links in a network.
nomn·"ilched line. (1) A connection between systems
or devices that does not have to be made by dialing.
Contrast with switched line. (2) A telecommunication
line on which connections do not have to be
established by dialing. Synonymous with leased line.
o
offline test. A diagnostic test or data collection
program that must be run when the 3174 and its
connected terminals are not in normal operation.
ohm. The practical meter-kilogram-second unit of
electric resistance equal to the resistance of a circuit in
which a potential difference of 1 volt produces a current
of 1 ampere.
online test. A diagnostic test or data collection
program that is run without interrupting the normal
operation of the 3174 and its associated terminals.
open. (1) To make an adapter ready for use. (2) A
break in an electrical circuit.
operator information area (OIA). The area below the
line near the bottom of the display area where graphics
and alphanumeric characters are displayed to define
the status of the terminal or the system to the operator.
p
pacing. (1) A technique by which a receiving station
controls the rate of transmission of a sending station to
prevent overrun. (2) In SNA, a technique by which a
receiving component controls the rate of transmission
of a sending component to prevent overrun or
congestion.
parallel. (1) Pertaining to a process in which all
events occur within the same interval of time, each
handled by a separate but similar functional unit; for
example, the parallel transmission of the bits of a
computer word along the lines of an internal bus.
(2) Pertaining to concurrent or simultaneous operation
of two or more devices or to concurrent performance of
two or more activities in a single device. (3) Pertaining
to concurrent or simultaneous occurrence of two or
more related activities in multiple devices or channels.
(4) Pertaining to the simultaneity of two or more
processes. (5) Pertaining to the simultaneous
processing of the individual parts of a whole, such as
the bits of a character and the characters of a word,
using separate facilities for the various parts.
(6) Contrast with serial.
parameter. (1) A variable that is given a constant
value for a specified application and that may denote
the application. (2) An item in a menu for which the
user specifies a value or for which the system provides
a value when the menu is interpreted. (3) Data passed
between programs or procedures.
parity. (1) A transmission error-checking scheme in
. which an extra bit is added to some unit of data, usually
a byte, in order to make the total number of one bits
even or odd. For the AEA feature, odd, even, mark,
X-12
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
space, or no-parity coding is supported. No-parity
means that no parity bit is sent or expected. Mark and
space mean that the parity position is always set to one
or zero, respectively, and that received parity is not
checked. (2) The state of being either even-numbered
or odd-numbered.
sequencing rules for requests and responses used for
managing the network, transferring data, and
synchronizing the states of network components.
protocol handler. Programming in an adapter that
encodes and decodes the protocol used to format
Signals sent along a network.
path. In a network, a route between any two nodes.
physical unit (PU). In SNA, the component that
manages and monitors the resources (such as attached
links and adjacent link stations) of a node, as re.quested
by an SSCP through an SSCP-SSCP session.
port. (1) An access point for data entry or exit. (2) A
connector on a device to which cables for other devices
such as display stations and printers are attached.
Power-On Self-Test (POST). A series of diagnostic
tests that are run each time the computer's power is
turned on.
printer authorization matrix (PAM). A matrix stored in
the controller that establishes printer assignment and
classification.
program ace••• (PA) key. On a display device
keyboard, a key that produces a call to a program that
performs display operations. See also program
function (PF) key.
program function (PF) key. On a display device
keyboard, a key that passes a signal to a program to
call for a particular display operation. See also
program access (PA) key.
R
receptacle. See lobe receptacle.
register. A storage device having a specified storage
capacity such as a bit, byte, or computer word, and
usually intended for a special purpose.
remote. Pertaining to a system, program, or device
that is accessed through a telecommunication line.
request for price quotation (RPQ). An alteration or
addition to the functional capabilities that the controller
provides.
Response Time Monitor (RTM). A network
management tool that measures and records the
transaction times of Inbound host attention (AID)
operations from display stations that communicate with
the host.
return code. (1) A code used to Infl uence the
execution of succeeding Instructions. (2) A value
returned to a program to Indicate the results of an
operation requested by that program.
programmable symbols (PS). Customer-defined
symbols. There are a maximum of 190 symbols in a
programmed symbol set.
ring Interface adapter. A device that assumes the
basic data transmission functions of node, such as
frame recognition, address decoding, error checking,
buffering of frames, fault detection, and, in Token-Ring
Networks, token generation.
programmed symbols (PS). In the 3270 Information
Display System, an optional feature that stores up to six
user-definable, program-Ioadable character sets of 190
characters each in terminal read/write storage for
display or printing by the terminal.
ring network. A network configuration where a series
of attaching devices are connected by unidirectional
transmission links to form a closed path.
ring status. The condition of the ring.
Program Tab (PT) order. An order that advances the
current buffer address to the address of the first
character location of the next unprotected field and
resets the character attributes of all characters in the
field that are replaced by nulls.
protected field. (1) In word processing, preset data or
an area that cannot be changed or overridden by an
operator without altering the program. (2) On a display
device, a display field in which a user cannot enter,
modify, or erase data. Contrast with unprotected field.
protocol. (1) A set of semantic and syntactiC rules that
determine the behavior of functional units in achieving
communication. (2) In SNA, the meanings of and the
s
segment. A section of cable between components or
devices on the network. A segment may consist of a
single patch cable, multiple patch cables connected, or
a combination of building cable and patch cables
connected.
selector pen. A pen-like instrument that can be
attached to a display station. When a program using
full-screen proceSSing is aSSigned to the display
station, the pen can be used to select items on the
screen or to generate an attention. Synonym for light
pen.
Glossary
X-13
serial. (1) Pertl;iining to a process in which all events
occur one after the other; for example, serial
transmission of the bits of a character according to V24
CCITT protocol. (2) Pertaining to the sequential or
consecutive occurrence of two or more related
activities in a single device or channel. (3) Pertaining
to the sequential processing of the individual parts of a
whole, such as the bits of a character or the characters
of a word, using the s,ame facilities for successive
parts. (4) Contrast with parallel.
service access point. A logical pOint made available
by an adapter where information can be received and
transmitted. A single SAP can have many links
terminating in it.
session. (1) In network architecture, an association of
facilities l1ecessary for establishing, maintaining, and
releasing connection~ for communication between
stations. (2) In MLT, synonymous with logical terminal
(LT). (3) In SNA, a logical connection between two
network addressable units that can be activated,
tailored to provide various protocols, and deactivated
as requested.
Set Buffer Address (SBA) order. An order that sets the
buffer address to a specified location.
3850 Model 3 Storage Control, which is a 3830 Model 2
Storage Control that has been modified to operate in a
3850 Mass Storage System.
star. A wiring arrangement in which an individual
cable runs from each work area to a concentration
point.
station. (1) An input or output point of a system that
uses telecommunication facilities; for example, one or
more systems, computers, terminals, devices, and
associated programs at a partic!,Jlar location that can
send or receive data over a telecommunication line.
(2) A location in a device at which an operation is
performed, for example, a read station. (3) In SNA, a
link station.
stop bit. Synonym for stop signal.
stop signal. In start-stop transmission, a signal at the
end of a ch~racter that prepares the receiving device
for reception of a subsequent character. Synonymous
with stop bit.
storage. A unit into which recorded text can be
entered, in which it can be retained and processed, and
from which it can be retrieved. See also memory.
simulation. (1) The representation of selected
characteristics of the behavior of one physical or
abstract system by another system. In a digital
computer system, simulation is done by software; for
example, (a) the representation of physical phenomena
by means of operations performed by a computer
system, and (b) the representation of operations of a
computer system by those of another computer system.
(2) Contrast with emulation.
structured field. A data stream format that permits
variable-length data and controls to be parsed into its
components without having to scan every byte.
SNA character string (SCS). A character string
composed of EBCDIC controls, optionally intermixed
with end-user data, that is carried within a
request/response unit.
switched line. A telecommunication line in which the
connection is established by dialing. Contrast with
nonswitched line.
soft error. An intermittent error on a network that
requires retransmission. Contrast with hard error.
Note: A soft error by itself does not affect overall
reliability of the network, but reliability may be
affected if the number of soft errors reaches the
ring error lifTlit.
solid-state component. A component whose operation
depends on control of electric or magnetic phenomena
in solids, for example, a transistor, crystal diode, pr
ferrjte core.
staging adapter. (1) An addition to a System/370
Model 158 or 168 Integrated Storage Control (lSC)
feature that enables ttle integrated storage control to
operate in a 3850 Mass Storage System. (2) An IBM
X-14
subsystem. A secondary or subordinate system, or
programming support, usually capable of ,operating
independeJ1tly of or asynchronously with a controlling
system. The 3174 and its attached terminals are an
example of a subsystem.
synchronous. (1) Pertaining to two or more processes
that depend on the occurrences of a specific event,
such as common timing Signal. (2) Occurring with a
regular or predictable time relationship.
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). A discipline
conforming to subsets of the Advance Data
Communication Control Procedures (ADCCP) of the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and
High-level Data link Control (HDLC) of the International
Organization for Standardization, for managing
synchronous, code-transparent, serial-by-bit
information transfer over a link connection.
Transmission exchanges may be duplex or half-duplex
over switched or nonswitched links. The configuration
of the link connection may be point-to-point, multipoint,
or loop. See also binary synchronous communication
(BSG).
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
system configuration. A process that specifies the
devices and programs that form a particular data
processing system.
system services control point (SSCP). In SNA, the
focal point within an SNA network for managing the
configuration, coordinating network operator and
problem determination requests, and providing
directory support and other session services for end
users of the network. Multiple SSCPs, cooperating as
peers, can divide the network into domains of control,
with each SSCP having a hierarchical control
relationship to the physical units and logical units
within its domain.
Systems Network Architecture (SNA). The description
of the logical structure, formats, protocols, and
operational sequences for transmitting information
units through, and controlling the configuration and
operation of, networks.
T
telecommunication-attached. Pertaining to the
attachment of devices by teleprocessing lines to a host
processor. Synonym for remote. Contrast with
channel-attached.
terminal. In data communication, a display station or
printer capable of sending or receiving information.
terminal adapter (TA). An adapter that provides
control for a maximum of 32 terminals; each SNC
connector (four in all) on the terminal adapter can
control either one terminal that is directly attached or
as many as eight terminals that are attached through a
terminal multiplexer adapter (located in the 3174) or a
3299 Terminal Multiplexer (located outside the 3174).
terminal component. A separately addressable part of
a terminal that performs an input or output function,
such as the display component of a keyboard-display
device or a printer component of a keyboard-printer
device.
terminal emulation. The capability of a
microcomputer, personal computer, 3270 CUT mode
display station, 3270 printer, ASCII display station, or
ASCII printer to operate as if it were a particular type of
terminal linked to a processing unit and to access data.
network. (2) The part of a processor that is dedicated
to a Single data channel for the purpose of receiving
data from or transferring data to one or more external
or remote devices.
time-out. (1) An event that occurs at the end of a
predetermined period of time that began at the
occurrence of another specified event. (2) A time
interval allotted for certain operations to occur; for
example, response to polling or addressing before
system operation is interrupted and must be restarted.
(3) A terminal feature that logs off a user if an entry is
not made within a specified period of time.
to diskette. The diskette that receives the transferred
data.
to drive. The drive that receives the transferred data.
token. In a local area network, the symbol of authority
passed among data stations to indicate the station
temporarily in control of the transmission medium.
Token-Ring Network. (1) A ring network that allows
unidirectional data transmission between data stations
by a token-passing procedure over one transmission
medium so that the transmitted data returns to the
transmitting station. (2) A network that uses a ring
topology, in which tokens are passed in a circuit from
node to node. A node that is ready to send can capture
the token and insert data for transmission.
type. In the 3174 Establishment Controller, the
identifying number of a card. For example, 9150 is the
type number of the terminal adapter in the 3174.
type-1 communication adapter. The 3174 adapter that
supports communication between the 3174 (and its
terminals) and a host over telecommunication links
using any of these interfaces: (a) EIA 232D/V.24 and
V.35 for SNA/SDLC, (b) SSC, and (c) X.25. The user
selects the appropriate interface.
type-2 communication adapter. The 3174 adapter that
supports communication between the 3174 (and its
terminals) and a host over telecommunication links
using either the X.21 interface for SNA/SDLC or the
X.25 interface. The user selects the interface.
u
terminal multiplexer. A device, such as the 3299
Terminal Multiplexer, for interleaving the signals for
many devices onto a Single coaxial cable.
unprotected field. A displayed field in which a user
can enter, modify, or delete data. Contrast with
protected field.
terminal multiplexer adapter (TMA). This adapter is
connected to the terminal adapter in the 3174 and
provides control for a maximum of eight terminals.
update. In 3174 central site customizing, to tailor a
library member'S customizing data, in working copy,
and put it back to the library diskette.
terminal port. (1) In a network, the functional unit of a
node through which data can enter or leave the
upgrade. In 3174 central site customizing, to select a
library member and upgrade its data to the microcode
Glossary
X-1S
level of the Central Site Customizing Procedure
diskette.
loOp and then compare the character pattern received
with the pattern transmitted.
upstream. (1) In the direction opposite to data flow or
toward the source of transmission. (2) Toward the
processor from an attached unit or end user.
(3) Contrast with downstream.
write. To make a permanent or transient recording of
data in a storage device or on a data medium.
Utility disk. A diskette or fixed disk that contains the
microcode necessary to run various utilities, for
example, to copy portions of a diskette for a backup
diskette.
Utility (UTL) diskette. A diskette that contains the
microcode necessary to run various utilities, for
example, to copy portions of a diskette for a backup
diskette.
v
V.3S communication adapter. A communication
adapter that can combine and send Information on one
line at speeds up to 64 kbps, and conforms to the CCITT
V.35 standard.
write control character (WCC). A character used in
conjunction with a Write command to specify that a
particular operation, or combination of operations, is to
be performed at a display station or printer.
Write Structured Field (WSF) command. A command
used to transmit data in structured field format.
x
X.21. In data communication, a recommendation of the
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative
Committee (CCITT) that defines the interface between
data terminal equipment and public data networks for
digital leases and circuit switched synchronous
services.
w
X.21 communication adapter. A communication
adapter that can combine and send information on one
line at speeds up to 64 kbps, and that conforms to
CCITT X.21 standards.
wire fault. An error condition caused by a break In the
wires or a short between the wires (or shield) In a
segment of cable.
X.2S. In data communication, a recommendation of the
CCITT that defines the interface between data terminal
equipment and packet switching networks.
work area. An area In which terminals (such as
display stations, keyboards, and printers) are located.
Access units may also be located In work areas.
3
wrap te.t. A test that checks attachment or control unit
circuitry without checking the mechanism Itself by
returning the output of the mechanism as Input. For
example, when unrecoverable communication adapter
or machine errors occur, a wrap test can transmit a
specific character pattern to or through the modem in a
3270 data stream. (1) The commands, control codes,
orders, attributes, and data or structured fields for 3270
devices, that are transmitted inbound to an application
program or outbound to a terminal. (2) Data being
transferred from or to an allocated primary or tertiary
device, or to the host system, as a continuous stream of
data and 3270 Information Display System control
elements in character form.
X-16
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
Index
A
AC indicator 1-21
AC power switch 1-21
acoustics, classification 1-26
adding a patch 2-173
adding a zap patch 2-176
alerts, operator-originated 2-120,2-163
Alt 1 Adv pushbutton 1-20
Alt 1 IML description 1-22
Alt 1 IML menu list (figure) 2-59
Alt 1 IML selections (table) 1-22
Alt 2 Enter pushbutton 1-21
Alt 2 IML procedure(Test 82) 1-24
Alt 2 IML (Test 82) 1-23
description 1-23
B
balun 1-8
base hardware for 3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R
(figure) 1-4
basic tests, hardware group 2-37
bit definitions
block diagram of terminal attachment (figure) 1-5,
2-54, 2-80
C
cable wrap test, V.35 2-48
cable, interface 1-27
cabling 1-8
call accepted (SVC) (X.25) 8-5
call collision C-5
call connected (SVC) (X.25) 8-5
call progress signal code (X.21) C-10
call progress (CP) signals C-5
call request (SVC) (X.25) 8-5
call to patch area panel (figure) 2-175
central site change management 1-24
Central Site Customizing 2-166
Check Condition Indicator Is On (MAP 0100)
clear confi rmation (SVC) (X.25) 8-6
clear indication (SVC) (X.25) 8-6
clear request (SVC) (X.25) 8-6
codes, status
assignment of 1-13
categories of 1-13
format of 1-11
multiple operational 1-11
offline test 1-12
operational 1-11
presentation of 1-11
ranges of 1-13
2-6
codes, status (continued)
si ngle operational 1-11
troubleshooting with, example 1-15
0000 through 0150 1-13
1000 through 1099 1-14
13xx 1-14
2xx 1-13
2xxx 1-14
3xx 1-13
3xxx 1-14
4xx 1-13
4xxx 1-14
5xx 1-13
5xxx 1-14
7xxx 1-14
8888 1-15
color convergence 2-115, 2-158
COMM key (X.25) 8-23
communication adapter function number
descriptions 2-47
communication line flow
cable and wrap plug (figure) 2-49
switched and nonswitched (figure) 2-49
communications adapter optional tests, running 2-46,
2-75
configuration menu test 2 2-92,2-134
configuration table, hardware (figure) 1-10
configurations
hardware, 3174 1-4
terminal attachment 1-4
3174 Models 81R and 91R 1-4
3174 Models 82R and 92R 1-4
connector, dual-purpose (OPC) 1-8
connector, operator panel (J10) (figure) 3-5
control blocks, display 2-103, 2-146
control diskette 1-19
controller online tests, 3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and
92R 2-180
convergence, color 2-115,2-158
copy files Utility 2-166
cover removal/replacement 3-7
customize the Control disk 2-166
D
data link control function (X.21) C-6
call ready (X.21) C-6
dialing (X.21) C-6
direct call (X.21) C-6
disconnection (X.21) C-7
incoming call in progress (X.21) C-6
local mode (X.21) C-7
outgoing call in progress (X.21) C-7
Index
X-17
data panel, patch (figure) 2-174
data (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-7
data, vital 2-100,2-143
date, reading 2-73
day counter, reading 2-73
DC power connectors (figure) 3-4
device status, 3270 2-94,2-136
diagnostic aids 2-36
diagnostic aids and offline tests
communications adapter optional tests,
running 2-46,2-75
diskette drive media surface test (FN 02) 2-72
diskette drive optional tests, running 2-71
diskette drive ready test (FN 01) 2-71
display test monitor (terminal control) 2-56
hardware group basic tests description 2-37
hardware group basic tests, running 2-43, 2-68
hardware group optional tests description 2-37
hardware group test ails 2-36
hardware group test ails, running 2-43, 2-67
offline test operator panel control 2-67
operator panel test 2-74
operator panel test selection (example) 2-65
read the time of day (FN 01) 2-73
reading the timer 2-45
set the timer 2-45
terminal adapter/multiplexer optional tests,
running 2-78
terminal adapter/3299 optional tests, running 2-52
Test All 81 (CSU), special requirements 2-36
test parameters (table) 2-39
test request format 2-38
diagnostic aids configuration 8 2-122
diagnostic code modifiers 8-28
diagnostic codes from DCE 8-29
diagnostic codes from DTE 8-30
diagnostic (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-7
Diagnostics 2-166
dial mode screen description{X.25) 8-20
CID (X.25) 8-21
CUG (X.25) 8-21
DPKT (X.25) 8-21
DWND (X.25) 8-21
HNAD (X.25) 8-20
10PT (X.25) 8-22
I/O (X.25) 8-22
NPKT (X.25) 8-21
NWND (X.25) 8-21
OOPT (X.25) 8-21
QLLC (X.25) 8-21
RPOA (X.25) 8-21
TCLS (X.25) 8..;21
diskette drive 1-7
general information 1-7
diskette drive removal/replacement 3-10
diskette drive selection menu (figure) 2-171,2-172
diskettes 1-18
control 1-19
X-18
diskettes (continued)
dump 1-19
limited function 1-19
RPQ 1-19
utility 1-19
display control blocks 2-103,2-146
display FRU 10 table (FN 05) 2-57
display hardware configuration (FN 04) 2-57
display logs menu test 1 2-86,2-128
display subsystem online tests, 317481 Rand 82R
display test log - IML drive (FN 02) 2-57
display test log (FN 01) 2-55
display test monitor (terminal control) 2-56
display the Master Menu 2-165
dual-purpose connector (DPC) 1-8
dump procedure, performing 2-179
E
EIA/V.35 wrap plug (figure) 1-27
Encrypt/Decrypt Utility 2-166
environmental restrictions 1-26
acoustics 1-26
gas 1-26
humidity 1-26
pollutants 1-26
shock 1-26
temperature 1-26
vibration 1-26
error logging 1-15
event log 1-17
operator panel 1-17
event log 1-15
event log, sample (figure) 1-15
example of terminal attachment (figure) 1-6
Extension key (X.25) 8-17
Extension key and X.25 function keys (X.25)
extension mode (X.25) 8-17
8-19
F
fan removal/replacement 3-10
Field replaceable unit (FRU) description and
functions 1-7
field replaceable units 1-7
file adapter 1-7
FRU type numbers 1-9
FRU (field replaceable unit), identification of 1-9
function number descriptions, communication
adapter 2-47
function numbers and parameters (table) 2-38
function numbers and parameters, port wrap
(table) 2-52
function pushbuttons 1-20
Alt 1 Adv pushbutton 1-20
Alt 2 Enter pushbutton 1-21
IML pushbutton 1-21
3174 Models 81R through 92R Maintenance Information
function requests C-4
functional description C-2
functions, extended 2-115,2-158
functions, menu of selectable (figure)
2-42
G
general description, 3174
control diskette 1-19
diskettes 1-18
event log,error recording 1-17
hardware group (HG) numbers 1-8
limited function diskette 1-19
operator panel, error recording 1-17
RPQ diskette 1-19
status code assignments 1-13
utility diskette 1-19
3174 dump diskette 1-19
general information 1-1
event log 1-15
host communication 1-4
maintenance approach 1-3
model designation, 3174 1-4
Models 81 Rand 91 R - telecommunications attached
(remote) (EIA/V.35) 1-4
Models 82R and 92R - telecommunications attached
(remote) (X.21) 1-4
terminal attachment configurations 1-4
3174 configurations 1-4
3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R (remote) base
hardware 1-4
general procedures
dump procedure, performing 2-179
patch, adding 2-173
terminal ready (8, 4, or 6) indicator check 2-169
zap patch, adding 2-176
group numbers, hardware 1-8
guidelines for inspection 4-2
H
hardware configuration table (figure) 1-10
hardware configuration table, offline test monitor
(figure) 2-58
hardware configurations, 3174 1-4
3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R (remote) base
hardware 1-4
hardware group basic tests description 2-37
hardware group basic tests, running 2-43, 2-68
hardware group numbers 1-8
hardware group numbers (table) 2-43
hardware group optional tests description 2-37
hardware group test ails, description 2-36
hardware group test ails, running 2-43, 2-67
hardware group 01 FN and TP menu list (figure) 2-61
hardware group 08 FN and TP menu I ist (figure) 2-61
hardware group 09 TP Menu List 2-62
hardware group 11 FN and TP menu list (figure)
hardware group 26 FN, TP, and FP menu lists
(figure) 2-63
hardware group 80 FN Menu List 2-64
hardware group 81, 82, and 87 TP Menu List
(figure) 2-64
header panel, patch (figure) 2-174
Host Communication Failure (MAP 0300) 2-27
host communication, configurations for 1-4
how to display the master menu 2-165
how to use the trace facility 2-117,2-160
humidity 1-26
limits 1-26
range 1-26
2-62
IBM Cabling System A-2
description A-2
Identify Customizing Keyboard 2-166
IML
See initial microcode load (IML)
IML pushbutton 1-21
incoming call (SVC) (X.25) 8-5
indicators 1-20
Check Cond 1-20
Check Cond indicator 1-20
Data Transfer 1-20
data transfer indicator 1-20
status 1-20
status indicators 1-20
indicators (X.25) 8-15
call ready 8-15
communication reminder 8-16
data ready (in use) 8-16
dial in 8-15
disconnect in progress 8-16
incoming call in progress 8-15
local 8-16
outgoing call in progress 8-15
initial microcode load (IML)
Alt 1 IML, description of 1-22
Alt 1 IML, procedures 1-23
Alt 2 IML (Test 82), description of 1-23
Alt 2 IML (Test 82), procedure 1-24
normal 1-21
inspection guide, safety 4-2
interface cabl e 1-27
L
lamp test, how to perform 2-165
limited function diskette 1-19
LOCAL key (X.25) 8-23
locations (for repair access) 3-2
logical channels (X.25) 8-5
logs, reset 2-99,2-142
Index
X-19
loop 2-70
loop parameter
2-44
M
maintenance analysis procedures
See MAPs (Maintenance Analysis Procedures)
maintenance approach 1-3
MAPs (Maintenance Analysis Procedures) 2c5
MAP 0100 Check Condition Indicator Is On 2-6
MAP 0110 Operator Panel Isolation 2-8
MAP 0120 Status Code Not Indicated or
Known 2-10
MAP 0200 Terminal(s) Problem Entry 2-11
MAP 0210 Terminal Adapter Isolation 2-12
MAP 0220 Terminal Attachment Configuration
Chart 2-14
MAP 0230 3299 Models 2 and 3 Isolation 2-15
MAP 0240 3299 Model 1 Isolation 2-20
MAP 0250 Terminal Isolation 2-25
MAP 0300 Host Communication Failure 2-27
MAP 0400 Power Load Isolation 2-31
MAP 0500 Status Display 8888 2-34
master menu 2-165
master menu options 2-165
Master Menu panel 2-165
master menu (figure) 2-170
Media Management 2-166
menu lists
Alt 1 IML (40 prompt) 2-59
Hardware Group FN, TP, and FP 2-61
test monitor menu list 2-60
menu lists, hardware group 26 FN, TP, and FP
(figure) 2-63
menu list, Alt 1 IML (figure) 2-59
menu list, hardware group 01 FN and TP (figure) 2-61
menu list, hardware group 08 FN and TP (figure) 2-61
menu list, hardware group 09 TP 2-62
menu list, hardware group 11 FN and TP (figure) 2-62
menu list, hardware group 80 FN 2-64
menu list, hardware group 81,82, and 87 TP
(figure) 2-64
menu list, test monitor (figure) 2-60
menu test online Config b 2-125
menus, terminal control tests 2-41
menu, master{figure) 2-170
menu, patch (figure) 2-171
menu, test (figure) 2-41
Merge DSL code 2-166
Microcode Upgrade 2-166
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R controller online
tests 2-180
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R, base hardware for
(figure) 1-4
multiplexer, terminal, 3299 1-5
X-20
N
normal initial microcode load (IML) 1-21
normal operating procedure (X.25) 8-8
call ready (X.25) 8-9
cause and diagnostic indicators (X.25) 8-11
data ready (X.25) 8-10
disconnection (X.25) 8-10
exceptional case handling (X.25) 8-11
incoming call (X.25) 8-11
local mode (X.25) 8-11
X.25 SVC states and key operation 8-12
o
obtaining the 40 prompt message 2-39
offline test menu 2-83
offline test monitor, hardware configuration table
(figure) 2-58
offline test selection, operator panel 2-59
general rules for 2-59
offline tests 2-36
communications adapter optional tests,
running 2-46, 2-75
diskette drive media surface test (FN 02) 2-72
diskette drive optional tests, running 2-71
diskette drive ready test (FN 01) 2-71
display test monitor (terminal control) 2-56
hardware group basic tests description 2-37
hardware group basic tests, running 2-43, 2-68
hardware group optional tests description 2-37
hardware group test ails 2-36
hardware group test ails, running 2-43, 2-67
offl ine test operator panel control 2-67
operator panel test 2-74
operator panel test selection (example) 2-65
read the time of day (FN 01) 2-73
reading the timer 2-45
set the timer 2-45
terminal adapter/multiplexer optional tests,
running 2-78
terminal adapter/3299 optional tests, running 2-52
Test All 81 (CSU), special requirements 2-36
test parameters (table) 2-39
test request format 2-38
offline tests (terminal control)
See terminal offline test control
offline tests, selection of 2-40
OLTs, 3714 Model 1Rand 2R (figure) 2-180
online tests config A5/S5
test menu 2-83
tests online, description 2-81
test 0 terminal check 2-85
test 1 display logs menu 2-86
test 2 configuration menu 2-92
test 3 3270 device status information 2-94
test 4 reset logs and cable errors 2-99
test 5 display vital data 2-100
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
online tests config A5/S5 (continued)
test 6 display control blocks 2-103
test 7 color convergence 2-115
test 8 extended functions and programmed
symbols 2-115
test 10 port wrap tests 2-116
test 11 trace control 2-117
test A operator-originated alerts 2-120
online tests config 8
online test menu 2-125
tests online, description 2-122
test 0 terminal check Config 8 2-127
test 1 display logs menu Config 8 2-128
test 2 configuration menu Config 8 2-134
test 3 3270 device status information Config
8 2-136
test 4 reset logs and cable errors Config 8 2-142
test 5 display vital data Config 8 2-143
test 6 display control blocks Config 8 2-146
test 7 color convergence Config 8 2-158
test 8 extended functions and programmed symbols
Config 8 2-158
test 10 port wrap tests Config 8 2-159
test 11 trace control Config 8 2-160
test A operator-originated alerts Config 8 2-163
online tests (OLTs), 3174 Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and
92R controller 2-180
online tests, 317481 Rand 82R display subsystem
operator panel 1-7, 1-19
Alt 1 Adv pushbutton 1-20
Alt 2 Enter pushbutton 1-21
check cond indicator 1-20
data transfer indicator 1-20
function push buttons 1-20
IML pushbutton 1-21
indicators 1-20
offline test selection 2-59
status indicators 1-20
(figure) 1-20
operator panel connector (J10) (figure) 3-5
Operator Panel Isolation (MAP 0110) 2-8
operator panel lamp test 2-165
operator panel offline test control 2-67
operator panel removal/replacement 3-8
operator panel test 2-74
operator panel test selection example (figure) 2-66
operator panel (figure) 1-20
optional tests, diskette drive 2-71
optional tests, hardware group 2-37
p
packet types (X.25) 8-5
panel, call to patch area (figure) 2-175
panel, patches 2-173
panel, relocatable information (figure) 2-175
panel, zap patch (figure) 2-177
patch data panel (figure) 2-174
patch header panel (adding a zap patch) (figure) 2-177
patch header panel (figure) 2-174
patch menu (figure) 2-171
patch procedure, starting 2-170
patch procedure, 3174, using 2-169
patches panel 2-173
patches panel with one patch installed (figure) 2-178
patches panel (adding a zap patch) (figure) 2-176
patch, adding 2-173
PC patches 2-169
permanent virtual circuit (PVC) (X.25) 8-23
COMM key 8-23
LOCAL key 8-23
PVC indicators 8-23
PVC keys 8-23
planar board
communication adapter, type 1 1-7
communication adapter,type 2, 1-7
contents of 1-7
file adapter 1-7
processor 1-8
storage 1-8
terminal adapter 1-8
planar board removal 3-11
plug, wrap 1-27
pollutants, classification 1-26
port wrap tests 2-116,2-159
power connectors, DC (figure) 3-4
Power Load Isolation (MAP 0400) 2-31
power supply removal/replacement 3-8
primary virtual circuit (X.25) 8-24
problem analysis 1-3
problem determination
See MAPs (Maintenance Analysis Procedures)
processor 1-8
R
reading the timer 2-45
rear panel, 3174 1-21
receiver not ready (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-7
receiver ready (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-7
relocatable information panel (figure) 2-175
removal procedures 3-7
cover removal/replacement 3-7
diskette drive removal/replacement 3-10
fan removal/replacement 3-10
operator panel removal/replacement 3-8
planar board removal 3-11
power supply removal/replacement 3-8
storage card removal/replacement 3-9
repair information 3-1
DC power connectors 3-4
locations 3-2
operator panel connector (J10) (figure) 3-5
removal/replacement procedures 3-7
voltage charts, power supply 3-3
Index
X-21
replacement procedures 3-7
cover removal/replacement 3-7
diskette drive removal/replacement 3-10
fan removal/replacement 3-10
loop 2-39
operator panel removal/replacement 3-8
planar board removal 3-11
power supply removal/replacement 3-8
printer exerciser test (FN 07) 2-80
storage card removal/replacement 3-9
terminal adapter port wrap (FN 01) 2-79
terminal adapter wrap all (FN 05) 2-79
terminal exerciser test (FN 04) 2-79
terminal path test (FN 03) 2-79
3299 model 2,3 port wrap (FN 02) 2-79
3299 model 2,3 wrap all (FN 06) 2-80
reset confirmation (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-6
reset indication (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-6
reset logs 2-99, 2-142
reset request (PVC) (X.25) 8-6
reset test log - IML drive (FN 03) 2-57
restart confirmation (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-7
restart indication (PVC/SVC) 8-7
restart request (PVC/SVC) (X.25) 8-6
RPQ diskette 1-19
S
safety checklist 4-2
safety inspection guide 4-2
sample event log (figure) 1-15
selectable functions menu(figure) 2-42
selection menu, diskette drive (figure) 2-171,2-172
selections, Alt 1 IML (table) 1-22
service strategy 1-3
service strategy, 3174 (figure) 1-3
setting the timer 2-45
shock, classification 1-26
special tools and test 1-26
status and key operation (X.21) C-8
status code assignments 1-13
Status Code Not Indicated or Known (MAP 0120) 2-10
status codes 1-10, 2-5
assignment of 1-13
categories of 1-13
format of 1-11
multiple operational 1-11
offline test 1-12
operational 1-11
presentation of 1-11
ranges of 1-13
single operational 1-11
troubleshooting with, example 1-15
0000 through 0150 1-13
1000 through 1099 1-14
13xx 1-14
2xx 1-13
2xxx 1-14
X-22
status codes (continued)
3xx 1-13
3xxx 1-14
4xx 1-13
4xxx 1-14
5xx 1-13
5xxx 1-14
7xxx 1-14
8888 1-15
Status Display 8888 (MAP 0500) 2-34
stop on error 2-39, 2-70
stop on error parameter 2-44
storage 1-8
storage card removal/replacement 3-9
summary of states and indicators (X.25) 8-24
switched microcode function C-4
switched virtual circuit 8-25
switched virtual circuit (SVC) description 8-7
indicators 8-8
key functions 8-8
symbols, programmed 2-115,2-158
symptom charts 2-5
T
temperature 1-26
limits 1-26
range 1-26
terminal adapter 1-8
Terminal Adapter Isolation (MAP 0210) 2-12
terminal adapter optional tests, running
printer exerciser test (FN 07) 2-53
terminal adapter port wrap (FN 01) 2-53
terminal adapter wrap all (FN 05) 2-53
terminal exerciser test (FN 04) 2-53
terminal path test (FN 03) 2-53
3299 model 2,3 port wrap (FN 02) 2-53
3299 model 2,3 wrap all (FN 06) 2-53
terminal adapter/multiplexer optional tests,
running 2-78
printer exerciser test (FN 07) 2-80
terminal adapter port wrap (FN 01) 2-79
terminal adapter wrap all (FN 05) 2-79
terminal exerciser test (FN 04) 2-79
terminal path test (FN 03) 2-79
3299 model 2,3 port wrap (FN 02) 2-79
3299 model 2,3 wrap all (FN 06) 2-80
Terminal Attachment Configuration Card (MAP
0220) 2-14
terminal attachment configurations 1-4
terminal attachment, block diagram of (figure) 1-5,
2-54
terminal attachment, block diagram (figure) 2-80
terminal attachment, example of (figure) 1-6
terminal control 2-39,2-70
terminal control parameter 2-44
terminal control test menus 2-41
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
Terminal Isolation (MAP 0250) 2-25
terminal multiplexer, 3299 1-5
terminal offline test control 2-40
three terminal control methods 2-40
terminal ready (S, 4, or 6) indicator check 2-169
Terminal(s) Problem Entry (MAP 0200) 2-11
test log function numbers (table) 2-55
test log (figure) 2-56
test menu (figure) 2-41
test monitor menu list (figure) 2-60
test monitor program 2-36
test parameters 2-39
loop 2-39
parameter table 2-39
test parameters menu (figure) 2-42
test request format 2-38
test selection example, operator panel (figure) 2-66
test 0 terminal check 2-85
tests online 2-81
tests online, config 8 2-122
tests, port wrap 2-116, 2-159
testloper switch, V.35 three-switch (figure) 2-48,2-77
test, alerts 2-120,2-163
test, lamp 2-165
time of day, reading 2-73
timer, reading 2-45
timer, setting 2-45
time, reading 2-73
tools 1-26
wrap plugs 1-26
trace control 2-117, 2-160
trace facility 2-117,2-160
troubleshooti ng
See MAPs (Maintenance Analysis Procedures)
type numbers, FRU 1-9
U
using the 3174 patch procedure
utility diskette 1-19
wrap plug, X.21 (figure)
1-27
X
X.21 feature C-2
X.21 wrap plug (figure) 1-27
X.21, 3174 configurations for 1-4
Models 81 Rand 91 R - telecommunications attached
(remote) (EIA/V.35) 1-4
Models 82R and 92R - telecommunications attached
(remote) (X.21) 1-4
X.25 cause and diagnostic codes 8-26
X.25 feature 8-3
link level 8-3
logical link control 8-3
packet level 8-3
physical level 8-3
timers 8-4
X.25 network 8-5
call accepted (SVC) 8-5
call connected (SVC) 8-5
call request (SVC) 8-5
clear confirmation (SVC) 8-6
clear indication (SVC) 8-6
data (PVC/SVC) 8-7
incoming call (SVC) 8-5
logical channels 8-5
packet types 8-5
receiver not ready (PVC/SVC) 8-7
receiver ready (PVC/SVC) 8-7
reset confi rmation (PVC/SVC) 8-6
reset indication (PVC/SVC) 8-6
reset request (PVC) 8-6
restart confirmation (PVC/SVC) 8-7
restart indication (PVC/SVC) 8-7
restart request (PVC/SVC) 8-6
virtual circuits 8-5
X.25 states 8-8
2-169
v
vibration, classification 1-26
virtual circuits (X.25) 8-5
vital data, display 2-100,2-143
voltage charts, power supply 3-3
V.35 cable wrap test 2-48
V.35 three-switch testloper switch (figure) 2-48
V.35 Three-Switch TestlOper Switch(figure) 2-77
V.35 wrap plug (figure) 1-27
W
wrap plug 1-27
wrap plug, EIA/V.35 (figure) 1-27
wrap plug, V.35 (figure) 1-27
Z
zap patch panel (figure) 2-177
ZAP patches 2-169
zap patch, adding 2-176
zap patch, adding (patch header panel) (figure) 2-177
zap patch, adding (patches panel) (figure) 2-176
Numerics
3174 configurations 1-4
3174 dump diskette 1-19
3174 general description
control diskette 1-19
diskettes 1-18
event log,error recording 1-17
hardware group (HG) numbers 1-8
limited function diskette 1-19
operator panel, error recording 1-17
RPQ diskette 1-19
Index
X-23
3174 general description (continued)
status code assignments 1-13
utility diskette 1-19
3174 dump diskette 1-19
3174 hardware configurations 1-4
3174 Model1R and 2R OLTs (figure) 2-180
3174 Models 81R, 82R, 91R, and 92R 1-4
3174 patch procedure, using 2-169
3174 rear panel 1-21
3174 terminal attachment configurations 1-5
3270 device status 2-94, 2-136
3299 Model 1 Isolation (MAP 0240) 2-20
3299 Models 2 and 3 Isolation (MAP 0230) 2-15
3299 terminal multiplexer 1-5
40 prompt message, obtaining 2-39
Special Characters
IEIA/V.3S, 3174 configurations for
X-24
1-4
3174 Models 81 R through 92R Maintenance Information
IBM 3174 Establishment Controller
Models 81 R, 82R, 91 R, and 92R
Maintenance Information
READER'S
COMMENT
FORM
Publication No. SY27-2584-03
This manual is part of a library that serves as a reference source for systems analysts, programmers, and
operators of IBM systems. You may use this form to communicate your comments about this publication,
its organization, or subject matter, with the understanding that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Note: Copies of IBM publications are not stocked at the location to which this form is addressed. Please
direct any requests for copies of publications, or for assistance in using your IBM system, to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality.
Possible topics for comment are:
Clarity
Accuracy
Completeness
Organization
Coding
Retrieval
Legibility
If you wish a reply, give your name, company, mailing address, date, and location of your local IBM branch
office:
What is your occupation?
Number of latest Newsletter associated with this publication:
Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. (Elsewhere, an IBM
office or representative will be happy to forward your comments or you may mail directly to the address in
the Edition Notice on the back of the title page.)
SY27 -2584-03
Reader's Comment Form
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
Fold and tape
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
INTHE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, N.Y.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
International Business Machines Corporation
Dept. E02
P.O. Box 12195
Research Triangle Park, N.C. 27709-9990
Fold and tape
-- ----_
- ---. -®
-- -
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
-------------- -
t'u" ,,",umber
25t16b4
File Number
36/38/310/4300/8 ' 00/3174-09
SY27-2584-03
Printed n U S.A
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2013:05:25 19:18:39-08:00 Modify Date : 2013:05:25 20:10:48-07:00 Metadata Date : 2013:05:25 20:10:48-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.53 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:454596a1-447e-5943-ae32-b53bdeaea1b5 Instance ID : uuid:9e44f2d1-6e56-eb43-98a1-0da6df1591ed Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 340EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools